Nokia 9210i User Manual
UserâÂÂs Guide 9357546 Issue 4 EN Electronic userâÂÂs guide released subject to "Nokia UserâÂÂs Guides Terms and Conditions, 7 th June, 1998 "
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. Copyright é 2000- 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Reproductio n, transf er, distrib ution or stora ge of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior written perm ission of N okia is pro hibited. Nokia, Nokia Conn ecting People, B ounce and Triple Po p are trademar ks or registered t rademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound m ark of Nokia Corporation. O ther product a nd company name s mentioned herein may be t rademarks or tradenames of their respective owne rs. T his p ro duct inc lu des s o ft w a re lic en s ed f r om Sy m bian Ltd é S ym b i an L td 1998 - 20 03. A ll r i ghts r es e r ve d. Symbian OS and all Symbian OS -b ased trademarks and logos are tradem arks of Symbian Li mited. . Java⢠is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc é 1984-1997 D ataViz Inc. All rights rese rved. This softw are con tains por tions of the file tra nslation library of Conver sions Plus, a produ ct of DataV iz Inc., 55 Corpora te Drive, Trumbul l, CT 06611 USA (20 3) 268-0030. International C orrectSpe ll⢠English spelling cor rection sys tem, 1995 b y Lernout & Hauspie Spee ch Products N.V. All rights reserved. Re production or disassembly o f embodied a lgorithms or d atabase proh ibited. English spelling s oftware develo ped by Lernout & H auspie Spee ch Products N.V. UK English Con cise Interna tional Electr onic Thesaurus Co pyright é 199 5 by Lernout & Hau spie Speech Pr oducts N.V. All rights rese rved. Reprod uction or disa ssembly of emb odied progra ms and database s prohibit ed. Incorporates MPPC î compression f rom Hi/fn⢠Part of the sof tware in this product is é Copyright ANT Lt d. 1998. All rights r eserved. Stac î, LZS î, é19 96, Stac, Inc., é199 4-1996 Microso ft Corporation. In cludes one or more U.S. Pat ents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126 739, 5146221, an d 5414425. Other patents pe nding. Incorporates L ZSî compression from Hi/fnâ¢. Hi/fn î, LZS î, é19 88-98, Hi/fn. Inclu des one or mo re U.S. Patents: No. 4 701745, 501600 9, 5126739, 5146 221, and 5414425. Other patents pending . Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvem ents to any of the products described i n this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible for any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequential or indirect damages howsoever caused. The contents of this document are provided "as is". Except as required by applicable law, no warranties of any kind, either express or implied , including, but not li mited to, th e implied w arranties o f merchant ability and f itness for a particula r purpose, are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this do cument. Nokia reserves the right to revise thi s document or withd raw it at any time without prior notice. The availability of particular products may vary by region. Please check with the Nokia dealer nearest to you.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. This product uses certificates for security functionality. More information on Nokia certi ficates can be acquired from Nokia web pages. DECLARATION OF CO NFORMITY We, NOKIA CORPOR ATION de clare unde r our sole responsi bility t hat the pr oduct RAE -5N is in c onformit y with the provisio ns of the foll owing Council D irective:1999 /5/EC. A copy of the Declarati on of Conformit y can be found f rom http://www.nokia.com/phones/d eclaration_of_conformit y/ IMPORTANT NOTICE REGARDING THE W ARRANTY In order to be able the use of this product for many years, please note that it has a very fragile and expensive colour display , which may break if you drop, knock or shake the product. Our Limited Manufacturer ôs Warranty shall not apply if the product has been subject to rough handling.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. Table of Contents Introduction ...................... ........................ ................... .............. 1 Getting help........ ........... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 3 Facts about you r communicator .......... ........... .............. .......... ........... ........... ..... 5 GSM data transmission ................. .......... .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 8 General information .................... ......................... .................... 11 Communicator d isplay................ ........... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........ 11 Communicator keyb oard............ ............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........ 16 Connectors .......... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 20 To charge the battery ......... ........... .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ..... 21 Memory card ................. ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... .............. .......... ... 24 General features ............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 26 To install software from the CD-ROM ........... .............. ............. ........... .......... ... 34 To activate the infra red connection .......... .......... ........... .............. .......... ........... 35 To transfer dat a from other devices ............ ........... ........... ........... ............. ........ 36 Phone ........ ......................... .................. ......................... .............. 39 Selection keys ....... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 40 Display indicators .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 41
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. To make a call............ ........... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 42 To answer a call ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 45 To manage calls ................... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........ 45 Keypad lock .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ... 46 To change profile s ......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... 47 To view help ....... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... 48 To use the menu s................. .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........ 48 Messages (Menu 1) ............... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 50 Call register (Menu 2 ) .................. ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ........... ..... 53 Settings (Menu 3)............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... .............. ........ 56 Call divert (Menu 4)................. ........... .......... .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... 62 Infrared (Menu 5 ) ............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... 62 SIM services (Me nu 6)............. ............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... 63 Desk .................... ......................... ................... ........................ .... 65 Main view ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ............. ... 65 Telephone .................. .................. ......................... ...................... 69 To make a call manually ......... ........... ............. ........... ........... ............. ........... ........ 70 To call a number in the Telephone direct ory .......... ............. ............. .............. 70 To call a number in a recent ca lls list ........... ............. ........... ............. ........... ... 71 To answer a call ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 72 To call and create a voice mailbox ........... ........... ........... ........... .......... .............. 72
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. To record a call ....... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 73 To make a new call during a call............. ............. ........... .............. .......... ........... 73 To make conference calls ..... ............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... 74 To transfe r calls ................. ........... ........... .......... ........... .............. .......... ........... ........ 76 To answer a waitin g call ............... .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ..... 76 To send DTMF tones d uring a call ................ ........... ........... ............. ........... ........ 77 Telephone Setting s ................. .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... .............. .......... ... 77 Flight profile ............... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........ 91 Contacts ... .................. ......................... ......................... .............. 93 Contacts director y .................. ............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 93 To make a contact card................. ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 94 To open a contact card ........... .............. .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 96 To move or copy contacts from a SIM card .................... ............. .............. ..... 96 To search for a cont act card .................. .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 96 To change fields in a contact card.................. .............. .......... ........... ............. ... 97 To attach a ring ing tone ....... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 99 To insert a picture................... .......... .............. .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 99 To create or modify t emplates ...... ........... ........... ........... ............. ........... .......... ... 100 To store DTMF tones ..... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... .............. .......... ........... 101 To create contac t groups ................ ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 102 To create a SIM contact card ................ ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ..... 1 04 To send a contact card as a busin ess card ...................... ........... ............. ........ 105
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. To receive a business card ................ .......... .............. ........... .......... .............. ........ 106 Settings ............... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 10 7 To create a new contacts dat abase................ ........... .......... .............. ........... ..... 109 Calendar . ......................... ........................ ......................... .......... 111 Calendar entries ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... .............. .......... ........... ... 111 Views .............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... 118 Icons ............. .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ............. .1 2 5 Task lists ................... ........... ............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........ 1 26 To search for Calendar en tries ................. ........... ............. ........... .......... ........... ... 127 Settings ............... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 12 8 Internet ................................. ......................... .................. .......... 131 To set up your Interne t access point ............... .......... .............. .......... .............. 132 To connect to the World Wide Web.... .............. .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 141 To open a Web page ..... ........... ........... .......... .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... 143 To browse the WWW............... ........... .......... .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... 144 WWW settings ........................................................................................................ 148 Cache, History, and Plugins view ......... .............. .......... ........... ............. ........... ... 149 Bookmarks .......... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 150 WAP ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 151 Java............ ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ... .. 156
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. Messaging ..................................... ......................... .................... 159 Messaging centre........... .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 160 Fax ......... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........ ... 168 Mail .......... .......... ........... .............. .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ... .. 172 Short Messag e Service .................. ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 185 Office ......................... ......................... ......................... .............. 191 Word Processor............... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 191 Sheet ................. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........ 196 Presentation viewer ...... .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 204 File manag er ............... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........ 206 Extras ................... ......................... .................. ......................... .. 215 Clock .................. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ....... .2 1 5 Calculator ............ ............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 217 Control pane l .................. ........... ........... ........ ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 2 18 Recorder ......... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ............. ........ 231 Imaging ........ ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 23 3 RealOne Player.............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... .......... ... 236 Cell broadcast ............ ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ..... 237 Fax modem .............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 239 Troubleshooting ......... ......................... ......................... .............. 245
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. CARE AND MAINTENANCE ................... ......................... .......... 259 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION ................ ...................... 261 Glossary .............. ......................... ................... ........................ .... 269 Index ................... ................... ......................... ........................ .... 279
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. FOR YOUR SAFETY Read these simple gu idelines. Breaking th e rules may be danger ous or illegal. Further detail ed information is gi ven in this manual . Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIR ST Don â t use the communicator while driving. INTERFERENCE All wireles s phones may get interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any regulations or rules. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Don â t u se the pho ne at a refu elling point. Don â t use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF N EAR BLAST ING Don â t use t he phone where blasting i s in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE SENSIBLY U se only in the normal position. Don â t touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair phone equipment.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTAN CE Your communicator is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make backup copies of all important data. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user â s guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. CALLING Close the cover and ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Enter the phone nu mber, including the area code, th en press . To end a call, press . To answer a call, press . EMERGENCY CALLS Close the device cover. Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press as many times as needed (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear the display. Enter the emergency number, then press . Give your location. Do not end the call until t old to do so.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 1 Introduction 1. Introduction Congratulations on purchasing the Nokia 9210i Communi cator. It is a complete communications tool: it is a wireless phone, messaging device, and a palmtop organiser in one package. Figure 1 Phone Earpiece Front Back Microphone
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 2 Introduction The Nokia 9210i Communicator consists of two parts: the phone and the communicator interface. The phone is on the device cover and the communicator interface is inside the cover, both as shown in Figures 1 and 2. Figure 2 Both these parts use the same information from the memory of the communicator - they are not separate devices. For example, the phone uses the names and phone numbers stored in the Contacts directory of the communicator interface, and the communicator interface uses the phone for voice and data communications, for example, when sending and receivi ng faxes and connecting to the Intern et. Tip: The comm unicator interface has no power on/ off button - it switches it self on when you open the cover and switches off when you close the cover. The communicator interface contains many organiser and communications applications. The large keyboard, command buttons, and display make using the applications easy. commun icator interface
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 3 Introduction The phone is designed for making and answering calls quickly. The communicator looks and operates like other Nokia wireless phones, except the earpie ce and microphone are at the rear of the device. The phone is switched on and off by pressing the button on the cover. WARNING: Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Getting help Online Help The communicator has a help function, which you can access from any application or view. To view help, press the key on the communicator interface keyboard. You are shown a page of information relevant to the task you are doing. You can also search the help topics for specific subjects and keywords. Tip: The key is on the bottom row of the keyboard. About the guides in the sales package The Nokia communicator sales package contains the following guides either in print or as PDF files. ⢠To help you begin to use your communicator, turn to the Getting Started Guide supplied in your sales package. It explains the start-up procedure and gives basic information on how to use the various applications.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 4 Introduction ⢠This userâ s guide explains in more detail how the Nokia 9210i Communicator operates. â General information â identifies the variou s parts of the communicator and their functions, as well as the common features of the communicator. The rest of this user â s guide deals with the communicator applications and the phone. There is a short glossary of Internet and wireless terms and abbreviations at the back of the user â s guide . ⢠The PC Suite Guide explains the functionality of PC Suite for the Nokia 9210i Communicator. With PC Suite you can move, copy, synchronise, back up, and restore data between your communicator and a compatible PC. ⢠The Software on CD-ROM Guide explains in detail the functionality of the applications found on the CD-ROM that you can install on your communicator. ⢠The Add-on Applications Guide gives a brief introduction of other software available for the Nokia 9210i Commun icator. This guide is only available in a printed version. ⢠The Settings Checklist helps you to connect your Nokia 9210i Communicator with different kinds of wireless services. The PC Suite Guide and the Soft ware on CD-ROM Guide are both on the CD-ROM under the section â Using the Nokia 9210i Communicator â . In this user â s guide and the Getting Started Guide, the names of the commands on the display are in bold and the settings and options are in italics. Note: If you are switching from the Nokia 9000 Communicator, the Nokia 9000i Communicat or, the Nokia 9 110 Communicator, or th e Nokia 9110i Communicator to the Nokia 9210i Communicator, see â To transfer data from other devices â on page 36 and in the PC Suite Guide on the CD- ROM.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 5 Introduction Facts about your communicator Network Services The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 900 / 1800 networks. Dualband/triband is a network dependant feature. Check with your local service provider if you can subscribe to and use this feature. A number of features included in this guide are called Network Services. These are special services that you arrange through your wireless service provider. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them through your service provider and obtain instructions for their use from your service provider. Note: Some networks may not support all language-dependent characters and/ or services. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from ACP-12, ACP-9E, ACP-9X and ACP-9A. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers and accessories approved by the phone manufacturer for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 6 Introduction accessories, please check with your dealer. When you disconne ct the power cord of any accessory, grasp a nd pull the plug, not the cord. Services that need to be subscribed to are typically the short message service, Internet, and fax. After you have subscribed to t he service funtions, you can then activate these functions as described in this user â s guide. The manual activation commands for various services are not presented in this user â s guide (for example, using the and characters for activatin g or deactivating services). The Nokia 9210i Communicator, neve rtheless, is capable of handl ing commands given in that form. For these commands, please consult with your service providers. Because the number of special services depends on what se rvices are available in your home network, it is, unfortunately, impossible to provide a comprehensive list of the services and settings you need in this use r â s guide. Therefore, this user â s guide gives general information about additional services. Please contact your network operator for further information about the availability and the details of services in your home network. Tip: Write the information you obtain from your service provider down on the Settings Checklist for future reference. If a service requires separate phone numbers or specific settings, they must be stored in the settings of the communicator. For example: Sending and receiving short messages requires that this service is supported by the network you are using and activated for your SIM card, and that t he phone number of the message centre is stored in the settings of the SMS application. Internet access requires that data service is supporte d by the network you are using and activated for your SIM card. In addition, you must have obtained an Internet access point from an Internet service provider.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 7 Introduction Stickers on the sales package The stickers contain important information for service and customer support purposes. Keep these stickers in a safe and secure place. Attach the sticker to the page preceding the Table of Contents of this user â s guide. The correct place for the sticker is indicated with a frame. Attach the sticker to the Club Nokia I nvitation Card, if supplie d in the sales package. Access codes The Nokia 9210i Communicator uses several access codes to protect against unauthorised use of your communicator and SIM card. The access codes you need most often are: ⢠the lock code to lock up your communicator, and ⢠the PIN code, which is provided with the SIM card. IMPORTANT: The default lock code is 12345 . For security reasons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from the communicator. For more information on changing access codes, see section â Securityâ on page 218. Note that no passcode system can guarantee absolute prevention of unauthorised access. You can change access codes that are used by both the phone and the communicator interface via either of them, provided t hat the code can be changed. For further details on access codes, see â Securityâ on page 218.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 8 Introduction The Internet applications of the communicator use passwords and user names to protect against unauthorised use of the Internet and its services. These passwords are changed in the settings of the Internet applications. Contact information Tip: You can synchronise the contact information on your communicator with a corresponding application on a compatible PC. See the PC Suite Guide on the CD- ROM for details. All contact information that you store in the Contacts application, such as names, addresses, and phone numbers, goes into the Contacts directory. The phone, the communicator interface, and each of the applications have their own views of the Contacts directory. The information shown depends on the information the selected application can use. For example, when you are making a call via the phone, you can view the name and phone number(s) of the contact. Possible fax numbers, e-mail addresses, job titles, and so on, are not shown. GSM data transmission The Nokia 9210i Communicator employs the data transmission capabilities of the GSM network to send faxes, short messages, and e-mail, and to establish connections with remote computers. Wireless data connections can be made from most locations where your phone operates. However, it is recommended that you move the communicator to a location where the strongest possible wireless signal can be obtained. When the signal is strong, data transmission is efficient. In general, you should not expect the same performance from wireless data communications as from landline communications, due to the inherent characteristics of the wireless environment. The following factors may impa ir wireless connecti ons:
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 9 Introduction Noise Radio interference from electronic appliances and equipment, as well as from other phones will affect the quality of wireless data transmission. Cell handover As the phone user moves from one network cell to another, the signal strength of the channel drops and the wireless telephone exchange may handover the user to a different cell and frequency, where the signal is stronger. A cell handover may also occur when the user is stationary, due to varying wireless traffic loads. Such handovers may cause slight delays in the transmission. Electrostatic discharge A discharge of static electricit y from a finger or a conductor may cause erroneous functions in electronic devices. The discharge may result in distorted display and unstable software operation. Wireless connections may become unreliable, data may become corrupted, and the transmission halted. In this case you need to end the existing call (if any), close the cover and switch off the phone (if on) and remove the battery. Then replace the battery and establish a new wireless connection. Dead spots and dropouts Dead spots are areas where radio signals cannot be received. Dropouts occur when the phone user passes through an area where the radio signal is blocked or reduced by geographical features or large structures.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 10 Introduction Signal impairment Distance and obstacles can cause signals to become out-of-phase. They can also cause reflected signals. Both situations result in a loss of signal strength. Low signal strength Due to either distance or obstacles, the radio signal strength from a cell site may not be strong or stable enough to provide a reliable data connection for communication. Therefore, to ensure the best possible communication, remember the following point s: ⢠The data connection works best when the communicator is in a stationary position. Attempting wireless data communication while in a moving vehicle is not recommended. Fax transmission is more easily impaired than data or short message transmission. ⢠Do not place the communicator on a metal surface. ⢠Check that the signal strength on the communicator display is sufficient. Moving the communicator within a room, especially towards a window, may result in a stronger signal. If signals are not strong enough to support a voice call, data connection should not be attempted until you can find a location with better signal reception. Note: When the antenna is up , the signal is stronger.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 11 General information 2. General information This chapter explains how the communicator operates and how to supply power to the communicator. For information on first start-up and setup of your communicator, see the Getting Started Guide. Communicator display Figure 3 The communicator interface is turned on by opening the cover. The application that was active the last time the communicator was used is shown on the display. When you close the cover, the communicator interface turns off its display and saves all data. Scroll bar Commands Command bu ttons Search fie ld Indicato r ar e a Name and icon of appli cation Menu bar
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 12 General information Tip: When a command is dimmed, it cannot be used. The commands always correspond to the command buttons, as shown in Figure 3. The applications are run in the middle of the display. The indicators show application and system-related information. To move around a selected frame and select items, use the Arrows key at the low er right-hand corner of the keyboard. Where there is a search field at the bottom of the display, you can search for items by using the keyboard to enter text into the search field. Figure 4 If there is more than one frame in the view, the selected one is always highlighted. You can move from one frame to another by pressing the Tabulator key. See Figure 4. This item is selected. Details of item. The left ha nd fra me is highl ighted . Pr ess the Tab k ey to highl ight the righ t fram e. . The commands that you can apply .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 13 General information Dialogs and pages Figure 5 An example of a dialog which contains several pages is shown in Figure 5. Indicators The application icon and application name in the indicator area display the application you are in at the moment, as shown below . The icons that appear on the Inbox/Outbox indicator rows change according to the application and current situation. The battery level and signal strength indicators are the same as shown on the phone display when the phone is on. This is a page. This is a dialo g. Use the Arrows k ey to mo ve within a page. Another page. To go t o it, press the Menu k ey.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 14 General information Call status - You have a voice call, and the handsfree loudspeaker and microphone are on. - A voice call with the handsfree off. The loudspeaker and microphone are muted. - An open data connection, see the Internet chapter on page 131. - The communicator is receiving or sending a fax. - The communicator is trying to establ ish an infrared conne ction. - An infrared connection has been established. - The infrared connection is obstructed. - The communicator is connected to a PC. - The communicator is connected to a PC via cable. - The communicator is being used as a fax modem. - The communicator is in a profile, in this case in the â Meetingâ profile. See â Telephone Settings â on page 77. Applicat io n icon Application name Inbox/Ou tbox Signal streng th an d battery level Time
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 15 General information - Time. You can adjust time in the Clock application. See page 215. Inbox/Outbox - The inbox indicator informs you that you have received a fax, short message, or mail. - The document Outbox contains unsent messages. See â Outboxâ on page 163. Battery level - The battery is low and you should recharge it. - The battery is charging. The bar scrolls until the battery is fully charged. The outlet plug icon indicates that the communicator is connected to an external power source. - The battery is fully charged. All the four bars are displayed. Signal strength - The communicator is connected to a wireless network. Whe n all the four bars are shown, the wireless signal reception is good. If the signa l is weak, make sure the antenna is up. You ca n also try to improve the recepti on by moving the communicator slightly or by using it in the handsfree mode. - The phone is on, but it is outside network coverage. - The phone is off. You cannot make or receive calls, and you cannot receive messages with any of the communications applications (SMS, data, fax, or mail).
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 16 General information Communicator keyboard Figure 6 In addition to the normal character and number keys, the keyboard ha s a number of special keys, as shown in Figur e 6. Application buttons The buttons at the top of the keyboard start the corresponding applications or open application groups. The buttons are: Desk , Telep hone , Messaging , Interne t , Contacts , Calendar, Office and Extras . To use the applications When the cover is opened, the application th at was active the last time the communicator was used, is shown on the display.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 17 General information To switch to another application or application group, press the corresponding application button . You can even do this duri ng a call. You need not exi t an application be fore starting another. A ll inactive applica tions remain in the background until you activate them again. Note: When you open the WWW application, a ll other applications are cl osed to reserve memory for WWW. To send or receive calls or messages with any of the communications applications, remember that the phone must be switched on and in a service area with adequate wireless signal strength. Note: Information need not be specifically saved. When you press Close , switch to another application, or close the device cover, the Nokia 9210i Communicator saves all data. To create a keyboard shor tcut to a preferred link or application Some applications buttons like Office, Desk, and Extras do not open applications directly. However, you can specify an application in an application group as the preferred application or a link on Desk as the preferred link and access it directly from the keyboard. You can open a preferred application by clicking Ctrl the application bu tton. Example: If you make the Word Processor application preferred inside the Office application group, you can press Ctrl Office within any application to open Word Processor. To make an application preferred, open an application group (such as Office), press the Menu key, and select Tools > Preferre d application . Select the application from the list. See the exampl e in the column adjacent to this paragraph. To make a link preferred, open Desk, press the Menu key and select Tools > Preferred link ⦠Select th e link from the li st.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All r ights reserved. 18 General information Escape ( Esc) To cancel an action, you can either press the Esc key or Cancel . Pressing the Esc key also cancels and dismisses a dialog, and dismisses an information note. Tabulator or Tab You can use the Tab (Tabulator) key to move from one frame to another. When writing or editing documents, the Tab key moves the cursor to the next tab stop. Shift The Shift key is used togethe r with letter keys to insert capital letters and used together with number keys to inse rt special characters. The Shift key does not need to be held down when pressing a key: pressing first Shift and then a letter or number key generates an uppercase or special character. In combination with Control key and a particular letter key the Shift key generates shortcut commands. See â Shortcutsâ on page 27. In writing and editing text, the Shift key and the Arrows key can be used to select text, see â Shortcutsâ on page 27. Control (Ctrl) Pressed together with other keys on the keyboard, the control key generates shortcut commands which can be used in viewing and writing text. See â Short cutsâ on page 27.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 19 General information Character (Chr) Tip: You can use the character key with other keys to zoom the view and activate or deactivate infrared. Press the character key to open a character table where you can select special characters. Press the character key together with characters and commands that are shown in green colour on the keyboard to access them. Press the character key, keep it pressed down and tap a letter key to access accented and other special letters. Help ( ) For online help at any time, press the key on the communicator keyboard. For more information, see â Online Help â on page 3. Menu Tip: Using the menu key, the Zoom option is sometimes available. It allows you to magnify the view on display. Pressing the Menu key reveals options. The options available depend on the application you are in. Use the Arrows key to move to the desired option and press Select . The chosen option only affects the item that is currently selected, open, or being sent. The Menu may also contain the generic option Settings . Arrows key Tip: In the WWW browser application, use the Arrows key to move a pointer around the display. See page 146. The Arrows key can be used to move the cursor or selected frame.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 20 General information Enter When the cursor is shown, pressing Enter moves the cursor to the beginning of the next text line or adds a new line. Enter can also be used to open folders, applications, and documents. When a command is underlined, you can press Enter instead of the command button. When information notes are shown, press Enter instead of OK. In options and settings, when a value can be toggle d, you may press Enter instead of Change . Connectors The Nokia 9210i Communicator can be connected to a variety of devices. See Figure 7. Figure 7 Infrared connection Charger connecti on RS232 adapt er cable DLR-2L or headset HD C-8L connectio n
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 21 General information Use the infrared port for connect ing to a compatible PC, printer, digital camera, or another communicator. To charge the battery Note: See important safety information on battery usage on page 22. Tip: To check the current battery level, see t he battery indicator on the communicator or phone display. 1 Connect the charger cable to the bottom of the communicator, as shown in Figure 8. Figure 8 2 Connect the charger to the proper voltage AC wall outlet. While charging is in progress, the battery level indicator scrolls on the phone display. 3 When the battery is fully charged, the bars stop scrolling and four bars are displayed. You may now remove the charger plug from the communicator. Note: You can use all the features of the communicator during charging.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 22 General information When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of operation time remain, a warning tone will sound, and the message BATTERY IS LOW will be repeated at regular intervals on the phone display. When the charge level becomes too low for operation, the RECHARGE BATTERY message will be displayed, accompanied by a warning tone. If you do not connect the commun icator to a charger, the communicator switches itself off. Note: When you connect a communicator with a fully discharged battery to a charger, it will take 30-60 seconds before the CHARGING message appears on the display and the battery indicator bar starts scrolling. After that, it may take 10-30 seconds before you can switch the phone on. Battery information Tip: Read this section for information on how to prolong the life of your battery. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery which is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on bottom of the battery) for example when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 1 5 ð C and 25 ð C (59 ð F and 77 ð F). A communicator with a hot or cold battery may temporarily not work, even when the batte ry is fully charged. Batteries' performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 23 General information Do not dispose of batteries in a fire ! Dispose of batteries according to local regulations (e.g. recycling). Do not dispose as household waste. Note that a new bat tery â s full performance is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles! The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the operating time (talk-time and standby time) is noticeably shorter than normal, it is ti me to buy a new battery. Use only batteries approved by the communicator manufacturer and recharge your battery only with the chargers approved by the manufacturer. Unplug the charger when not in use. Do n ot leave the battery connect ed to a charger for longe r than a week, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused a fully charged battery will discharge itself over time. Temperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Battery operation time is affected by the following: whether both the phone and the communicator interface are on, radio signal strength, various phone settings, and the length of the screen blanker period. It is always recommended to keep a charged battery in the communicator. Keeping the battery charged maximises the lifetime of the backup battery supplying power to the real-time clock of the communicator. In case the backup battery is drained, it will be automatically charged the nex t time a charged battery is reconnected to the communicator. Always close the device cover be fore removing the battery. Closing the cover will save all data.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 24 General information Note: The battery does not fit into place if the SIM card is not correctly installed. Do not force the battery into plac e! Check that you have inserted the SIM card as described in the Getting Started Guide. If the SIM card is incorrectly instal led, remove it by pullin g it out of the slot, and insert it aga in. Memory card Tip: To protect the memory card with a password, see â To lock a memory card â on page 212. You can use a memory card to manage your documents, contacts databases, applications, backups, and so on. Use the items on the memory card in the same way as corresponding items on the communicator. You can, for example, install and remove software to and from the memory card with the Install/Remove software application, and send messages to contacts in the contacts directory of the memory card. Note: Do not remove the memory card in the middle of an operation. Note: If you want to use a Nokia 9210 Communicator â s memory card in your Nokia 9210i Communicator, you must first format the card. Note that formatting deletes all information from the memor y card. To format the memory card, open the File manager application in Office and press the Menu key. Select Memory ca rd > Format memory c ard ⦠, and press Format . However, you can use a Nokia 9210 Communicator â s memory card in your Nokia 9210i Communicator temporarily for copying files between the memory card and the device. If you do so, restart your Communicator after inserting the original memory card by removing the battery and replacing it again.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 25 General information To insert a memory card 1 Close the device cover and make sure that the phone is switched off. If it is on, press . 2 Open the hatch at the back of the communicator, using a minimum of two fingers - one finger on each si de of the hatch. 3 Slide the memory card under the memory card holder as shown in Figure 9. Make sure that the gold contacts of the card are facing down. Figure 9 4 When you have secured the card in place, close the hatch. WARNING: Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 26 General information General features To select several items at once Where multi-selection is available, you can select several items at once. The selected items are highlighted. The commands you use affect all the selec ted items. Multi-selection works in most lists. To select items one by one, scroll to the item and pres s and hold down Ctrl. While pressing down Ctrl, scroll to each item you want to select and press the space bar. To select a larger se t of consecutive items, paint the items by pressing and holdi ng Shift using the â§ and ⨠arrows on the Arrows key. Multi-selection is cleared when you press the Arrows key. Special characters The character key Chr on the communicator keyboard is used to create cha racters that are not included on the keyboard. The character key can always be used when you are able to enter characters from the keyboard. Note: Some special characters may get distorted when sent out of your communicator. This happens, for example, with mail or short messages, and is because of differences in network protocols. To insert special cha racters from the char acter table 1 Press and release the Chr key. A dialog opens. 2 Press the Menu key to select the page with the character you want to insert. 3 Select the special character or characters, then press Insert .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 27 General information To insert special charac ters from the ke yboard There are two ways to insert special characters directly from the keyboard. To insert characters printed on the keys in green, press and hold the Chr key and simultaneously press a key with a special character printed in green. To generate special characters by using certain unmarked keys, for example, â aâ and â eâ , do as follows: 1 Press and hold the Chr key and simultaneously press a letter key. The first special character matching the letter key is displayed. 2 Continue to hold down the Chr key and press the letter key again. The second special character is shown in place of the first one, and so on, until the first character is shown again. Press Shift or the Caps lock key to change the case of the special character. Shortcuts Tip: Many shortcuts a re also displayed next to menu commands in applications. There are several shortcuts you can u se in the document applications. The shortcuts vary depending on the application used. The following table lists some of the available shortcuts: Shortcut Function Ctrl a Ctrl c Ctrl x Ctrl v Ctrl z Selects all Copies selected text Cuts selected text P astes selected text Undoes (the last action)
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 28 General information Note: For information on the shortcuts available for the WWW application, see the Internet section of this guide. Ctrl b Ctrl i Ctrl u Applies bold Applies italics Applies underlining Ctrl t Ctrl d Full screen mode (if available) Deletes files, messages, shortcuts and other items. Ctrl p Print or Properties Ctrl n Ctrl o Ctrl e Creates a new file Open Close Ctrl s Ctrl Shift s Save Save as Chr left/right arrow (on Arrows key) Moves the cursor to the beginning or end of the line Chr up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Moves up or down a page Chr Ctrl up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Moves to start or end of document Shift Ctrl left/right arrow (on Arrows key) Selects the previous or next word Shift right/left/up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Selects one text character or line Shift Chr up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Selects text, page by page, inside a document Shortcut Function
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 29 General information To save files When you close a new file for the first time, or want to save it, you will be asked to enter a name for the file and to identify a folder in which it should be saved. Figure 10 The following commands become available in the dialog: OK - Confirms the name of the document and saves the document. Browse - Opens a dialog in which you can browse for a location where you save your file. Change format - Opens a list of formats. You can now change the forma t of the document being saved. Cancel - No saving is done and the dialog is closed. Note: If you want to quit the application, but you do not want to save the file, press the Menu key and select File > Discard changes , then close the file.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 30 General information To send documents In addition to sending messages in the Messaging application, you can also send documents out of the communicator in the applications where the Send function is available on the Menu list. As a fax - You can send th e document as a f ax. As a mail - You can send the document as a ma il message. As a short message - You can send the document as a short message. Via infrared - You can send th e document via infrared. Note: When you open a document, the document is opened in the appropriate editor or viewer. The commands vary according to the editor/viewer. To search for text You can search for text strings in t he applications where this function is available on the Menu list. 1 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Find ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Type the text string in the search fi eld and press Find . 3 Once a text string match is found, it is highlighted. To find out if there are more of the same text strings in the document, press Find next . 4 To refine the search, press Options . A dialog opens where you can define options of Case sensitive or Match whole word . To replace te xt 1 Press the Menu key, and select Edit > Find ⦠.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 31 General information Press Replace . 2 Type the t ext string t o be replaced in the Find: field and the text you want to replace it with in Replace with: field. 3 For more search and replace options press Options . In the Find options dialog you can select a case sensitive search or a search only matching whole words and not parts of a word. You can also choose to replace all occurrences of a text in the document without fu rther confirmation. Tip: Replace all is available only if you h ave selected Yes in the Replace all dialog. 4 Press Replace or Replace all . To check spelling Note: You can spell check only English text and words. You can check words and text for spelling in the applications where Spell chec k ⦠is available on the Menu list. To be able t o use this function, you first nee d to install the Spell checker from the CD-ROM found in the sales package of your communicator. For details, see â To install software from the CD-ROM â on page 34. Tip: You can select individual words to spell check. Otherwise the whole text is searched and spell checked. 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Spell check ⦠. I f the Spell checker comes across a word it does not recognise, a dialog opens. 2 You can type in the correction in the correction field. Or, move to the Suggestions field and press the Tab or Enter keys to open a list of suggestions. 3 Select a word from the list of suggestions, then press Replace to accept the correction or suggestion. 4 If during step 2 you want to add an unrecognised word to the dictionary, press Add .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 32 General information To print You can print various items, such as documents, pictures, faxes, mails, and short messages. Refer to the user â s guide of the printer for detailed safety instructions on the printing device. To view or modify the page setup, press the Menu key and select File > Printing > Page setup ⦠To preview the document before printing it, press the Menu key and select File > Printing > Print pr eview To print a document or a file, 1 Press the Menu key and select File > Printi ng > Print ⦠. A note appears, showing the print range, connection type, and printer used. 2 Press Print . A dialog opens. To change the printing options, press Options . 3 To preview what you are about to print, press Print preview . A dialog opens. To define page setup, press Page setup . Figure 11
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 33 General information When printing via infrared, make sure that the infrared port of the communicator faces the infrared port of the printer. Keep the infrared connection clear. If the connection is obstructed for too long, for example, if something is moved between the infrared sensors or the communicator is moved, printing is interrupted. For details on infrared connection, see page 35. Log Log contains information about the communication history of your communicator. The log shows all, or certain types of communication events in chronological order. With log files you can monitor your communications, use the information to create or complete contact cards, or reply directly to the sender in the log. Tip: The shortcut to open the log is Shift Ctrl L. Figure 12 Tip: To change the categories Date and time and Duration to Subject and Status , press < and > on the Arrows key. To access the log You can access the log from the Menu of several applications. Press the Menu key and select Tools > Log . To make use of an individual communication event 1 Choose a log event and press Use . The command buttons change.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 34 General information Tip: A communication type can have one of the following delivery statuses: pending , delivered , failed , sent , not sent , and scheduled . 2 You can now do the following: send a fax or short message to the contact, call the contact, or add the contact to your Contacts directory. Check the comma nd buttons for available options. To view only certain communication types 1 Press Filter by type to choose a communication type you want to view. Press Filter by direction to choose whether you want to view communicatio ns originated by you or by the remote party. 2 Select from the options. 3 Press OK . To erase the contents of the log Log events remain in the log database for only a set number of days after which they are automatically erased to free memory on your communicator. To redefine the number of days, press the Menu key and select Tools > Log duration ⦠. 1 To erase some or all the contents of the log, press the Menu key and select File > Clear log ⦠. 2 Type in the date. All log events with an earlier date will be removed from the log. 3 Press Clear . To install software from the CD-ROM The applications and files on the communicator â s CD-ROM are ready to be installed or moved to the communicator. Proceed with installation as follows: 1 Ensure that you have installed PC Suite on your computer. You can find this program on the CD-ROM in the sales package.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 35 General information Tip: For more information about PC Suite, see the PC Suite Guide on the CD-ROM. 2 Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 3 Either: Connect your communicator to your computer using the adapter cable supplied in the sales package. Or: Prepare the communicator and the compute r for an infrared connection. For more information, see â To activate the infrared connection â on page 35. 4 If the CD-ROM user interface doe s not open automatically, double-click the file â Nokia9210i.e xe â in the CD-ROM file structure. 5 Select a program you want to install from the CD-ROM user int erface and click â Installâ . Tip: See the Add on Applications Guide for information on other software available for your communicator. Note: Remember to install applications in the same language as your communicator. Use a memory card to gain more space for the different applications and files on the CD-ROM. Note: For information on the installable applications, see the Software on CD- ROM Guide on the CD-ROM. To activate the infrared connection Tip: To activate the infrared, you can also press the Menu key and select Tools > Receive via infrare d . 1 Make sure that the infrared port of the communicator faces the infrared port of the other device. 2 To activate the infrared connection, press Chr (the key with the infrared symbol; this key is on the right-hand side of the keyboard, next to the Enter key). 3 To end the infrared connection, press Chr again.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 36 General information To transfer data from other devices IMPORTANT! Do NOT use the method described in section â To back up and restore data to and from a memory card â on page 211 to restore data you have backed up with Nokia 9210 Communicator to Nokia 9210i Communicator. Use PC Suite instead. Nokia 9110/9110i Communicator (Data mover) Data mover transfers data from the Nokia 9110 /9110i Communicator to the Nokia 9210/9210i Communicator. Via infrared you can transfer contact cards, calenda r events, notes, and Internet access settings, for example. You can either choose to transfer all data or define the categories of data that you want to transfer. Note: You cannot transf er your WWW or WAP bookmarks to the Nokia 9210i Communicator with Data mover. To open Data mover, pres s the Extras application button, scroll with the Arrows key, and select Data mover. To transfer all data 1 In the main view, press Transfer now . 2 Activate the infrared connection on the Nokia 9110/9110i Communicator. The transfer begins. All items are tran sferred to the Nokia 9210i Communicator. To transfer selected data Tip: Alternatively, press the Menu key and select Tools > Options ⦠. 1 In the main view, press Options . A dialog with four pages opens.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 37 General information 2 On each page, press Change to select or desele ct the data categories to transfer to the Nokia 9210i Communicator. To select or deselect all items on a page, press Select all or Unselect all . W hen you are ready, press Do ne . . 3 In the main view, press Transfer now . Activate the infrared connection on the Nokia 9110/9110i Communicator. The transfer begins. All items are transferred to the Nokia 9210i Commu nicator. 4 When the transfer is compl ete, press OK to close the application. 5 If the transfer fails, a dialog is displayed. Press OK to tr y again. Note: You can cancel the t ransfer process at any stage when the Cancel command button is available. Compatible Nokia phones, personal organisers, and PCs Tip: To transfer data from other personal organisers, first synchronise data between the device and the PC application and then synchronise data between the PC application and the Nokia 9210i appl ication. To transfer dat a from the Nokia 5100/61 00/7100/8 200/8800/ 9110/9110 i mobile phone, your laptop or desktop PC, or the PalmPilot personal organiser to your Nokia 9210i Communicator, see the PC Suite guide on the sales package CD-ROM. Note: To transfer contacts from your old SIM card to your Nokia 9210i Communicator, see â To move or copy contacts from a SIM card â on page 96.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 39 Phone 3. Phone Figure 13 With the cover phone you can make, receive, and manage calls, send and receive short messages, search for phone numbers, change profiles and define many settings. For more complicated tasks like sending long DTMF sequences or modifying phone settings, use the Telephone application. See the Telephone chapter, starting on page 69. Phone Earpiece Front Back Microphone
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 40 Phone Selection keys When operating the phone, press keys one at a time. The phone keypad is not functional when the cover of the communicator is open. Switches the phone on and off. Switches between profile s. See â Profile settings â on page 78. Scroll through menus, submenus or settings. If there are no active calls, you can use the scroll keys to browse through the phone book. When a call is active, you can adjust the volume level by pressing the scroll keys. Tip: To call your voice mailbox, press and hold . Dials a phone number and answers a call. Sends the ongoing call to hold if pressed during a call. In the standby mode shows the list of the most recently dialled nu mbers. Ends any active call, cancels a dialled call, or clears the display. 0...9 The number and alphabet keys. Tip: If you have subscribed to two phone lines, you can switch between them by pressing and holding . Used for creating functions. The function of these two selection keys depends on the text shown on the bottom of the display. See Figure 14. Note: Hold the phone as you would any other mobile phone with the antenna pointed up and over your shoulder. Note: As with any other radio transmitting devi ce, do not touch the antenna unnecess arily when th e phone is switched on . Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may caus e the phone to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 41 Phone Warning: Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. To use the selection keys Figure 14 Example: Pressing the selection key under the text Menu gains access to the menu functions. Selection keys are the keys located just below the right and left corners of the cover display. Commands on the display vary according to the situation and previous selections. Tip: A press of the key will return the display to stand-by mode. Often you must confirm the selecti on by pressing OK . If available, you can use Back command to return to the previous menu level without making any changes. Display indicators The display indicators inform you about the current operation of the phone. The indicators described below are shown when the phone is ready for use, with no characters entered on the display. NETWORK NAME or LOGO - The wireless network you are currently using.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 42 Phone and bar - The current signal strength at your location. The more bars visible, the stronger the signal. and bar - Battery charge level. The more bars visible, the more charge the re is in the battery. - The phone keypad is locked or the lock code is active. - The phone will not ring to notify you of an incoming call. - You have received one or several new voice messages. - You have received one or several new short messages. - You have received one or several new faxes. - Infrared transmission is active. - Call diverting is active. To make a call To make and receive calls, ⢠the phone must be switched on, ⢠the communicator must have a valid SIM card fitted, and ⢠you must be located in a service area of the wireless network. Tip: When a call is active, you can use the and keys to lower or raise the volume level of the earpiece. 1 Key in the area code and the phone number of the person you wish to call. If you make a mistake, you can remove the digit s one at a time by pressing Clear repeatedly. To clear the whole display, press and hold Clear . 2 Press to dial the phone number. 3 To end the call, press . Note: The microphone and earpiece are on the rear of the device.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 43 Phone International calls When making international calls, start by pressing twice quickly. The internation al call characte r â â appears on the display, which informs the network centre to select the inte rnational dial ling prefix. After this you can enter the country or region code, area code and phone number. Note: Calls described here as international may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. To search for phone numbers You can retrieve phone numbers from me mory by the name with which the phone number was stored. For more information, see â To call a number in the Telephone directory â on page 70. Tip: To choose which memory to use, press Names , scroll to Options and press Se lect twice. Scroll to choose Device , SIM card , or a contacts database you have created and press Select . 1 Press Names . 2 Scroll to Search and press Select . 3 Key in the name of the person whom you want to call, or the first letter(s) of the name. 4 Press Search . The name closest to the keyed characters will appear. 5 If the name found was not the one you searched for, scroll through the names with and until you reach the correct one. 6 Press Details to view the details of the highlighted name, or press to call the person. If the person has several numbers, scroll the selection frame onto the one you want and press .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 44 Phone To speed dial Speed dialling is a handy way to call frequently-used phone numbers. You can define up to eight speed dial numbers in the communicator memory. For information on how to set speed dials, see page 81. There are two ways to speed dial: Tip: Pressing and holding dials your voice mailbox number. ⢠Press and hold the number of the speed dial location where you have stored the phone number. For this method to work, you must enable speed dialling, see â Call settings (3-1) â on page 56. Example: Press 2 if the speed dial location for the phone number is 2. ⢠Key in the number of the speed dial location where you have stored t he phone number. Press . The phone will display the phone numbe r briefly, and then dial it. Note: Speed dialling is not possible during a call. To call service numbers Your service provider may have stored service numbers on your SIM card. For more information, see â To call a number in the Telephone directory â on page 70. 1 Press Names . 2 Scroll to Service Nos. and press Select . 3 Scroll to the service number an d press to call the n umber. To send DTMF tones If you need to send l ong DTM F sequen ces, i t is mor e con venient to sen d them vi a the communicator interface, see â To send DTMF tones during a callâ on page 77.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 45 Phone Tip: For an expl anation of DTMF tones, see the Glossary on page 270. 1 Make the call to the desired phone number. 2 Key in the digits you want to send as DTMF tones. The digits are sent one by one to th e networ k. To answer a call Tip: To change your ringing tone, see â To attach a ringing tone â on page 99. When you receive a call, the phone gives a ringing tone and the text Call flashes on the display. If silent-profile is active, only the keypad and display light will flash. If the caller can be identified, the caller â s name or phone number, and the text Calling , will be displayed. Tip: You can answer the call even while usin g the search or menu functions. 1 To answer the call, press . If you do not wan t to answer the call, press . The caller will he ar the alerting tone cha nge to a bu sy tone. To mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, press Mute . Tip: If the Divert if busy is activated to divert th e calls, for example, to your voice mailbox, rejecting an incoming call will also divert the call. See â To divert voice calls â on page 83. 2 To end the call, press . To manage calls There are a number of functions you can use during a call. Many of the in-call options are network services. To access the functions, press Options during a call. Some or all of the following in-call options may become available: Answer - Allows you to answer an incoming call. Reject - Allows you to reject an incoming call.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 46 Phone Tip: If you start making a new call during the curre nt call, the current call is put on hold automatically. Hold / Activate - Hold allows you to put the current call on hold. To activate the original call agai n, select Activate . New call - Puts the active call on hold and dials a new phone number. Send DTMF - Transmits DTMF tones. See â To send DTMF tones during a call â on page 77. End active call - Ends the active call. End all calls - Ends both the active and held call. Contacts - Opens the phone book. Menu - Opens the Me nu. Mute / Unmute - Switches the microphone of the communicator off or on. If the communicator is connected to a handsfree car kit, Mute also turns off the microphone of the car kit. Swap - Allows you to alternate betwe en two calls, an act ive and a held call . Transfer - Enables you to connect two voice calls together and disconnect yourself from both calls. See â To transfer calls â on page 76. Conference - If one call is active and anoth er call is on hold, th is option merges them into a conference call . Private - During a conference call, Pri vate a llows you to converse privately with a selected participant. Keypad lock The keypad lock makes accidental key presses ineffective.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 47 Phone When the keypad is locked, you can answer calls normally by pressing . During a voice call, the keypad is unlocked and the communicator can be operated in the usual way. After the call, the keypad is automatically locked again. The keypad will be unlocked automatically when the communicator is connected to a car kit. When the communicator is removed from the car kit, without being switched off, the keypad will be locked automatically again. To lock the keypad Press Menu and then the key within 3 seconds. Note: While the keypad is locked, the icon and the Unlock command are displayed. To unlock Press Unlock and then the key within 3 seconds. Note: When the phone is locked, cal ls may be possible to the emergency number programmed into your phone (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). To change profiles Example: If you use the Meeting profile in a meeting the phone rings only once so as not to disturb others. You can use the Profiles key to adjust phone tones for the various operating environments of the communicator. One profile is always in use. For more detailed information on the various profiles, how to adjust the settings and so on, see â Profile settings â on page 78.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 48 Phone Tip: You can also use the scroll key and OK t o s e l e c t a profile. 1 Press the key on the keypad. 2 Press the key again until the selection frame is on the desired profile. 3 To select the profile , press and hold . To view help Most menu functions are provided with a he lp text, which giv es a brief description of the displayed function. 1 Scroll to the menu function about which you want help. 2 Wait for a few seconds. The first page of the help text will appear. The text scrolls automatically. If you want to scroll it manually, press the scroll keys or More . 3 To exit help, pre ss Back . To use the menus Tip: You can access the menu functions even during a call. The phone offers a set of menu functions that allow you to tailor the phone for your particular use. The menus and submenus can be accessed by scrolling the menu or using the appropriate shortcuts. To scroll the menus 1 Press Menu . 2 Press either or to scroll the list of menus until you reach the desired menu. 3 Press Select to access the menu. If the menu contains submenus, reach the one you want with either or and press Select .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 49 Phone 4 To return to the previous menu level, press Back . To exit the menu without changing any settings and to return to the stand-by mode, press . To use menu shortcuts All the menus, submenus and settings are numbered. Th is number is shown in the upper right corner of the display. Example: To set the Anykey answer on, first press Menu and then press the numbers 3, 1, 1 , and 1 in sequence. 1 Press Menu . 2 Key in the index number of the menu you wish to access. Menu structure The following menu table lists the names of the main menus and their submenus. Some menus are subject to the availability of th e service in your area. Thi rd-level menus are not shown. Menu Function Submenus MENU 1 MESSAGES 1 Write message , 2 Inbox , 3 Drafts, 4 Sent , 5 Cell broadcast, 6 Se rvice command editor , 7 V oice messages MENU 2 CALL REGISTER 1 Missed calls , 2 Received calls, 3 Dialled numbers , 4 Clear recent call lists, 5 Call duration , 6 Call costs MENU 3 SETTINGS 1 Call settings , 2 Phone settings , 3 Securit y sett ings , 4 Restore factory settings MENU 4 CALL DIVERT 1 Divert all voice calls , 2 Divert if busy , 3 Divert if not answered , 4 Divert if out of reach , 5 Divert if not available 6 Dive rt all fax calls , 7 Divert all data calls , 8 Cancel all diverts
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 50 Phone Messages (Menu 1) The Short Message Service (SMS) is a network service which enables you to receive and send short messages. Contact your service provider for details. Write message (1-1) In this menu you can write and send a short message. Inbox (1-2) Tip: To change the tone of an incoming SMS message, see â Profile settings â on page 78. When you receive a short message or picture message, a text indicating the number of messages that have been received and the indicator will appear on the display and a tone wil l sound, unless the communicator is set to a sil ent profile. A note is also shown when you receive faxes or mail. To read received faxes or ma il, you must use the respective applications of the communicator interface. Tip: You can call the phone number while viewing the message by pressing twice. 1 Press Read twice to view the message, or press Exit to view it later. If you view a message later, press Menu > 1 > 2 , scroll to the desired message and press Read to view the message. 2 While viewing the message, press Options to scroll through the list of options and press Select at the highlighted option to se lect it. The available options are: Delete - Erases the selected message from the memory. Reply - Opens the editor for a reply. Key in the reply and press Options > Send . MENU 5 INFRARED MENU 6 SIM SERVICES Only available, if supported by your SIM card.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 51 Phone Forward - Asks for the number where the message should be forwarded. Enter the number and press OK to forward the message. Edit - Opens the curre nt message in the editor where you can modify the message. Use number - Copies the phone number from the message a nd moves it onto the phone display. You can now call th e number with . Details - Shows the sender â s name and number, the date and time the message was sent, and the number of the message centre. Drafts (1-3) In this menu you can view, modify, and send your draft short messages. Sent (1-4) In this menu you can view and modify the short messages you have sent. Cell broadcast (1-5) This network service allows you to receive SMS messages on topics that you have predefined on the communicator interface. See â Cell broadcast â on page 237. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. On - Sets the information message reception on. Off - Turns the information message reception off.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 52 Phone Service command editor (1-6) Tip: These re quests a re also known as USSD commands. In this submenu, you can send service requests, such as activation commands for network services, to your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. Voice messages (1-7) Listen to vo ice messages (1 -7-1) Tip: To call your voice mailbox quickly, press and hold . When you enter this submenu, the phone automatically calls your voice mailbox at the phone number stored in menu 1-7-2. If required, key in the access code for your mailbox or answering machine when the connection has been made. If the voice mailbox number has not been saved before, the phone asks for you to save it first. Note that the voice mailbox is a network service and you may ne ed to subscribe to it first. Voice mailbox number (1-7-2) In this submenu, you can store and edit your voice mailbox number. A voice mailbox can be a network service or your personal answering machine. For more information and for the voice mailbox number, contact your service provider.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 53 Phone Call register (Menu 2) Missed calls (2-1) Tip: Received calls and Missed calls functions are network services which work only in networks that allow you to view the caller â s phone number. Lists calls that you have missed. Note: The communicator only registers missed calls when the phone is switched on and within network coverage. Received calls (2-2) Lists calls that you have received. Dialled numbers (2 -3) Lists calls that you have dialled. Clear recent call lists (2-4) Select wh ich calls you want to era se. The opt ions are All / Missed / Dialled / Receive d . IMPORTANT: The phone numbers are erased without warning. You can not undo the operation. Call duration (2-5) Shows the duration of your outgoing and incoming calls, and allows you to reset the timers.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 54 Phone Last call duration (2-5-1) Shows the duration of the last outgoing or incoming call in hours, minutes or seconds, for example, 0:02:15. All calls â duration (2-5-2) Shows the total duration of a ll calls made and received with any SIM card tha t you have used with the communicator. Received calls â duration ( 2-5-3) Shows the total duration of calls received with any SIM card that you have used with the communicator. Dialled calls â duration (2-5-4) Shows the total duration of calls made with any SIM card that you have used with the communicator. Clear time rs (2-5 -5) Asks for the lock code and then resets all timers. You cannot undo the reset operation. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and services by your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off for billing, taxes and so forth.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 55 Phone Call costs (2-6) This network service allows you to check various call costs. The costs are shown in charging units or unit s of currency that you have set in Menu 2-6-3-2. The call cost is shown for each SIM card separately. For these settings you need the PIN2 code, the PIN code, or no code at all, depending on your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. Last call cost/units (2-6-1) & All calls â cost /units (2-6-2) Last call cost/units (2-6-1) shows the cost or units of the last, or current call. All calls â cost/units (2-6-2) shows the total cost or units of all calls made with the current SIM card. Whichever menu you choose, press Options to access the fol lowing three submenus: Clear cost counters (2-6-3-1) Resets all cost counters. You cannot undo the reset operation. Show cost / S how in unit s (2-6-3 -2) You may select whether the call costs and call cost limits will be displayed in currency or charging units. Contact your network service provider for the prices of charging units. The display shows the option that is currently not selected. To select the option shown on the display, press Select . If you selected Show c ost , key in the charging unit price. Use or to insert a decimal point. Next, enter the currency name.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 56 Phone Call cost limit (2-6-3-3) This function allows you to limit the total costs of outgoing calls to a specified number of charging units or un its of currency that you have set i n Menu 2-6-3-2. To turn the limit on, select On . Key in the cost limit in charging units or currency units. If you define the limit in currency units, you can press or to insert a decimal point. After the limit has been turned on, the number of remaining uni ts is shown on the display when in stand-by mode. When all units have been used, no calls can be made. To turn the limit off, select Off . Note: When no more charging units or currency units are left, calls may only be possible to the emergency number programmed into your communicator (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and by your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off for billing, and so forth. Settings (Menu 3) Call settings (3-1) Anykey answer (3-1-1 ) When selected, you can answer an incoming call by pressing any key on the keypad, except , , or Mute selection key.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 57 Phone Automatic redial (3-1-2) When this function is selected and you call a number that is busy or does not answer, the phone will at tempt to call the n umber until the call is connected. Th e maximum number of redials is 10. Press to end the call attempt s. Speed dialling (3-1-3) When selected, you can dial phon e numbers stored in the speed dial locations by simply pressing and holding the assigned speed dial ke y. See âÂÂSpe ed dials â on page 81 for more information. Call waiting service (3-1-4) Call waiting is a network service. Contact your operator for subscription. For more information see â To answer a waiting call â on page 76. Choose Activate to enable cal l waiting, Cancel to disable call waiting, or Check status to show whether call waiting is active and for which call types. My number sending (3-1-5) This network service allows you to set your phone number either to be displayed or to be hidden from the person you are calling. Set by network rese ts the phone to the default setting, On or Off , that you have agreed upon with your service provider. Summary after call (3-1-6) If you set this function to On , the phone will briefly display the duration and cost (network service) after each call.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 58 Phone Line for outgoin g calls (3-1-7) If your network supports this service, you can have two phone lines in your communicator. You can select which line you want to use for making calls. For more information, see â Line sele ction page â on page 90. Phone settings (3-2) Clock (3-2-1) You can select whether the time is shown on the display. Cell info display (3-2-2) When this function is selected, the phone will indicate when it is used in a network cell based on Micro-Cellular Network technology. MCN technology increases the capacity of wireless networks in urban areas. The setting will remain in effect even if the SIM card is changed or the phone is switched off. Welcome note (3-2-3) You can write a message of up to 44 characters which appears on the display when you switch on the phone. Network selection (3-2-4) The network to which you are connected can be selected either automatically or manually.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 59 Phone If you select Automatic , the phone automatically selects one of the wireless networks available in your area. Outside your home network service area, the communicator will select one of the networks that has a roaming agreement with your home network. If you select Manual , the phone will show a list of available networks and you can select the network you wish to use if this network has a roaming agreement with your home network service operator. If no such agreement is in force, the text No access will be displayed and you must select another network. Confirm SIM service actions (3 -2-5) You can set the phone to show you the confirmation messages sent between your phone and the network when you are using the SIM services by selecting the option Yes wit hin the menu 3-2-5 (Confirm SIM service actions). Security settings (3-3) The purpose of the security system is to prevent unauthorised use or altering of important settings. In most cases, activating or changing the security options requires the appropriate access code. See â Securityâ on page 218. Note: When security features that restrict calls are in use (call barring, closed user group and fixed dialling, or system lock etc.), calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some net works (e.g. 112 or other official emergency numbers). PIN code reques t (3-3-1) The options are On an d Off . See â Securityâ on page 218.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 60 Phone Call barring service (3-3-2) This network service allows you to restrict incoming calls to, and outgoing calls from your phone. You need a barring password to be able to use this function. Contact your network service provider to get a barring password. The options are: Outgo ing calls / Internatio nal call s/ International calls except t o home country / Incoming calls / Incoming calls when abroad / Cancel all barrings . Closed user gr oup (3-3-3) This network service allows you to set the communicator to accept calls to and from a selected group of people. For details on creating a user group and activating this service, contact your network service provider. Preset - Resets the phone to use a use r group the SIM card owner has agreed upon with the network service provider. On - Uses a particular user group. Calls can be made to or received from the members of the selected group only. Off - Calls can be made and received in the normal way. You can use this option only if you are entitled to do so. Lock if SIM changed (3-3-4) You can protect your phone against unauthorised us e with the lock code. To do this, enter your lock code and select the option Yes . For details, see â Securityâ on page 218. Note that no passcode system can guarantee absolute prevention of unauthorised access.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 61 Phone Change of access codes (3-3-5) In this submenu, you can change the lock code, the PIN code, the PIN2 code and the barring password. See â Securityâ on page 218. The access codes may only include the digits 0 to 9. Lock s ystem (3-3-6) Tip: You can also press Menu and # to enter your lock code. In this submenu, you can lock the communicator. Pr ess Select and enter your lock code. The communicator locks immediately. When your communicator is locked, you can make emergency calls to predefined numbers using the cover phone. You can also answer incoming calls and make emergency calls using the Telephone application. All other actions are blocked. Even if you remove and replace the battery and switch on the phone, the communicator will remain locke d. To unlock the communicator, press Unlock and enter the lock code. For more information on locking and other security options, see â Securityâ on page 218. IMPORTANT: The default lock code is 12345 . For security reasons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from the communicator. For information on changing the lock code, see section â Securityâ on page 218. Note that no passcode system can guarantee absolute prevention of unauthorised access. Restore factory settings (3-4) You can reset some of the menu settings to their ori ginal values. You ne ed the lock code for this function. This function will not affect stored phone numbers and names, access codes, earpiece volume setting, call timers, cost counters, selected application tones or SMS messages.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 62 Phone Call divert (Menu 4) Tip: The icon is shown in the stand-by mode when you have activated the Divert all voice calls . This network service allows you to direct your incoming voice calls to another phone number when you do not want to be disturbed, or when the phone is switched off or outside the network coverage area. For details, see â To divert voice calls â on page 83. The options are: Divert all voice ca lls / Divert if busy / Divert if not answered / Divert if out of reach / Divert if not available / Divert all fax calls / Divert all data calls / Cancel all diverts . Select Activate to set the divert setting on if allowed by the network, Cancel to set the setting off. Select Check status to check whethe r the divert i s activated or not. If you select Divert if not answered or Divert if not available , you ca n also select Set delay to choo se a delay time before the call is diverted. The options are 5 sec / 10 sec / 15 sec / 20 sec / 25 sec /30 sec . Infrared (Menu 5) If you want to receive data from another device via infrared, use this function. Make sure that the infrared port of the communicator faces the infrared port of the other device and press Activate . For more information, see â To activate the infrared connection â on page 35. Note: Do not point the IR (infrared) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device is a Class 1 Laser product.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 63 Phone SIM services (Menu 6) In addition to the functions available in the phone, your SIM card may provide additional services that you ca n access in the menu 6. Menu 6 is shown only if it is supported by your SIM card. The name and contents of the menu depend entirely on the services available. For availability, rates and information on using the SIM services, contact your SIM card vendor, for example your network service provider, service provider or other third-party vendor. You can set the phone to show you the confirmation messages sent between your phone and the network when you are using the SIM services by selecting the option Yes wit hin the menu 3-2-5 (Confirm SIM service actions). Note: Accessing these services may involve sending a text message (SMS) or making a phone call for which you ma y be charged.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 65 Desk 4. Desk Tip: Your favourite links can be, for example, certain WWW pages, WAP services, applications, documents, and photo albums. Desk is an application where you can create and manage links to your favourite documents, applications, or third-party software. Main view When you first use Desk, the main view has at least the following links by default: an Internet shortcut to Internet setup, a document named â Start here! â , an d a WWW link to the official Nokia Web site. You cannot select more than one link at a time. You can delete Desk links only in the Desk application. Tip: You can change the order in which a link appears. Select the link, press the Menu key, and select File > Move . Using the Arrows key, move the link across the display and press Place here . Figure 15
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 66 Desk To add a link Tip: To view and change the icon, label or parameters of a link, select the link, press the Menu key, and then select File > Properties ⦠. 1 Select the program, program group, or other item for which you want to add a shortcut to Desk. 2 Press the Menu key and then select File > Add to Desk . To write notes Tip: You can start writing a note quickly in any application or even during a phone call by pressing the Desk application button twice. 1 Press Write note . A simple te xt editor opens. Figure 16 2 Write the note. 3 Press Close to save th e document. The note will now appear i n the main view of Desk. To change the background image You can also customise the background image of the Desk main view. 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Settings ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Define the following: Background image : The options are Yes / No.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 67 Desk Image file : Press Change to browse for an image. Press Preview to view the image. 3 Press Done . Note: The image file you choose as a backgroun d image should be scal ed to appear equal to or bigger than the screen size. For details, see â Imagingâ on page 233.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 69 Telephone 5. Telephone Tip: You can also switch to other applications during a phone call. You can use the Telephone application to make and receive phone calls, handsfree calls, or conference calls. You can record and redirect calls, use voice mailboxes, and manage settings and profiles. Open the Telephone application by pressing the Tel application button on the keyboard. To make phone calls, ⢠the phone must be switched on, ⢠the communicator must have a valid SIM card fitted, and ⢠you must be located in a service area of the wireless network. Some of the operations explained here can also be made using the cover of the communicator. Note: Opening or closing the cover does not affect active phone calls. If you have made a voice call using the Telephone application and you close the cover, you can continue the call with the cover phone.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 70 Telephone To make a call manually Tip: To disable the handsfree mode, press the Menu key, select Settings > Call ⦠> Audio when cover opened and press Change to switch the handsfre e mode Off . 1 Type the telephone number in the field at the bottom of the main view. 2 Press Call . Use the handsfree mode to speak and li sten to the communicator from a short distance when the cover is opened, or close the cover and continue with the cover phone. To call a number in the Telephone directory When you have no a ctive voice calls, the Telephone application main view shows the Telephone directory. The default direct ory is in the communicator memory. From the top of the telephone list, you can select directories contained in the SIM card and - if fitted - directories contained in a memory card. Contact cards that do not contain any phone numbers appear dimmed. 1 Select a contact in the directory either by scrolling or by using the search field. Tip: To redial the last dialled number you can also press the shortcut keys Chr Tel. 2 Press Call . If the contact has more than one phone number, a list opens, list ing all the contact â s phone numbers. Choose a number from the list and press Call .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 71 Telephone Tip: You can zoom in and out to either make the text more readable or fit more entries on display. Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom in or Zoom out Figure 17 To call a number in a recent calls list Tip: A shortcut to open the Missed calls v i e w i s C t r l Tel. 1 In the main view, press Recent calls . The Dialled calls dialog opens. If you have new missed calls, the Missed calls dialog opens. 2 To see calls from one of the other lists, select a command button on the right of the display. For example, to see a list of received calls, press Rece ived cal ls . Tip: You can create a new contact card by using a telephone number listed in Recent calls . In the ma in view, press Recent calls . Select a call, press the Menu key, and Edit > Add to contacts . 3 Select a number from the list and press Call . Now you can either leave the cover open to use the handsfree option or close the cover and continue the call normally.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 72 Telephone To answer a call Tip: To adjust the volume of the speaker during an active call, use the Arrows key: pressing > increases the volume, pressing < decreases the volume. Figure 18 Tip: The c aller â s name appears in the note if the telephone number is sent with the call, and if the caller â s number is listed in your Contacts directory. 1 When you receive a call and the communicator cover is open, a note about the incoming call appears. To answer the call, press Answer or close the device cover and answer the call via the cover phone. 2 If you do not want to tak e the call, press Reject . To mute the ringing tone, press Mute tone . Note: You cannot have two active calls at the same time unless you are in a conference call. A current call is automatically put on hold when you answer a new incoming call. For information about conference calls, see â To make conference callsâ on page 74. To call and create a voice mailbox Voice mailboxes work just like an answeri ng machine. You can use th em to store incoming messages of missed calls. Many network operators provide a voice mailbox service with the SIM card. If your SIM voice mailbox does not have a number, you can type it yourself. Note that you are still required to contact your network operator for a phone number to use with this voice mailbox.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 73 Telephone Tip: Anoth er way to call your voice mailbox is to press and hold the key on the front cover of the phone. To call your voice mailbox, in the main view of the Telephone directory, press Voice mailbox . See Figure 17. If you have more than one voice mailbox, a dialog prompts you to choose a mailbox from a list. You can also create additional voice mailboxes as follows: 1 Contact your network operator for a number to use with an additional voice mailbox. 2 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Voice mailboxes ⦠. 3 When the Voice mailboxes dialog appears, press Add . Type a n ame and number. To record a call You can record the conversation during a call. Once a call is in progress, press the Menu key and select Call > Record to open the Recorder application. For more information on the Recorder application, see page 231. Note: Obey all local laws governing recording of calls. To make a new call during a call You can have an active call and a call on hold at the same time. You can switch between the two calls. This situation applies whether you ma de or received either of the calls. The display can show a maximum of three calls, although you can have only two calls connected at the same time. See Figure 19. To answer the WAITING call you must first end either the ON HOLD or the ACTI VE call.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 74 Telephone 1 If you already have an active call and a call on hold, drop one of the calls or merge them into a conference call. 2 Press New call and make the new call. The previous call will be put on hold. 3 To switch between calls, use the Arrows key. The active call is framed with a dark line. The command buttons change according to the status of the selected call. For example, a call on hold can be changed to an active call by highlighting it with the Arrows key and then pressing Activate . Figure 19 4 To end a call, select the call you want to end with the Arrows key and press End call . To make conference calls The conference call is a network service. Contact your network operator to check if this service is available. In a conference call, you and up to five persons can hear each other simultaneously. The display shows a conference call as a single call. 1 Make a call. 7KLVî FDOOî îÂÂî ZLWK î WKHî GDUNî OLQHî &DOOî VWDWXVî LFRQ
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 75 Telephone 2 Once the called person has answered, make a call to a second person by pressing New call . The first call is put on hold. 3 Wait until the second person answers the call. 4 To place both persons into a conference call, press Conference call . The display shows a single conference call. Press Confer ence commands to list the two participants of the conference call. 5 To include another person, press New c all . The con ference call is put on hold. When the person an swers the call, press Confe rence call . This new person is included in the conference call. 6 To include further persons, repeat step 5. Tip: You can close the cover and continue the call via the cover phone after you have i ncluded all participants in the conference call. Figure 20 To remove a conference call participant 1 Press Conference commands . 2 Select the caller from the list of participants and press Drop . See Figure 20. To talk privately with one of t he conference call participants 1 Press Conference commands .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 76 Telephone 2 Select a participant from the list and press Private call . The call is now split into two: the conference call is on hold and the one-to-on e call is active. 3 Once you have finished the private conversation, you can return to the conference call by pressing Confer ence call . Tip: To view log files of all calls, press the Menu key and select Tools > Log . The General log shows all calls, both incoming and outgoing, voice and data. To transfer calls Call transfer is a network service where you connect two calls together and disconnect yourself from both calls. Contact your network operator to check if this service is available. When you have one call on hold, and another call active or an outgoing call alerting, press the Menu key and sele ct Call > Transfer to connect the calls together. Note: You may be charged for some of the cost of the t ransferred call; contact your network operator for details. Note: You can only transfer voice calls. Fax, data, or conference calls cannot be transferred. To answer a waiting call To know that you have a call waiting, and to be able to answer it, you must first subscribe to the call waiting network service. Call waiting is sel ected in network services. For more information, see page 85. 1 When you receive a new call while you already have an active call, you hear a sound and see a note informing you of a new incoming call. 2 Press Answer . The active call is put on hold.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 77 Telephone To send DTMF tones during a call A dual tone multi-frequency tone system is used by all touch-tone telephones. DTMF assigns a specific frequency, or tone, to each key so that it can easily be identified by a microprocessor. DTMF tones allow you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised telephony systems, etc. To send DTMF tones during a call, you have two methods: Tip: Besides the numbers 0 - 9 , you can also use the characters p , w , * , and # when sending DTMF tones. For information on these characters, see â To store DTMF tones â on page 101. ⢠Type the digits with the communicator keyboard. No menu or command button selection is needed before starting to type the digits. Each keystroke gene rates a DTMF tone which is transmitted while the call is active . ⢠Alternatively, 1 Press Send DTMF . The DTMF sequences you have stored in the contact card of the person you are talking with are show n. For information on how to store DTMF sequences, see page 101. 2 Select a DTMF sequence. You can edit the sequence . If there are no stored sequences, you can type a new DTMF sequence into the input field. 3 Press Send tone . Note: You can send DTMF tones du ring a conference call by typi ng the digits with the communicator keyboard, but you cannot access stored DTMF sequences. Telephone Settings In the Telephone main view, press the Menu key and sele ct Settings to select one of the followin g settings.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 78 Telephone Profile settings The profiles are used for grouping the settings of different operating environments of the communicator. In the settings you can modify the profile features. One profile is always in use. To change the profile in use, press the Menu ke y. Use the Arrows key to se lect the Profiles icon at the right-hand end of the menu bar and a new profile from the menu list. Figure 21 To select and modify a profile, press the Menu key and select Settings > Profiles ⦠. The profiles provided with your communicator are: General - The default profile of the communicator. Silent - You can set this profile on when you want all the alert tones to remai n silent (ex cept Clock an d Calendar alarms - see â Noteâ on page 79). Meeting - You can specify how the communicator operates when you are in a meeting, such as setting the volume of th e tones low. Outdoor - You can specify how the communicator operates when you are outdoors. 3URILOHVî LFRQ
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 79 Telephone Pager - You can set this profile on when you want the communicator to act as a pager. The default settings are that the re is no ringing tone and that you get an alert tone for received short messages. Flight - Sets the Flight profile on. For more information, see â Flight profileâ on page 91. Note: If you have turned on the Clock alarm or an alarm for timed entry in Calendar, it remai ns on in all profiles, including Silent . To create a new profile 1 To create a new profile, press the Menu key, select Settings > Profiles ⦠, and press New . The current values of the General profile are copied to the new profile. 2 To modify the settings of any of the profiles, highlight a profile name and press Edit . A dialog with four pages opens, as shown in Figure 22. For each of the pages, define the following: Figure 22 General pa ge Name : Type the name of the profile. Some profiles cannot be renamed.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 80 Telephone Ringing type : Choose the ringing type for the ringing tone. The options are Normal / Ascending / Ring onc e . Ringing tone : Define the sound for the incoming call. Press Change to choose from sound files provided with the communicator or to browse for ot her sound files, if availabl e. To record a ton e, see page 231. Ringing tone, line 1 : and Ringing tone, l ine 2 : Define the sound for incoming calls on two alternate lines, if available. Press Change to choose from sound files that have been provided with the communicator or to browse for other sound files, if ava ilable. Personal tones : Define whether the personal ringing tone of callers are used. The options are On / Off . For information about attaching a ringing tone to a contact card, see â To attach a ringing tone â on page 99. Alerts page Clock alarm , Calendar alarm , Received SM S , and Received fax : Choose a specific sound for each of these situations to alert you. Highlight an option, then press Change to choose from sound files provided with the communicator or browse for other sound files. To adjust the volume of an alarm, press Volume . Notifica tions pa ge Keyboard tone : Adjusts the keyboard sound. The options are Off / Quiet / Loud . Phone keypad tone : Adjusts the keypad sound. The options are Off / Quiet / Loud . Notification tones : Switches the notificati on tones between On / Off . Notification tones are tones made by the communicator alerting you to an error (such as an incorrect key press) or to a situati on (such as a low battery).
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 81 Telephone Other pa ge Play ringing tone for : Allows you to choose which incoming calls will make a ringing sound. The options are All calls / VIP group only/ None . If you choose VIP group only , only the calls coming from someone defined as a VIP will ring; see page 109 in the Contacts chapte r. All other calls alert on the display with a message, but will not ring. Speed dials Tip: See also â To speed dial â on page 44. Speed dialling is a quick way to call frequently used numbers. You can assign spe ed dials to eight phone numbers. An example is shown in Figure 23. 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Speed di als ⦠. 2 To assign a number to a speed dial loca tion or to change an existing number, press either Add number or Change numbe r . You see a list of contacts from the contacts database in your communicator â s internal memory. 3 Highlight a contact card and press Select . When a contact card without phone number is highlighte d, the Select command is dimmed. Location number 1 is reserved for calling your default voice mailbox; see page 85 for more information. You cannot change its value. For more information on voice mailboxes, see page 72.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 82 Telephone Figure 23 Network services settings Note: Network services may not be provided by all operators. If services are provided, you may have to subscribe to them. Tip: To change voice call diverting or barring settings, the phone must be switched on. Information about the status of these services is stored in the network. Therefore, the current settings are not shown until you request the information from the network as follows: 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Network services 2 For example, to check the setting of Divert if busy , select Call diverting ⦠, highlight it with the Arrows key, then press Check status . While the communicator is making a request to the network, a query note is shown on the display. 3 After a successful request, the new status now appears in the settings list.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 83 Telephone Figure 24 To divert voice calls Voice call diverting allows you to direct your incoming voice calls to another phone number. This is also known as call forwarding. 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Network s ervices > Call diverting ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Choose divert options: Divert all calls â All incoming calls are diverted. Divert if busy â Incoming calls are diverted when you are engaged in another call. Divert if out of reach â Incoming calls are diverted when the phone is switched off or outside the network service area. Divert if not answered â Incoming calls are dive rted if you do not answer them within a certain time period. Time delay â Applie s to the option Divert if not answered . Time delay allows you to choose the time period after which the call is diverted. You can set the delay to Default / 5 seconds / 10 seconds / 15 seconds / 20 seconds / 25 seconds / 30 se conds Divert if not available â In a s ingle action, this option turns on diverting of Divert if busy / Divert if out of reach / Divert if not answered . 3 Press Change , and select one of the following options:
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 84 Telephone To: â Type the number to which you want to divert the calls. Default voice mailbox â Calls are diverted to your voice mailbox. If you have more than one mailbox, you must choose one from a list shown to you. See page 85 for more information. Off â Turn off the divert. To restrict voice calls To restrict voice calls you use the voice call barring network service. To use call barring or change the barring settings you need a barring password, which you can obtain from the network operator. 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Network services > Call barring ⦠. The Voice call barring dialog opens. 2 Choose one of the available options: Outgoing c alls â Calls cannot be made. Incoming calls â Calls cannot be received. International calls â Calls cannot be made to other countries or regions. Incoming calls when abroad â Calls cannot be received when you are outside your home country. International exce pt to home country - If you have enabled inte rnational roaming with your network operator, you cannot make international calls abroad, except to your home country. Note: Calls described here as international may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. If you subscribe to the alternate line network se rvice, voice call barring applies only to the Selected line .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 85 Telephone Note: When security features that restrict calls are in use (call barring, closed user group and fixed dialling), calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or other official emergency numbers). To cancel all call diverts or barrings, press Cancel all . Other network services 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Network s ervices > Other services ⦠2 Other network service settings contai ns the following options: Network select ion â Allows you to change the way a network is selected and also register to another network. You can set the network sel ection to either Automati c or Manual . In automatic net work selection, the communicator selects the most appropriate network. In manual network selection, the communicator searches for available networks and presents you with a list of networks found; you can then select wh ich network to use. Call waiting - Press Change to choose On or Off . For a brief description of call waiting, see â To answer a wa iting c all â on page 76. My number sending â Determines whether your number is hidden or presented to the person you are calling. Press Change to see the options Default / On / Off . Voice mailbox settings For information on voice mailboxes, see page 72. 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Voice mailboxes . 2 To change the settings of a voice mailbox, highlight it and press Edit . A dialog with two pages opens. See Figure 25.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 86 Telephone Figure 25 Properties pag e Define the following options: Name : Type a descriptive name for the mailbox. Number : Type a number for the mailbox obtained from the network service. Note: The type of voice mailbox determines whether you can edit both of these fields. For example, the name and number of a SIM voice mailbox ca nnot be edited. DTMF tones p age DTMF : Define DTMF tones for a voice mailbox not provided with your SIM card. Each tone is represented by a character. Press Add to type characters and store them with a label, such as DTMF2. You can also select No DTMF tones . If you are editing a voice mailbox provided with your SIM card, this page is dimmed. Call settings 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Call ⦠. 2 Define the following options:
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 87 Telephone Audio when cover opened : Determin es whether the handsfre e mode is selected automatically when you open the cover. Press Change to toggle On / Off. Automa tic redi al : Whe n this setting is set On and you call a number that is busy or does not answer, the communicator attempts to call the number until t he call is connected. Press Change to toggle On / Off . Advanced settings 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Advan ced ⦠. 2 Define the following options: Call costs page Tip: To see the phone serial number, press the Menu key and select Tools > Serial number (IMEI) . Your network operator may ask you for this information. If your network supports the call charging display service, use this page to change call charge settings and to view cost counters. Your communicator will prompt you for your PIN2 code. If this pa ge is dimmed, your SIM does not support this network service. Figure 26 Display credits : Determines the information about call costs shown in the call display during a call. The options are No / Used / Remaining . Cred its are amounts of money, measured either in units or currency.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 88 Telephone Currency : Type a maximum of three characters to indicate your choice of currency. You can type numbers or letters. For example, you can type â FIMâ for Finnish currency. This field is used with Unit price below and with Show in currency . Unit price : If you use currency to measure call costs, type a decimal number for the price of each charging unit. You must also complete the Currenc y field above. Maximum cost limit : You have two options: No limit or a value that you can define in the field. You can define the limit in eit her units or in currency. If you are in a call when the cost limit is reached, the call ends. You cannot make any more calls. You see a note on the display before and after the call limit is reached. Press Calculate costs : The informa tion in this dialog is: Last call: - The cost of the last call made. All calls: - The cost of all calls made since the cost counter was reset. See Figure 27. Remaining credits - If you have defined a limit in Maximum cost limit this field displays the amount of money or units remaining. Press either Show in units or Show in currency to choose how you want call costs to be displayed in your communicator. â Unitsâ is a network measuremen t, such as 21 units. â Currencyâ is shown in the characters you have typed in the Currency field. Press Clear costs to clear the cost counters. You a re required to enter your PIN2 code.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 89 Telephone Figure 27 Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off for billing, taxes and so forth. Fixed dialling page Fixed dialling is a network service which allows you to restrict your calling to a limited set of numbers stored in the SIM card. The service is offered by some network operators. When the fixed dialling service is active, the SIM phone book list shows only numbers in the fixed dialling list. You still have access to the communicator â s Telephone directory, but you cannot call those numbers. If your SIM card does not support this network service, this page is dimmed. Figure 28
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 90 Telephone If you want to change the settings or vie w the fixed numbers, you are required to enter your PIN2 code. When the service is set to On , press Edit numbers to add, modify, or delete numbers. You are required to enter names and numbers i nto the fixed dialling list. Note: When Fixed Dialling is set on, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Line selection page If you need two lines (phone numbers) for your communicator, you must subscribe to the alternate line ne twork service and check that this feature is act ivated in your communicator. If this servi ce is unavailable or you do not use i t, the Line selection page appears dimmed. Each line can have different settings for some of the Telephone features. Figure 29 The options on this page are: Selected line : Defines the line used for outgoing calls. The options are Primary / Alternate . Fax calls alwa ys use the primary line. If Block line selection is active (see the next paragraph) you cannot change the line in use.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 91 Telephone Block line selection : Allows you to block the changing of the selected line. The values are On / Off . Changing the value requires you to enter your PIN2 code. Note: Block line selection option is not provided by a ll network operators. Flight profile The flight profile prevents you from accidentally turning on the phone in an aircraft. To select the flight profile: 1 In the Telephone main view, press the Menu key, scroll across the menu bar to the Profiles icon , then highlight Flight . 2 Press Select . With the flight profile active, you may do tasks which do not require the use of wireless network. For example, you can read previously downloaded mail, write mail, notes, short messages, faxes, or update your calendar. Once you have left the aircraft, turn off the flight profile by pressing Exit profile . Then you can turn on the phone by pressing , and your short messages, faxes, and mail will be sent automatically. When the flight profile has been s elected, emergency calls can be made as follows (close the communicator cover): 1 Press . The phone display will read Flight profile is active. . 2 While the note is visible (for approximately five seconds) you can dial an emergency number preprogrammed into your communicator, for example, 112. 3 Press .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 92 Telephone IMPORTANT! Using your phone while in the air is prohibited. Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network and may be illegal. If the aircraft personnel allow use of the communicator interface, you MUST activate the Flight profile. The Flight profile will allow use of the communicator interface only and will prevent use of the phone. Be aware that all communications applications require use of the phone.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 93 Contacts 6. Contacts You can use the Contact s application to create , edit, and manage a ll contact information, such as phone numbers and addresses. Start the Contacts application by pressing the Contacts application button on the keyboard. The main contacts database is in the communicator â s memory. You can also store contacts in the SIM card and in databases on an attached memory card. You can synchronise your contacts with Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Note s, and Lotus Organizer programs when you connect your communicator to a compatible PC. For information on synchronising your contacts with a PC, see the PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM. Contacts directory The main view of Contacts contains two frames. Figure 30
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 94 Contacts Tip: You can toggle between the two frames with the Arrows or Tab keys. In the left-hand fra me, there is a li st of contacts in the curren tly open contact s database. At the top of the list there is your own card and other available contacts databases. Below th e list there is a search box for fin ding entrie s. In the right-hand frame there is the currently selected contact card. Contacts databases can be located in the communicator â s internal memory, on a memory card, or on a SIM card. A memory card may contain severa l contact databases. Contact data is shown for one contacts database at a time. For example, to see contacts store d on the SIM card, use the Arrows ke y to scroll down the list to the SIM card and press Open . An individual contact card contains the information of one person. A group contact card contains more than one contact person. You can see the name of a group contact card in bo ld font in the list. Contacts are listed by name. You can change the sort order of the list. See â General page â on page 107. You can create more than one contacts database in a memory card. For more information see page 109. Note: You cannot delete your own business card, the internal contacts database of the communicator, the contacts database on a SIM card, a read-only memory card contacts database, or contacts in a read-only contacts database. To make a contact card 1 In the Contacts directory main view, with the left-hand frame highlighted, press New card . A ne w card is created using the default templ ate.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 95 Contacts 2 To make a new contact card using a particular template, press the Menu key and select File > New card . You are prompted to choose a template from a list. 3 When the contact card opens, enter information into the various fields. You can fill in the information on your own business card using the same method. See an example in Figure 31. Note: The title of the P.O . Box field is only displayed when editing the fields. To display the words â P.O. Box â before the P.O. Box number after editing type, for example, â P.O. Box 123 â in the fiel d. 4 To save your contact card, press Done . Note: The speed dial icon next to a contact card telephone number means that you have defined a speed dial for that telephone number with the Telephone application. Figure 31
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 96 Contacts To open a contact card Tip: To copy or move a range of contacts, sele ct the contacts, press the Menu key and select File > More options > Copy to or Move to. . 1 In the Contacts main view, with the le ft-hand frame highlighted, select a card. 2 Press Open to open the card in a full display view. To move or copy contacts from a SIM card 1 In the Contacts main view, with the left-hand frame highlighted, select the SIM card and press Open . 2 Press the Menu key and select File > More options > Copy to or Move to. 3 Choose the Contacts database as the target directory and press Select . To search for a contact card Tip: If you cannot find the contact in th is database, go to the top of the Contacts directory list, and open either the SIM card or the memory card database. You may have stored your contact in one of these other locations. 1 In the search field under the Contacts directory list, enter characters which match the beginning of the name of the contact. For example, to find Manfred, enter M or Ma or Man. The names of contacts which match the characters you entered are displayed. For more information on the rules of searching, see â Notes on using the search field â on page 97. 2 Using the Arrows key, select a contact and press Open .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 97 Contacts Notes on using the search field A search checks the most important fields in a contact card. The matching of search criteria is limited to the beginning of words. For example, to search using the characters â Annâ finds â Annabel â but not â Joanneâ . Example: john.carr@florida.edu or http://florida.edu/ ~john.carr The search also checks the contents which follow the following characters: ' . ' (period) or ' / ' (forward slash) or '@ ' ( â atâ symbol) or ' ~ â (tilde). To change fields in a contact card To add a field You can add fields to a contact card to suit your own circumstances. For more information on specific fi elds, see â In format ion on fields â on page 98. 1 Open a contact card. 2 Press Add field . A list opens, showing fields you can add to the card. 3 Using the Arrows key, select a field and press Select . To rename a field You can rename fields to suit your contacts. For example, after adding three new Tel fields, you could rename them to Tel ( Business) , Tel (Private) , and Tel (Car) respectively.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 98 Contacts Tip: If you want to delete a field on all cards based on the same template, it is simpler to delete it from the template attached to the card. See â To create or modify templates â on page 100. 1 Open a contact card. 2 Select the field you want to rename. 3 Press Rename field . A list of alternative names for the field opens. If you are not allowed to rename the field, the Rename field command button is dimmed. Information on fields Company , First name , Last name , Suffix , Title , Middle Name , Job title , Birthday - You can have only one of each of these fields. Telephone number fields - Storing a â â (plus) character before the country or region code allows you to use the same phone number abroad. Enter mobile phone numbers in this field to send short messages. Countr y or regi on - Enter a country or region name. If you want the a ddress of a contact to be displayed in the format of the country or region, use the same country or region names as listed in the option Default country or region on page 107. Note: Some extra types of field, such as Job des cription , may appear only if they exist in an imported contact card.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 99 Contacts To attach a ringing tone Tip: To play a ri nging tone, use the File manager application to open a ringing tone file. See â To open a file â on page 208. The default ringing tones are not displayed in the File manager. You can set a specific ringing tone for each contact card. When that contact ca lls you, the communicator plays the chosen ringing tone (if the telephone number is sent with the call). 1 Open the contact card. 2 Press the Menu key and select Card > Ringing tone . A dialog showing the current ringing tone of this conta ct is displayed. 3 Press Change . A list of default sounds is displayed. 4 Select a sound and press Select . Press Browse to sea rch for other sound files stored in the communicator. Note: To use personal ringing tones, this feature must be active in the profile that you are using. For more information, see â To create a new profile â on page 79. To insert a picture Tip: To define your default folder, go to Control panel and open the Default folder application. 1 Open the contact card. 2 Press > on the Arrows key t o select the picture frame on t he right-hand side of the card. Press Insert picture . A dialog displaying the contents of the default folder opens. Press Br owse to search for image files, if necessary. Tip: Alternat ively, to insert a picture, press the Menu key and select Card > Insert picture . 3 Select a file and press OK . The image is ope ned in an image viewer. The framed area will be inserted into the contact card. Move the area with the Arrows key and enlarge or reduce the frame size with the and - buttons. Press Insert . For more information, see â Imagingâ on page 233.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 100 Contacts To create or modify templates Tip: Templates do not apply to contact cards in the SIM card, because the layout of a SIM contact car d is fixed. Templates define a set of fields which the communicator uses when creating or displaying a contact card. The default template provides a typical range of fields. You can modify the default template. Y ou can also create custom templates with fields suitable for a particular group of people, such as those living overseas. Figure 32 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Card templ ates . A list of templates opens. 2 Either press New to create a new template, or move to an e xisting template in the list and press Open . A contact card template opens. 3 Edit the template. You can change the name of the template and add or remove fields. After you have created a contact card, the card and its template are linked as follows: ⢠In a template, if you add or change fields or their labels, changes affect all contact cards created from that template. If a field is deleted from the template, the fiel d is deleted from all the cards, except where the fi eld contains data. ⢠In a card, if you remove fields that belong to a template, the empty field will still be there the nex t time you open the card.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 101 Contacts To store DTMF tones DTMF tones are the tones you hear whe n you press the number keys on the phon e keypad. DTMF tones allow you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised telephony systems, etc. You can store a sequence of DTMF tones for a contact card. When you make a call to the contact, you can retrieve the sequence. It will save you from re-entering the characters. 1 Open or create a contact card. 2 Press Add field . A list opens. 3 Scroll down the list to DTMF and press Select . The DT MF field i s inserted in the contact card. 4 Enter a DTMF sequence in the DTMF fi eld. If you need a phone number-DTMF combination number for a contact, store the phone number followed by the DTMF sequence in the Tel field. You can use the following non-numeric characters: Character Function *# The asterisk and hash symbols may be used if the D TMF service requires them p Inserts a pause of approx. 2 seconds before, or between, D TMF characters w If you use this character , the remaining sequence is not sent until you press Send tone again du ring the call.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 102 Contacts To create contact groups You can create contact groups to save time by sending e-mails and short messages to all members of the contact group in one action. 1 With the Contacts directory main view displayed, press the Menu key and select File > New group ⦠. A blank group contact card opens. 2 Enter a name for your group. 3 To add contacts to the group, press Add memb er . A list of contact cards and groups opens. 4 Select a contact and press Add . Note that you can add another contact group to a group. 5 To attach a picture for the group, press > on the Arrows key to move to the picture frame. Alternatively, press the Menu key and select Group > Insert picture . A dialog displaying the contents of the default folder opens. Select a file and press OK , or press Browse to search for a picture file. 6 To save the group contact card, press Done . An example of a contact group with members is shown in Figure 33. Figure 33
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 103 Contacts The company name, if it also exists in the original contac t card, appears to the right of the name of the contact. Select Open to view the details of any of the group members. To change group memberships for a contact or a group Figure 34 1 To view or change the groups to which a contact or a group belongs, open the contact card, press the Menu key, and select Card or Grou p > Belongs to groups . A list opens, showing memberships for the contact or group. 2 To add the card to a new group, press Add to group . A list of contact groups in the current database opens. 3 Select a group and press Add . Your contact card or group contact card is added to the group. 4 Press Done to save your changes.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 104 Contacts To create a SIM contact card You can view the SIM directory by selecting SIM card in the Contacts directory. The contacts in your SIM card are displayed with SIM location numbers, as shown below: Figure 35 1 In the SIM card main view, press New contact . A dialog opens, as shown in Figure 36. If fixed dialling is active, the SIM contents show only your fixed dialling numbers. For more information on fixed dialling, see page 89. 2 The memory location shows the first free location number. To change the location, press Change . 3 Type a name for the contact. 4 Type a number for the contact. Note: The length of the name and the phone number you can enter is defined by the SIM card. For example, s ome SIM cards allow a maximum of only fourteen characters.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 105 Contacts Figure 36 SIM directory options You can sort the contents of the SIM direct ory in alphabetical order or by memory location. Press the Menu key and select View > Sort by > Name , or Sort by > SIM location . To see a summary of the usage of the SIM database, press the Menu key and select File > Properties . If fixed dialling is active, you can see only information about fix ed dialling numbers. To send a contact card as a business card Tip: You can send only one business card in each message you send; however, you can send it to many recipients. When you send or receive a contact card between the communicator and other devices, the term â business cards â is used. A busine ss card is a contact card in a format suitable for transmission, usually vCard format. You can a dd received business cards to your Contacts directory, where they become contact cards. 1 In the Contacts directory main view, select the card you want to send.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 106 Contacts Tip: PC mail and the short message service are explained in th e â Messagingâ chapter, starting on page 159. If a contact card is sent as a short message, the card is sent in t he Sending format defined on page 108. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Se nd . In the Send submenu, make a further choice of media: As a mail / As a short message/ Via infra red . You may have other sending options if you have installed additional software. An editor dialog opens, depending on the sending medium you have chosen, as shown in the example below. The contact card you want to send ha s now become a â business card â . Figure 37 3 To choose who receives the sent card messages, press Recipient . Tip: If you change the setting to in clude images in the message, do not forget to change it back after you have sent the message to reduce call charges. 4 If you are sending via the short message service, the images are left out by default to reduce call charges. If you want to include the image in the message, you must change the setting. See â Send as a short message page â on page 108. 5 If you are about to send via infrared, make sure you activate the receiving of infrared in the other device first. 6 Press Send . To receive a business card When you receive a business card from another device, you are alerted by a notification message. This message appears automatically on the dis play, in any application. Follow the screen prompts to view the business card.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 107 Contacts Note the following informat ion about the contents of received card(s): A field is displayed i f it is recognised; if n ot, it is ignored. Audio data, in a supported format, is set as the personal ringing tone of the contact (if you choose to add the card to your Contacts directory) To add the received card to your Contacts directory, press Add to Contacts . The card is converted to contact card format. To reject the card, press Delete . Settings Press the Menu key and select Tools > Settings , then select a page, as follows: General page Figure 38 Default tem plate : A l l o w s y o u t o d e f i n e w h i c h t e m p l a t e i s u s e d w h e n c r e a t i n g a n e w contact card. When you press Change , you can c hoose a template from a list of templates used with the current database.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 108 Contacts Name display : Allows you to define the display order of names in the Contacts directory main view. The values are First name Last name / Last name , First name . The names will be displayed in the same order in the Telephone application and the cover phone. Default country or r egion : Concerns the country or region whose address format is used when viewing contact card addresses in various displays in the communicator. By default, the address format of the country or region you enter in the Country or r egion field of a contact card is used. If you do not enter information in the Country or region field, the communicator uses the address format of the Default c ountry or region . Each country or region has a predefined address format. Press Change to see a list of countries and regions. Send as a short message page Example: The Nokia 9000 i/ 9110/9110i commun icators and most of the major e- mail clients support the vCard format. Sending format : Allows you to define the format used when sending a business card via the short message service. T he values are Compact / vCard . Co mpact is more widely supported but the number of fields sent is more restricted. Use vCard format if you know the receiving device understands vCard format. Using vCard format, you can send all fields except Note and DTMF . Send contact card pictures : Allows you to control the attaching of pictures when sending business cards in vCard format via the short messa ge service. The options are No / Yes .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 109 Contacts VIP group page VIP group : Allows you to nominate an existing cont act card group to be treate d as VIP group . You can restrict the ringing of incoming calls so that only calls from a member of a VIP group will ring, the others will not ring. See Profile settings, â Other page â on page 81. To create a new contacts database Contacts databases are created on a memory card. 1 Press the Menu key and select File > More options > New database . 2 Type the name of your database, then press the Enter key. See Figure 39. Your new database is added to the Contacts directory as a folder. 3 To add a new card to the new database, select and open the databa se in the Contacts directory, then press New card . To copy or move contacts to the new database, select existing contacts from the Contacts directory, press the Menu key, and select File > More options > Copy to or > Move to . Tip: To see a summary of the usage of the database, press the Menu key and select File > Properties . Figure 39 Note: If you have a read-only memory card, you cannot make changes to the contacts or databases on that card.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 111 Calendar 7. Calendar In the Calendar application, you can create and check your scheduled events, appointments, anniversaries, and birthdays. You can also list things to do and set alarms to all of the calendar entries. You can synchronise your calenda r and tasks with Microsoft and Lotus programs when you connect your communicator to a compatible PC. For information on synchronisation , see â To transfer data from other devices â on page 36 and the PC Suite Guide on the CD-ROM. Calendar entries There are four types of entry that you can store in the Cale ndar application: Example: Use appointment entries for meetings and business lunches. ⢠Appointment entries are the basic entries in your calendar. ⢠Event entries are related to the whole day, not to a specific time of day. Event entries do not appear in the Weekly ti me schedule. ⢠Anniversary entries are repeated annually on the same date. Use Anniversary entries for annual reminders of important dates, such as birthdays or celebrations.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 112 Calendar Tip: You can use the standard clipboard command shortcuts Ctrl X and Ctrl V to cut entries and paste them to a different place. ⢠Task entries are for writing down lists and things to do. These tasks can be prioritised and organised into task lists. Tasks can also have deadlines. There are seven different views to view entries. Pre ss Change view to choose a view. For more information about different views, see â Viewsâ on page 118. To create new calendar entri es There are two ways to create calendar entries: Tip: To send a calendar entry to reserve a time in other device calendars, move to the date that contains the entry an d select the entry with the Arrows key, press the Menu key and select Send > As a short message or Via infrared ⢠Start typing your entry. As you enter characters, Calendar ope ns the default entry dialog of the current view. ⢠Press the Menu key and select File > New entry . Select the entry you want to create. The options are: Appointment ⦠, Event ⦠, Anniversary ⦠, or Task ⦠. This is the way to cre ate a new calendar entry when you do not want to use the default entry type for the particular view. To define information in a calendar entry Tip: To change the default values of an entry details dialog, press the Menu key and select Entry > Default settings . Figure 40
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 113 Calendar Tip: To see how attachments are added to an entry, see page 118. Note: Day, event, anniversary, and task entry all have slightly different entry dialogs. The following descriptions of each dialog page list all the possibilities. Details page Description : The description of the entry. Tip: An untimed entry is displayed with a icon. Timed : Specifies whether a day entry is timed or untimed. â Timedâ means that the entry has a specific start time, en d time, and duration. â Untime d â means that the entry happens on a particular date, but at no specific time. If you select No , you may have to define the date for the day entry in the field below. If you select Yes , you must define the starting and ending time. Date : The date of the entry. Start : The time or date when the ent ry starts, depending on the entry type. Example: The start year may be a person â s year of birth, and the number of years since the start year may be a person â s age. Display year : Displays the start year of the anniversary, the number of years that have passed since the start year, or no year information. The options are Starting year / In number o f years / None. Duration : The durati on of the entry. If you change the value in the Start an d End fields, this field is updated. End : T he time wh en the en try ends. Priority : The priority of a task. The options are High / Normal / Low . Task list : The task list to which the task ent ry is connected. Due date : The deadline of a task. Start warning : The days before the due date when a task starts being shown in today â s entry list.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 114 Calendar Alarm page Tip: You can set an alarm for a task entry only if you have also set a Due date . Set alarm : Specifies whether an alarm is set for the entry. Time before : The time when an alarm set for a timed day entry will go off. Alarm time : The time when an alarm set for an untimed entry will go off. Days before : The number of days before an entry when an alarm will go off. Repeat page Example: If your club has a meeting which takes place on the first Monday of every month, you can set the entry to recur accordingly by selecting Monthly by day . On this page you can determine whether and when you want an entry to be repeated: Repeat type : The repe at type for the entry. The optio ns are No rep eat / Daily/ Working days / Weekly / Monthly by day / M onthly by dat e / Yearly by day / Yearly b y date . Note: Define Repeat type first since the choice of options in the rest of the fie lds depends on what you have selected. Repeat on days : The days on which the ent ry is repeated. Use the Arrows key to go to a day you want to select and press Select . You can select more than one day at a time. See Figure41. Figure 41
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 115 Calendar Repeat on dates : The dates on which the entry is repeated. Use the Arrows key to go to a date you want to select and press Select . Yo u can select more tha n one date at a time. See Figure 42. Figure 42 Example: To define an entry that is repeated Daily with two days between every repeat, define â every 3 days â in Repeat interval . Repeat interval : The time period between repeats. Repeat indefini tely : Frequency of the repetition. The options are Yes / No . Note: It is still possible to remove or edit a single entry even if the entry is repeating. If you edit an entry and change any options except the repeat options, a sele ction list appears. Y ou then choose how you want the change to take place from the following options: All occurrences / Only this occurrence / This and future occurrences / This and past occurrenc es . Status pag e On this page you can define a background colour and status for the entry, as well as specify whether you wa nt to synchro nise the en try: Tip: Colour is a handy way to categorise entries - you see more easily how your time is reserved. Colour marking : Allows you to define the color and letter for the entry symbol, which appears after the text of the entry in all views. When you check your calendar entries in th e Weekly time or Year schedules, th e colour is used for the bar indicating the en try. The letter is used to filter Calendar entries in the Year schedul e.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 116 Calendar Example: If you are not sure if an entry will take place, you can mark it as Tentative . Tentative : Whether an entry is confirmed or n ot. A tentat ive entry is indicat ed with icon next to the entry text . Crossed out : Wh ether an entry has been completed or not. Crossing out an entry does not remove it from the calendar. Synchronisation : Wh ether your calendar entries are shown to othe rs when you connect to the network and synchronise your calendar. The options are Public , Private , and No synchronisation . See the PC Suite Guide on the CD- ROM for more information about synchronisation. To edit an entry 1 Select the entry in the view. 2 Press Enter. A details dialog for the entry opens. Edit the details on the various pages. You can now, for example, reset the alarm or redefine how the entry is repeated in the ca lendar. S ee â To define information in a calendar entry â on page 112. To change an entry type Example: You might have entered an event, but you now want to change it to an appointment. 1 Select the entry in the view. 2 Press the Menu key and select Entry > Change entry type ⦠. 3 Choose a new entry type from the list.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 117 Calendar Tip: To change the default entry type of a particular view, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Default entry type in â View settings â on page 129. To delete entries You should tidy up your calendar from time to time by deleti ng entries, since calendar entries accumulate over time and consume memory. Note: You can also back up your calendar data to a compatible PC. See the PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM for details. To delete a single entry There are two ways to delete a single entry: Tip: The shortcut to delete a single entry is to select it and press Ctrl D. ⢠Select the entry in the view, then press the backspace key. A note is displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. ⢠Select the entry in the view, press the Menu key, and then select File > Delete entry . To confirm the deletion, press OK . To delete a range of entries using defined cr iteria Tip: You can move entries to another file and then to a PC to free up memory. 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Move/Delete ⦠. A dialog box is displa yed with a suggested range of entries to be deleted. 2 Press OK to delete all the entries defined in the dialog box at step 1, or press Options to define further criteria (including whether you want to â moveâ or to â deleteâ . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following and press Done to return to the previous dialog. Details page Action : The consequences of removing the entries. The options are Delete / Move to a file . Entries : The ty pes of entries which will be removed. The options are All / Crossed out .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 118 Calendar Time period : The time scope of the removal. The options are Whole calendar / Until today / From today / Other . Start : The start date of the entries to be removed. End : The end da te of the entries to be removed. Entry types page Choose from the following options: Appointments / Events / Anniversaries / Tasks. To view, create, and delete attachments 1 Open a calendar entry by pressing Enter. The entry details dialog with four pages opens. 2 Press Attachme nts . A selection list of attachments linked to the calendar entry opens. 3 To view a selected attachment, press Open . To create a new attachment, press New . To delete an attachment, press Delete . 4 If you want to add a new attachment, sele ct the type of attachment and press Insert new to create the new attachment or Insert existing to browse for an existing attachment. Views Tip: You can press the Calendar application button repeatedly to cycle the view. The Calendar consists of seven views. The purpose of each view is to help you organise your calendar so that you manage your time effectively on a daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly basis. You can customise the display of each view.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 119 Calendar Commands in all views Tip: In most of the views you can go to today â s date by pressing the Space key on the keyboard. The following command buttons are available in all of the views: Edit - Opens a selected calendar entry for editing. New entry - Enables you to create a n ew calendar entry if there are no entries for that day. You can also create a new calendar entry by just starting to enter characters on the keyboard, see âÂÂTo create new calendar entries â on page 112. Change view - Opens a selectio n list from which you can switch to any of the other calendar views. The options are Month / Week / Day / Task lists / Weekly time schedule / Year schedu le / Anniversaries. Go to da te - Opens a search dialog from which you can, by typing in the desired date, switch to any date in the calendar. Enter the date and press OK . Press Today to go to today â s date. Press Browse to browse through the calendar. Month view Figure 43
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 120 Calendar Left frame Tip: To edit an event, the right frame must be active. If you are in the left frame, go to the desired date and press the Enter key. The focus moves to the right frame. One row in the day table equals one week. Abbreviations for the days of the week are in the highest row. Today â s date is marked in green. Dates that have scheduled events are marked in bold and blue. The currently selected date is highlighted. Right fr ame Tip: To see a list of icons that are displayed in all views, see p age 125. The events of the currently selected date are shown in the day details frame on the right. Week view Tip: To change the starting day of the week, press Extras, open the Control panel , and select Regional settings . Choose Date page and then First day of the week . Figure 44
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 121 Calendar Tip: To move the position of the title box from left to right, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Title location in â View settingsâ on page 129. The week view shows the events for the sele cted week in seven day boxes. The coloured indicator area next to a day box shows the date and name of t he day. Today â s indicator area is framed green. Day view Figure 45 The day view shows the events for the sel ected day. Tip: To change the time period covered in one time slot, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Time slot allocation in â View settingsâ on page 129. Events are grouped into one time slot according to their starting time. To view the day view of the previous day, press < on th e Arrows key. To view the next day, press >.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 122 Calendar Tip: In day and week views, you can quickly move to a different date by pressing the Tab key, selecting the desired date with the Arrows key, and pressing Enter. Task lists Figure 46 Tip: To see how to-do task lists are created, see page 126. You can create one or several business or per sonal task lists which may contain tasks with or without deadlines. You can also set an alarm or a repeat for a task. The page number in the upper right corner of the Task list view indicates the position of the task list among the other task lists. For example, in Figure 46, â 1/6â means that there are altoget her six task lists and â Urgent ta sks â is the first list. Tip: To see a list of all task lists, press the Tab key. To view the previous task list, press < on the Arrows key. T o view the next task list, press >. Due dates are shown to the right of a task, in brackets.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 123 Calendar Weekly time schedule Tip: You can select different bar colours for different types of entries. See â Status page â on page 115. Figure 47 The weekly time schedule shows the reserved hours for the selected week. This means that only timed entries are shown The currently selected time box is framed. Entries are marked with bars. Example: Use a green bar for hobbies and a red bar for business trips to get a quick overview of your activities during a week. See â View settings â on page 129. If a time box contains entries, the bar across the bottom of the weekly time schedule shows the details of the entry. The n umbers to the right of the entry description indicate the number of entries contained in that time box. For example, 1/2 in Figure 47 means that you are seeing the details of the first of two entr ies. If a time box contains more than one entry, you can view a list of the entries by pressing the Tab key.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 124 Calendar Year schedule Figure 48 The year schedule shows the time table for the selected year. Only e ntries with colours are shown in the year schedule. If there are several colours connected to the day, only one can be shown. Abbreviations for the days of the week are in the highest row and the months of the year in the far le ft column. Time boxes have the same functions as in the Weekly time schedule. Anniversaries Figure 49
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 125 Calendar Tip: To change the number of months shown in the anniversary view, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Months in view in â View settings â on page 129. The anniversary view shows the anniversaries for four months at a time. You can add here all the birthdays and other anniversaries that you want to be reminded of. Note: Only anniversary entries are shown in the anniversary view. Icons You can see the following symbols in Calendar : - Alarm - Anniversary - Attachment - Event - Repeating entry - Tentative entry - Task - Task, with high importance - Task, with low importance - Untimed entry
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 126 Calendar Task lists To create a new task list 1 Press the Menu key and select File > New task list ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 2 Define the task list on the two pages of the dialog. See â Details pageâ and â Visibility pageâ below. 3 When you are ready, press Close . The new task list is added in Task li sts. Details page Tip: If you choose to sort a task list manually, all ta sks on the list appear numbered. You can en ter a new tas k entry randomly by focusing on a location in the list. You can also change the order of the tasks by cutting and pasting (Ctrl X and Ctrl V). List name : The name of the task list. Position : The position of the task list among the other task lists. Sorting : How the tasks are sorted hierarchically in the task list. Th e options are Manual / Priority then date / Date then priority . Visibility page Show tasks : The views in which the tasks on the list will be shown. The options are All views / Task list view . Task position : The positio n of the tasks in an event list if the tasks are all shown in All views . To edit a task list 1 Open the task list. 2 Press the Menu key and select View > Task list settings ⦠. A dialog with two pages, Details and Visibility , opens, as explained above.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 127 Calendar To delete a task list 1 Open the task list. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Delete task list . To search for Calendar entries You can search through th e entries for particular pieces of te xts. 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Find entry ⦠. A search field opens. 2 Enter a key word for the entry you want to search for, or press Options to restrict the search by defining a set of qualifications. A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following: Details page Refine search : Defines the search . The options are No / Entries with an alarm / Entr ies with repetition / Crossed out entrie s . Time period : The time scope of the search. The options are Whole calendar / Until today / From today / User def ined . From : The starting point of the search. Until : The ending point of the search. Entry types page Choose the type of entries you want to find. The options are: Appointments / Events / Anniversaries / Tasks . Tip: You can stop a search by pressing Stop . 3 To start searching, press Find . A chronological list of the find results is shown. See Figure 50.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 128 Calendar Figure 50 4 Select an entry and press: ⢠Edit to open the entry details dialog for editing, ⢠Go to to go to the date or view where the entry is located or, ⢠New find to star t a new search . 5 Press Close to ret urn to the currently active view. Settings General settings 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > General settings ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Define the following: Default view : The default view when ope ning either another or a new calendar file. Display untimed entries : The location of untimed appointment, event, and anniversary entries in the entry list of all the timed views. 3 Press Done to return to the currentl y active view.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 129 Calendar View settings You can define the appearance of the view and default entry types for each view by following these steps: 1 Go to the view you want to define. 2 Press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 3 Define the view settings on the two pages of the dialog. See â Details pageâ and â Entry typesâ below. 4 Press Done to return to the currentl y active view. Note: The contents of the di alog vary in different vi ews. The following i s a list of all the possibilities. Details page Default entry t ype : The en try type which is inserted in the view by defau lt when you create a new entry. The options are Appointme nt / Event / Anniversary / Task . Wrap text : Specifies whether or not the information in the entry is wrapped when viewed in any of the views. Title loca tion : Specifies whether the title of the week is on the left or right of the display in the weekly view. Time slotTime slot allocation : The time period covered in one time slot of the daily views and weekly time schedules. The options are 2 hours / 1 hour/ 30 minutes / 15 minu tes . Day starts : The time when a day starts in the Daily view. Day ends : The time when a day ends in the Daily view.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 130 Calendar Show colour markings : Specifies whe ther all entry symbols or only symbols with the letter specified in Defa ult colour are shown in the year vi ew. Default colour : The symbols and background colours of the different entry types in the particular view. Months in view : The number of month boxes in the anniversary view. Entry types On the Entry types page you can choose the entry types you want to appear in the view you are defining: Appointm ents / Events / Anniversaries / Tasks .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 131 Internet 8. Internet This chapter describes how to get access to the Inte rnet and how to use the Internet applications. When you take your communicator into use, it has the following browser applications: WWW - A World Wide Web (WWW) browser supporting frames, JavaScript, and SSL (v.3) protocol. Tip: To access WAP services, you need both an Internet access point and a WAP access point. See page 153. WAP - A browser for accessing various types of information, entertainment, and other services in Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) format. WAP is suited to mobile devices with small screen displays and limited amounts of memory. WAP uses mainly text but does support pictures. To connect to the Internet, ⢠the wireless network you use must support data calls, ⢠the data service must be activated for your SIM card, ⢠you must have obtained an Internet access point from an Internet Service Provider (ISP), and ⢠you must have entered the proper Internet settings. Note: The Mail application, described in the Messaging chapter, also uses an Internet connection . See â Mailâ on page 172. Your ISP can give you instructions on how to conf igure the Internet set tings. Follow the instructions carefully.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 132 Internet Note: You must have your phone turned on, within network coverage and free of any other voice or data call to connect to the Internet. To set up your Internet access point Note: To be able to use the Internet servic es, you need to configure an In ternet connection. Some Internet service providers may offer you the possibility to configure your Internet settings by sending you a smart message via SMS. This might reduce the number of settings you need to enter yourself, or eliminate the need altogether. Please contact your In ternet Service Provider (ISP) for details. Internet connections To set up and change the Internet settings, go to the Control panel in the Extras application group and open Internet access. For more information, see page 218. Figure 51 The first two lines contain a summary of the details of the preferred connection. Define the following:
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 133 Internet Tip: You may have to set up several Internet connections, depending on the sites you want to access. For example, browsing the WWW may require one setup; browsing your company â s intranet may require another connection. Preferred connec tion : The default connection wh ich will be used to connect to the Internet. If idle, stay online : The connection to the Internet will au tomatically close after the inactivity period defined here. The opt ions are For 2 minutes / For 5 minutes/ For 10 minutes / For 60 minutes . IMPORTANT: Some Internet connections may appear inactive, but they may still be sending and receiving data in the background. These conne ctions may delay the start of the inactivity period specified he re, and therefore postpone the closing of the connection. Ask before connecting : The options are Yes / No . If you choose Yes , a connection dialog appears every time yo u connect to the Internet, asking you to either confirm, change, or cancel the connection, or change the Internet access point. If you choose No , the communicator will choose the default Internet access point. To create a new connection or edit an existing connection 1 In the Internet connections dialog, press New to create a new connecti on or Edit to edit an existing connecti on.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 134 Internet Figure 52 2 If you already have connections defined, you can use an existing connection as a basis for the new connection. After you have pressed New, press Use existi ng . Choose the connection you want from the list which appears, and press OK . 3 A dialog on connection details opens. See Figure 53. Note: The exact values for the settings are provided by your ISP. Figure 53 4 Define the following: Tip: All your connections should have different names. Connection name : Give a descriptive name for the connection. Phone number : The modem telephone number of the IAP.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 135 Internet Tip: Often the minimum requirement for an Internet connection is: Phone number , Username , and P assword . Password prompt : If you must type in a new password every time you log on to a server, or if you do not want to save your password, choose Yes . The options are Yes / No . Username : Type in a user name if required by the Internet Service Provider (ISP). The user name may be nee ded to connect to the Internet, and is usually provided by the ISP. The user name is often case-sensitive. Password : Type in a password if required by the ISP. The password may be needed to connect to the Internet, and is usually provided by the ISP. The password is often case-sensitive. Confirm password : Confirm your password by retyping it in this field. Press Advanced settings to define the Advanced setti ngs of the connection. A dialog with four pages opens. See Figure 54. Figure 54 Proxies page You may want to use a proxy to quicken access to the Internet. Note also that some ISPs require the use of Web proxies. Contact your ISP to determine proxy details.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 136 Internet When you have made an Internet connection for your company â s intranet, and you are unable to retrieve Web pages from the general WWW, you may need to setup a proxy server to retrieve Web pages outside your company â s intranet. Tip: If you set Use proxy server to No , Port number , Proxy server , and No prox y for are dimmed. Settings for : Choose the appropriate protocol from the list. The options are HTT P / HTTPS . HTTP is for regular connections and HTTPS is for secure connections (SSL). Use proxy server : To use the proxy se rver, select Yes . The options are Yes / No . Use of a proxy server is dependent on the protocol. Port number : The number of the proxy port. The port number is related to the protocol. Common values are 8000 and 8080, but vary with proxy server. Example : Example domain names are: company.com and organisation.org. In a list, separate domain names with semicolons. Proxy server : The IP address of the proxy server, or the domain name. No proxy for : Define here the domains for which the HTTP proxy is not needed. Data call page Figure 55
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 137 Internet Tip: To divert and bar data calls, go to the Internet application main view, then press Tools > Control panel > Data call barring . Connection type : The options are Normal / High speed . Note: To b e a b l e t o u se High speed , the network service provider has to support this feature, and if necessary, to activate it for your SIM card. Remote modem type : The options are Analog / V.110 IS DN / V.120 ISDN . This setting can depend on both your GSM network operator and ISP, because some GSM networks do not support certain types of ISDN connections. For details, contact your Internet service provider. If ISDN connections are available, they establish connections more quickly than analog methods. Tip: A very basic GSM data connection is: Connection type : Normal , Remote modem type : Analog , and Max. connection speed : Automatic . Max. connec tion speed : The options are Automatic / 9600 /1440 0 /19200 /2880 0 /38400 / 43200 , depending on what you have chosen in Connecti on type and Remote modem type . This option allows you to limit the maximum connection speed when High speed is used. Higher data rates may cost more, depending on the network service provider. Note: The speeds above are the maximum speed at which you r connection will operate. During the connection, the operatin g speed may be less, depending on network conditions. Modem initialisati on : Controls your communicator using modem AT commands. If required, enter characters specified by your GSM network service provider or ISP. Callback page Use callback : This option allows a server to call you back once you have made the initial call, so you have a connection without paying for the call. Contact your Internet service provider to subscribe to this service. The options are Yes / No .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 138 Internet Note: Charges may apply for certain types of received calls, such as roaming and high speed data calls. Contact your GSM network operator for more information. Note: If you are not using HSCSD, the communicator ex pects the callback call to use the same data call settings that were used in the callback- requesting call. The network must support that type of call in both directions, to and from the communicator. Callback type : The options a re Use server number / Use server number (IETF)/ Use number below . Ask your Internet service provider for the correct setting to use. The setting depends on the service provider â s configurati on. Callback number : Type in your communicator â s data phone number which the dial back server uses. Usually, this number is the data call phone number of your communicator. Other page Figure 56 Allow plain t ext login : If you select Yes , the password at connection may be sent in clear. The op tions are Yes / No . For optimum security, use option No . Some Internet service provi ders require t hat this sett ing is Yes .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 139 Internet Use PPP compression : If you select Yes , this option speeds up the data transfer, if it is supported by the remote PPP server. The options are Yes / No . If you have problems with establishing a conne ction, try setting this to No . Con tact your Internet service provider for guidance. Script options If you need to define script options for your Internet connection, press Script options on the Other page. A script can automate the connection between the communicator and the server. See Figure 57. Tip: Your Internet service provider may be able to provide you with a script. Note: Scripts are not usually required when you establish a connection. To find out whether you need a script, contact your Internet service provider. Figure 57 Tip: Advanced users will find scripting an advantage, where use of scripting is allowed. You can obtain instructions from Forum Nokia at URL www.forum.nokia.com Press Edit script to edit the script. In the Edit script dialog you can press Import script to import a script. On importing, it replaces the current contents of the script file. Define the following: Use login script : The options ar e Yes / No .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 140 Internet Display terminal window : The options are Yes / No . If you choose Yes , once a connection is establishe d you see the execution of the script . Use this window when resolving connection problems related to scripting, with your Internet service provider. Address o ptions Tip: There is a glossary containing Internet terms and abbreviations at the back of this user â s guide. Press Addr ess options on the Other page, to define the IP and D NS addresses. See Figure 58. Define the following: Figure 58 Auto retrieve IP address : If you select Yes , the IP address is obtained automatically from the server. The options are Yes / No . This set ting is also called â dynamic IP address â . IP address : The IP address of the communicator. If the IP address is obtained automatically, then you are not required to ent er details here. Auto retrieve DNS address : If you select Yes , the DNS (Domain Name Server) address is obtained automatically from the server. The options are Yes / No . Primary DNS address : The IP address of the primary DNS server. Secondary DNS address : The IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 141 Internet Note: If you need to enter the IP address , Primary DNS addre ss , or Secondary DNS address , contact your Int ernet service provider to obtain these addresses. Tip: When you are browsing the WWW, some Web pages may prompt you to save (download) a file to your local disk (your communicator). See the IMPORTANT note in thi s section warning about viruses. To connect to the World Wide Web To connect to the World Wide Web, ⢠the GSM data service must be activated for your SIM card, and ⢠you must configure an Int ernet access point. Se e page 132. Note: Only install software from sources that offer adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. For information on softwa re installation and security certificates, see â Certificate manager â on page 224. Tip: To change the internet access point press the Menu key in the In ternet application group view and select Tools > Internet access ⦠or go to the Control panel in the Extras application group and open Internet access. For more information, see page 133. Figure 59 To open the WWW browser, 1 Press the Internet application button on the communicator keyboard. 2 Select the WWW application and press Open . . ⢠Unless you have already redefined the default homepage, a Nokia 9210i link page opens. This page is located in the memory of your communicator and does not require an Internet connection.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 142 Internet ⢠If you have redefined a homepage, a dialog with the Connection name and Phone number of the Inte rnet access point you are using is displayed. See Figure 60. You can also ch oose not to see the connection di alog when the connection is made; see â Internet connections â on page 132. To change the Internet access point, press Change connection . Press OK to establish a connection. Figure 60 Note: In order to free up additional memory for large Web pages, all other applications are closed automatical ly when the WWW browser is opened. 3 For information on opening Web pages and navigating in the Web, see â To open a Web page â on page 143. For information on adding a page to your bookmark list, see â Bookmarksâ on page 150 4 To close an application, press Close . Tip: An alternative way to disconnect from the Internet is to c lose the cover and press the key. 5 To disconnect from the Internet, in any of the Internet applications, press the Internet button on the keyboard, then press Disconnect . Disconnection is immediate. Note: Depending on the network configuration and load, establishing an Internet connection may take a minute or more.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 143 Internet To open a Web page There are several ways to open a page in the World Wide Web. Example: An example o f a URL address is www.nokia.com 1 If you know the address of the Web page that you want to visit, press Open URL , type the address into the address field, and press OK . Alternatively, select a link on your default home page and press Go to Tip: In the dialog that opens, press History list to view the list of pages you have visited during the current session. Figure 61 Tip: If you have a bookmark of the page you want to visit, press the Menu key and select Tools > Bookmarks . Select a bookmark in the Bookmarks list and press Go to . 2 A dialog with the Connection name and Phone n umber of the Internet access point you are using is displayed. See Figure 60. You can also choose not to see the connection dialog when the connection is made; see â Internet connecti ons â on page 132. To change the Internet access point, press Change connection . Press OK to establish a connection. Note: If the page and its components are encrypted by a security protocol, the security icon appears on the title bar. Note: Some servers have access restrictions that require a valid user name and password. In this case, you will be prompted for your user name and password before the Web page can be retrieved.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 144 Internet Tip: To save page elements in your communicator, press the Menu key, select File > Save , and select the appropriate submenu command. To browse the WWW After the Web page has been retrieved, t he following commands become available, depending on what is selected on the page: Open URL - Press to open a dialog where you can define a web page to open. Go to - When a link is selected, press Go to to view the target of the link. Back - Allows you to retrieve the previous page that you have just browsed. Bookmarks - Opens the Bookmarks view. Close - Close s the WWW browser application. Note: Stored passwords to individual Web sites are removed when the communicator is restarted or the cookie list is emptied. To clear the cookie list press the Me nu key, and select Tools > Delete cookies .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 145 Internet Tip: To go to your home page, press the Menu key and select Navigation > Go to home page . To browse with the keyboard The best way to browse a page and the WWW is to use both the keyboard shortcuts and the pointer. You can use the Tab key and some other keys to select element s on a page or the pointer as a mouse to select elements directly. The following table lists useful keyboard shortcuts of the WW W application. You ca n find more shortcuts in the application next to menu commands. Key Function Enter Tab Shift Tab A Q S W D E Ctrl T ab Clicks with the pointer Selects the next box, button or othe r form element. Selects the previous form element on a page Selects the next link on a page Selects the previous link on a page Selects the next heading on a page Selects the previous heading on a page Selects the next element on a page Selects the previous element on a page Selects the next frame, if a vailable. Chr up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Ctrl left/right arrow (on Arrows key) Ctrl up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Scrolls the page screen by screen Scrolls to the start or to the end of the page Scrolls the page line by line X Z Moves to the next page, if already visited Moves to the previous page, if already visited
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 146 Internet To browse with the pointer You can see the pointer on the screen when you open a web page. The functionality of the pointer is similar to a mouse, but you move it with the Arrows key and click it by pressing the Enter key. To select an area, keep Enter pressed down and move the pointer over the area with the Arrows key. To scroll a page, you have several options: ⢠Move the pointer onto the scroll bar, press Enter and keep it pressed down as long as necessary. Tip: Press Ctrl T ab to change the active frame. ⢠Move the pointer onto the scroll bar and press the space key to turn on continuous scrolling. The page scrolls and the scroll box moves to the direction of the pointer whenev er the pointer is in the scrolling are a. Press the space key again to turn off contin uous scrolling. ⢠Move the pointer over the edge of t he window to the direction where you want to scroll the page to scroll the page auto matically. Tip: Useful sh ortcuts are: Ctrl R for Reload , and Ctrl Z for Stop loading . Loading options Depending on the number and size of images and other elements some web pages may be slow to load. To control loading you have the following options: Shift Enter G Displays Save as command.Toggles the loading of images on or off. Key Function
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 147 Internet ⢠Reload the page or stop loading altogether; press the Menu key and select Navigation > Reload > Reload or Stop . ⢠Turn off the auto-loading of images. The images are then replaced by placeholders. Press the Menu key and select Tools > Settin gs ⦠, go to the General page and in the Show imag es field select No . ⢠Toggle the loading of images on and off by pressing the G key. To change frame sizes Tip: To change the active frame when a Web page contains frames, press Ctrl Tab. Where a Web page contains frames, you can change the frame sizes of the page, to get a better view of the content s of the selected frame. 1 Move the pointer cursor over a frame border. 2 Press and hold down the Enter key. Arrows are displayed around the selected frame border 3 Use the Arrows key to resize the frame. 4 To cancel the previous move, press Esc. To open a frame as a new page To open the currently active frame as a new page and discard the other frames, press the Menu key and select File > Open > Frame as new page To view pages in high contrast Some Web pages use colours which make reading difficult. To make the page easier to read, press the Menu key and select View > High contrast
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 148 Internet To view pages offline To view local downloaded pages on your communicator without accessing the WWW, press the Menu key and select File > Browse Offl ine WWW settings To change the WWW settings, press the Menu key and select Tools > Settings ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. See Figure 62. Figure 62 General page Show images : The opti ons are Yes / No / Only cached . If you select Yes the WWW browser loads all the pictures on a Web page when it displays the Web page. If you select Only c ached only the pictures stored in cache memory are loaded. Frames options : Th e options are Show all frames / Show frames one b y one / Do not use frames . Some Web pages are split into several frames, which makes reading difficult, so choose an option which suits you.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 149 Internet Advanced page Use cookies : Some Web pages store data on your communicator in files called â cookiesâ . Use this setting to determin e whether to accept cookies, and if you accept them, whether you wish to be prompted each t ime a cookie is stored. The options are Always / Never / Ask . Tip: To delete the cookies, press the Menu key and select Tools > Delete cookies . Note: As cookies accumulate with time, they may eventually take up a large amount of memory space. You can free memory space by deleting the cookies stored in the memory. Tip: To empty the cache immediately, press the Menu key and select Tools > Clear cache . Empty cache on exit : If you select Yes , the cache memory is emptied when you exit the WWW browser. The options are Yes / No . Note The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache of your phone. A cache is a buffer memory, which is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords (for example, your bank account), empty the cache of your phone after each use. Empty history list on exit : I f you select Yes , the history list is emptie d when you exit the WWW browser. The options are Yes / No . Cache, History, and Plugins view These views display a list of information on cache memory, browser history and installed plugins. To view information about the cache memory used for temporary storage of the pages you visit, press the Menu key and select Information > Cache .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 150 Internet To view information about the sites you have visited, press the Menu key and select Information > History list . To view what add-on software for the WWW browser has been installed, pre ss the Menu key and select Information > Plug-ins . Plug-ins can display documents that the WWW browser itself cannot show, such as multimedia clips. You can download plug-ins from the WWW. Bookmarks The Bookmarks view can be accessed by pressing Bookmarks in the main view of the WWW application. See Figure 61. The Bookmarks view lists links to WWW pages in related folders. You can organise, edit, and view these bookmarks. You can also search for them and then connect to the URL addresses directly. See Figure 63. Figure 63
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 151 Internet Tip: To create and rename folders, press the Menu key and select Bookmarks > Insert new folder or Rename folder . To retrieve the currently highlighted Web page, pres s Go to . To open and close folders, press Open folder and Close folder . To edit the name or address of a bookmark, press Edit . To add a new bookmark, press New bookmark . To return to the main view, press Close vi ew . To add a new bookmark while browsing the WWW You can add a Web page, or a frame or link on a Web page, as a bookmark to your Bookmarks list. 1 On an open Web page, press the Menu key and select Tools > Add bookmark . 2 Edit the name and address of the bookmark, if necessary. 3 Press OK . To export the Bookmarks list In the Bookmarks view, press the Menu key and select Bookmarks > Export as HTM L. to export the current Bookmarks list as a HTML document. Note: When you export bookmarks as HTML, the folder structure is lost. WAP The WAP application can be used to access Internet services which are based on the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP). These services can contain news, weather reports, flight times, dictionaries, and so on.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 152 Internet Note: The content of each service depends on the content provider of that service. To use such a service, follow the instructions provided by the content provider. To obtain access to WAP services ⢠you must be within the coverage of a network which supports data calls, ⢠a data service must be activated for your SIM card, ⢠you must have obtained a WAP access point from a WAP service provider, and ⢠you must have entered the proper WAP settings. Differences between the WWW and WAP services applications The WAP application is simila r to the WWW application, but there are two differences: ⢠To access WAP services you need to define WAP access points in your communicator. WAP access points are additional to the Internet settings. You can receive WAP access points directly via a short message from your WAP service provider, or define them manu ally. This chapter contains in structions for manual setup. ⢠Certain bookmarks can be accessed through a specific access point, for example, banking services may have to be accessed through the bank â s own access point. The easiest way to use these kinds of services is to define an altogether new bookmark which uses the correct WAP and Internet access point.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 153 Internet To set up WAP connections Note: Before you can use the WAP services, you need to configure your WAP settings. Your WAP service provider will provide you with the exact values for the WAP settings. Follow the instructions carefully. You can use this information to define and edit the settings manually. Furthermore, your service provider may be able to send some, or all, of the required settings to you via a special short message, an Over The Air (OTA) message. After you have received the settings, you can start using the WAP application or edit the settings as described below. To define an d edit WAP conn ections 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > WAP access . A dialog opens. 2 Press New to create a new connection, and Edit to edit an existing conn ection. A dialog opens. See Figure 64. Figure 64 3 Press Close when you are ready. Tip: The shortcut to define and edit WAP access points is Ctrl Shift X. Name : Name of the connection. All your connections should have different names. You can define each name freely.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 154 Internet Secure connecti on : Whether the security protocol TLS is used for the connection. The options are Yes / No . Follow the instructions given to you by your WAP service provider. See also Glossary term â Transport Layer Securit y â on page 276. Note: Some secure connections use authentication procedures. If authentication fails, you may need to download some certification keys. Contact your WAP service provider for details. Internet access : Choose from a selection list the IAP you wish to use for this connection. If you have no IAPs, you create a new one by pressing New Internet access . See page 133. Gateway IP addres s : The IP address that the required WAP gateway uses. To change WAP access points 1 To change WAP access points, press the Menu key and select Tools > WAP access . A dialog opens. 2 Press Change to change the connection. A list opens. 3 Choose the connection from the list and press OK . Bookmarks The Bookmarks view is the main view of the WAP application. You can organise, edit, and view these bookmarks in the same way as WWW bookmarks, see page 150. Tip: The shortcut to add a bookmark is Ctrl B. To add a bookmark, press the Menu key, then select Bookmarks > Add bookma rk . A dialog opens. See Figure 65.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 155 Internet Figure 65 Note: A bookmark always uses the same connection defined in the WAP access field. To set up a WAP access point, see page 153. To open a WAP page defined in a bookmark, select the bookmark, then press Go to . To edit bookmark settings, select the bookmark, then press Edit . To import or export bookmarks, press the Menu key, then select Bookmarks > Imp ort bookmarks or Export bookm arks , respectively. To navigate WAP services There are three ways to open a WAP page, either: ⢠Choose a WAP bookmark from the list of bookmarks and press Go to . The page is retrieved; or Tip: The shor tcut to go to the home page is Ctrl H. ⢠Go to the WAP application home page. Press the Menu key, t hen select Go to > Home page . For more information on defining the WAP home page, see â WAP settings â on page 156; or Tip: The shortcut to open a URL is Ctrl O. ⢠Open a URL; press the Menu key, then select File > Open page . A dialog opens. Enter the address of the URL, for example: mobile.club.nokia.com .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 156 Internet Once the WAP page is opened, use the â§ an d ⨠arrows on the Arrows key to scroll the view and to choose hyperlinks and hotspots. Note: Some servers have access restrictions that require a valid user name and password. In this case, you will be asked to type in the user name and password before a connection to the service can be established. WAP settings To define WAP service settings, press the Menu key and select Tools > Settings . A dialog with two pages opens. Figure 66 Here you can change settings such as your WAP home page. NOTE: You can use a file on the communicator as your home page. Java The Java in the Nokia 9210i Communicator is a Personal Java applica tion environment designed especially for the communicator. Java enables you to use Java applications downloaded from the Internet.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 157 Internet Java Software Development Kit (SDK) is available in Forum Nokia.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 159 Messaging 9. Messaging Messaging contains the following applications: Fax, Mail and SMS (Short Message Service). To start Messaging, press the Messaging application button on the communica tor keyboard. The overall requirements for using fax, mail and SMS, applications are as follows: ⢠The phone must be turned on. ⢠The network you are using must support fax calls, data calls, and the Short Message Service. ⢠The fax, data and Short Message Service must be activated for your SIM card. Tip: To set Internet settings, see page 132. To set Mail settings, see page 172. ⢠You must have obtained an Internet Access Point (IAP) from an Internet service provider. ⢠You must have entered the proper Internet and Mail settings ⢠The short message centre number must be stored in the settings of the SMS application. Contact your home service provider for details. When you connect your communicator to a PC, you can synchronise your e-mails with Microsoft Windows programs. You can also reply to and rea d remotely Microsoft Windows and Lotus e-mail. For information on synchronisation, see â Mail synchronisation wit h your PCâ on page 184 and the PC Suite Guide.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 160 Messaging Messaging centre Figure 67 Tip: You can move between the two frames with the Arrows or Tab key. The main view of Messaging has two frames: on the left is a list of the folders in the Messaging centre, and on the right are the messages connected to the currently selected folder. Folders in the Messaging main view are: Inbox - Received faxes and short messages. Received mail appears in the Remote mailbox folder. Outbox - Messages which are waiting to be sent from the communicator. Drafts - Saved message drafts. Sent - Messages which have been sent from the communicator. Any remote mailboxes that you set up appear at the bottom of the folder list. To open folders and messages To open a folder, select the left frame in the main view of Messaging, go to the folder and press Open folder .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 161 Messaging Tip: You can also press Enter to open messages and folders. To open a message, in the message list of the main view, go to the message and press Open . The message opens in the appropriate viewer, for example, a mail message opens in the mail viewer. To manage folders You can create your own folders in Drafts , in your own folders and in the root of the folder list. You cann ot create new folders in Inbox , O utbox or Sent . Tip: You can create folders to IMAP4 remote mailboxes when online. 1 Select the left frame in the main view of the Messaging. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Folder > Create n ew folder ⦠. 3 Type a name for the new folder. 4 Select where you want to create the folder. 5 Press Create . The new folder appears on the folder list. To move faxes, mail and short messages from one folder to another, select the file, press the Menu key and select Edit > Move . To search faxes, mail and short messages for names, dates, time, or any other pieces of text press the Menu key and select Tool s > Find ⦠. For further details, see â To search for textâ on page 30. To sort messages and faxes You can also sort faxes, mail and short messages by various criteria, such as date and size, which affects the way they appear in the different views of Messaging.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 162 Messaging Tip: To choose the sorting order, press the Menu key and select View > Sorting order . Choose between Ascendi ng and Descend ing . 1 Open the folder where you want to sort the messages and faxes. 2 Press the Menu key and select View > Sort by . 3 Choose from the following options: Message type / S ender/Reci pient/ Subject/ Date/ Size / Priority . Inbox Figure 68 Tip: To reply to a message in the Inbox, press the Menu key and select Write > Re ply . Unread messages appear in bold. The icons in front of messages indicate message type, priority and possible attachments. Here are some of the icons that you may see: new mail in remote mailbox new fax new short message (SMS) new voice mail message new message from your network service provider new business card new calendar i nvitation
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 163 Messaging new ringing tone new remote configuration data unread mail unread mail received from PC by synchronisation priority high priority low message contains an attachment Outbox Tip: You can send faxes, mail and short messages immediately, at a predefined time or upon request, depending on a delivery setting. See Sending options in the corresponding editors. Figure 69 Statuses Faxes, mail and short messages waiting to be sent from the communicator can have the following statuses in Outbox: Sending - The fax or short message is currently being sent. Upon request - The mail, fax, or short message will be sent only if you specifically press Send now in the Outbox view.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 164 Messaging Waiting - The fax or short message is queuing to be sent and will be sent as soon as possible, for example, when the phone is switched on, signal strength becomes adequate, or the previous phone call ends. In the case of mail messages, Waiting shows that the message will be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox. Calling ⦠- Outbox is calling the recipient of the fax message. Preparing... - Outbox is rendering a T.4 format fax image; this means that colour is converted to black and white. Failed - One or more pages of a fax or short message fa iled to be sent. Tip: If the status of a fax, mail or short message is Suspended , Resend or Scheduled , you can open and delete it, or resu me sending. Suspended -You have suspended the sending of the message or fax. You can resume the sending of a message by pressing Send now in the Outbox view. Resend - The fax or short message failed to be sent but the communicator will retry to send it. Scheduled - The fax or short message is scheduled to be sent at a specific time. To cancel the sending of a fax, mail or short message, select it and press Cancel sending . When a message or fax has been successfully sent, it is automatically moved to the Sent folder. To write and send faxes, mail and short messages There are two ways you can start creating faxes, mail and short messages in the Messaging application:
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 165 Messaging Tip: If you a re already writing a message or fax and want to start on a new message, press the Menu key and select File > New short message or New fax . ⢠Press any of the following commands in the main view of Messaging: Write fax , Write mail or Write shor t message . ⢠Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Write > New message ⦠. Then select the appropriate message type. You can also send send faxes, mail and short messages in all the applications where you can find the option File > Se nd after pressing the Menu key. Tip: When you st art writing a new fax, mail or short message, a temporary copy of it is automatically stored in the Drafts folder. It is removed from Drafts and placed in Outbox once you press Send . If you want to save, but not send a fax, mail or short message you have just writte n in the corresponding editor, press Close . The message is saved in the Drafts folder. The saved message replaces the previously saved version of the same message. To revert back to the previously saved version of the mail or fax, press the Menu key and select File > Discard changes . Note that this is not possible with short messages. To select recipients There are two ways to select recipients to your fax, mail and short messages: Note: A fax can have only one recipient. 1 Press Recipient in the corresponding message editor. A dialog listing your contacts opens, see figure 70. Figure 70
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 166 Messaging Tip: You can select more than one cont act at a ti me, see â To select several items at once â on page 26. 2 Search for a contact or contacts in the left frame and press Select . The right frame shows the contacts you have already selected; to remove a contact, select it and press Remove . 3 Press Done . You can also just type in the first letters or the whole name of the recipient into the header of the fax, mail or short message and check if the letters or name match an entry in your contacts database: 1 Type in the name of the recipient into the header of the message. 2 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Check names . Tip: In the case of mail, you need to select the contacts to the appropriate fields in the dialog by pressing To , Cc or Bcc . 3 If the name you have entered matches to more than one name, or if the person has more than one GSM phone number, fax number or mail address, a selection list appears. Select the correct name, phone number, or address from the list and press Select . Checked recipients are moved to separate lines in the header of the message. Note that a fax can have only one recipient. 4 To add another recipient to a mail or short message, press Enter after a checked recipient or insert the semicolon â ;â as a separator. To delete a checked recipient, move the cursor to the end of the entry and press backspace. To avoid low memory You should regularly delete messages from Inbox and Sent folders and delete retrieved mail from the communicator memory to free up memory space.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 167 Messaging WARNING! If you do not use this method to delete mail messages from your communicator, the messages you delete from your communicator may also be permanently deleted from your remote mailbox the next time wh en you go on line. Tip: Use a PC mail client to move mail messages from your remote inbox to other folders for archiving. If you keep th e number of messages in the remote inbox to a minimum, your communicator has more available memory and the mail connection is faster. To delete dowloaded mail messages from the communicator: 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Tools > Message storage ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 2 On the Communicator page you can choose to delete all mail messages or messages older than a given time period. To delete selected messages, press Delete now . Messages are deleted from your communicator â s memory, but they are not deleted from your remote mailbox. On the Memory page, you can delete or move messages from the current store. To change the store in use, press Change . To move the message storage from communicator â s memory to a memory card or vice versa, press Move . To delete all the messages in the selected messa ge storage, press De lete . Tip: See â Mail attachments â on page 182 to delete attachments from received mail messages. WARNING: Deleting the message storage deletes per manently all messages and mailbox folders and restores all messaging settings to factory defaults. Note: If you create a new message store to a memory card and remove the card a new storage must then be created in the internal memory when new messages are received. This leads to a situa tion where you cannot move messages from one memory storage to another, since only one me ssage store at a time can be in use.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 168 Messaging Fax Tip: For more advanced word processing, use Word Processor instead of the fax editor. You can w rite and send faxes in the fax editor. You can write documents in the Word Processor or Sheet applications and then send them as faxes. It is also possible to send faxes with embedded images. For details on images, see â Imagingâ on page 233. To write and send a new fax 1 Press Write fax in the main view of Messaging. The fax editor opens, see figure 71. Tip: You can zoom in th e fax editor. Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom > Zoom in or Zoom out Figure 71 Tip: To select a recipient, see details on page 165. 2 Write the fax. To format the text, press the Menu key and select Format . 3 Press Recipien t to select the recipient. A fax can have only one recipient. Tip: To define a specific date and time when th e fax will be sent, select Scheduled in the Send fax option. 4 If you wish to adjust the sending options of the fax, press Se nding options . For details, see Fax settings on page 171. 5 Press Send . Note: Voice calls are not possible when a fax is being sent or received.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 169 Messaging Fax cover page Tip: To define the default format of the header in your faxes, and if you want a cover template to be attached to the faxes, see â Fax settingsâ on page 171. You can attach a cover page to the fax you are currently creating or editing. 1 Press Sending options and then select Fax cover page . 2 Choose one of the following options: None : The header of the fax will have only the To: and Fax n umber: fields. Header : The header of the fax will have information about the sender and recipient of the fax, and the date of the fax. Template 1 : The header field of the fax will have information about the sender and recipient of the fax and a separate Remarks: field. Full template : The header field of the fax will have more information about the sender and recipient of the fax, the date of the fax and a separate Re marks: field. You can save and use customised cover templates in the Templates folder using File manager; for more information see page 206. Whatever cover template you use, the availa ble recipient in formation is filled in automatically. To receive and read faxes Tip: To forward a received fax, press the Menu key and select File > Forward . Faxes are received automatically, provided th at this service is available and that the phone is turned on and within network coverage. When a new fax is received, you hear a tone - unless the system is set to a silent profile - and an information note is shown on the display. Tip: You can zoom and rotate in the fax viewer. Each press of Rotate rotates the fax 90 degrees clockwise. Press Open to view the fax. To open a fax received earlier, go to the Inbox, select the fax and press Open . Note: If a fax is not received completely due to some failure, it is named Incomplete fax .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 170 Messaging To select and save all or part of a received fax You can select all or part of a fax and save it in another format for further editing. To select an area of a fax page 1 Press the Menu key in the fax viewer and select Tools > Selectio n frame . A selection frame appears in the fax viewer. 2 Use the arrows key to move the selection frame to the upper-left corner of the area you want to select. 3 To change the size of the selection frame, press and hold the Ctrl key and press the arrows key. To cancel the selection, press the Menu key and select Tools > Selection frame again, or just press Esc key. To save fax in another format 1 Press the Menu key i n the fax viewer and sel ect File > Export ⦠. Select the range to be exported. The options are Whole document / Current page / Se lected / User defined . Press OK . A dialog opens. 2 Specify the name and location of the new document. To change the format of the new document, press Change format. 3 Press OK to save the exported fax file. Fax polling You can retrieve faxes from a remote fax box by using Fax polling, if available in the network. It allows you to make a fax call to a fax machine and then receive information by fax.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 171 Messaging To retri eve faxes from a remote fax box 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Receive > Fax > Dial fax poll . 2 Type in the fax number for the remote fax box, or choose the number by pressing Recipient . 3 Press Call to call the number . Fax settings Any changes you make to fax settings affect the way in which your faxes are sent and received. 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Tools > Account settings ⦠. 2 Select Fax and press Edi t . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following: Settings page Fax cover page : Defines whether or not a cover page will be used. The options are None / Header / Templ ate 1 / Full template - In addition to the options above, the option list may contain other cover templates saved in the Templates folder. Send fax : Defines when the fax will be sent. The options are Immediately / Upon request . Advanced page Resolution : The resolution of the sent an d received f axes. The opt ions are High / Standard .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 172 Messaging ECM : Defines whether or not the Error Correction Mode is used when faxes are sent. If set to On , any pages containing errors are automatically returned to sender, until the defects are corrected. The options are On /Of f . Resend : Defines which pages will be sent again if the fax sending ha s failed. The options are All pages / Missed pages. Mail The Nokia 9210i Communicator mail system is compliant with Internet standards SMTP, IMAP4 (rev 1) and POP3. To be able to receive and send ma il, you need to have set up a re mote mailbox service. This service may be offered by an Internet service provider, a network service provider, or your company. Tip: If you press Write mail in the main view of Messaging and you have not set up your mail account, you will be prompted to do so. Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and forward mail on your communicator, you must do the following: ⢠You must configure an Internet access point (IAP) correctly. See â To set up your Internet access point â on page 132 ⢠You must define your Mail settings correctly. See â Mail settingsâ on page 172. Note: Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and Internet service providers. Mail settings Any changes you make to mail settings affect the way your mail is sent and received.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 173 Messaging To connect to your remote mailbox, you need to define a mail account on your communicator: 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of the Messaging centre and select Tools > Account settin gs ⦠. 2 Press Create new . A selection list of possible account types opens. 3 Select Mail and press OK . A dialog with four pages opens. See figure 72 Figure 72 4 Define the following: General pa ge Mail account name : The name of the remote mailbox. You can type here any name to describe the mailbox. My name : Type in your name. Username : Type in your user name. Password : Type in your password. If you le ave this field blank, you will be prompted for a password when you try to read mail in your remote mailbox. My mail address : Type in the mail address given to you by your service provider.The address must contain the â @â character. Replies to your messages are sent to this address.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 174 Messaging Internet access : The IAP connection used for the mailbox. Choose an IAP from the list. To create an IAP, see â To set up your Internet access poi nt â on page 132. Default account : Choose a mail account from the list. When you set up an account for the first time, it will be the defaul t until more accounts are crea ted. Servers pa ge Tip: Outgoing mail servers are typica lly called SMTP servers or hosts and incoming mailservers are called POP3 or IMAP4 servers. Mail account type : Defines the mail protocol your remote mailbox se rvice provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . Outgoing ma il server : The IP address or host name of the computer that sends your Internet mail. Incoming mail server : The IP address or host n ame of the computer that receives your Internet mail. Retrieve Tip: If you prefer reading your mail messages and replying to them while connected to y our remote mailbox, select Mail headers (stay online) . If you prefer to retrieve the messages and disconnect, select Mess ages . Retrieve : Specifies what will be retrieved from the remote mailbox when the connection is established. The options are Mail headers (st ay online) / Messages / Messag es and attachments . The Message s option is available only if the mailbox type is IMAP4 . Max. size of mail : The maximum size of a message which is retrieved. The minimum is 1 KB and maximum 1000 KB. Sync. mails in Inbox : Specifies the number of message headers to be retrieved from Inbox of the remote mailbox. The options are All / None or you can define the appropriate number of messages to be retrieved.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 175 Messaging Sync. mails in folders : Specifies the number of message headers to be retrieved from the folders of the remote mailbox excluding Inbox. The options are All / None or you can define the appropriate number of messages to be retrieved. Advanced page Default mail type : The type of mail that you can write and send from your communicator. The options are Plain text (no MIME) / Plain text/ Formatted text (HTML) . Send mail : How mail is sent from your communicator. The options are Immediat ely / During next con nection / Upon request . Include signature : Specifies whether your signature is attached to sent mail. The options are No / Use my contact card / Custom . If you choose Custom , you can press Edit signature to modify the signature file. Request read report : The options are Yes / No . If you choose Yes , you will receive a notification when the recipient has opened your mail. You can only receive a notification if the recipient â s e-mail application supports this feature. Allow report request s : The options are Yes / No . If you choose No the sender of a message you receive will not get a notification, when you open the message. Copy to my mail address : The options ar e Yes / No . Secure login (APOP) : Used with POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to a remote mail server. The options are Yes / No . Secure connection (TLS) : Used with POP3, IMAP4 and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to a remote mailbox. The options are Yes / No .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 176 Messaging IMAP4 folder path : Define the location of the IMAP mail folder here, if not defined automatically. This option is available only if the mailbox type is IMAP4. To edit an account 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Tools > Account settings ⦠. A list of accounts opens. 2 Select the account you want to edit and press Edit . 3 Define the settings on the General , Servers , Retriev e and Advanced pages explained above. 4 Press the Esc key to discard any changes. Press Done to accept the changes you have made. Note: You cannot edit mailbox settings when online. To write and send new mail Tip: If you cannot send mail from your communicator, check first that your mail address is correct in Mail set tings. See page 173. 1 Press Write mail in the main view of Messaging. The mail editor opens, see figure 73. Figure 73 Tip: To see how to select recipients, see page 165. 2 Write the mail message.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 177 Messaging 3 Press Recipient to select the recipient or recipients of the message, or type in the name or mail address into the To: , Cc: and Bcc: fie lds. You can move from one insertion field to another by pressing the Tab key. 4 If you wish to adjust the sending options of the mail message, press Sendi ng options . A dialog with two pages opens, see page 178. 5 Press Send . Tip: You can zoom in the mail editor. Note: You cannot enter accented characters, such as é or ä , into mail addresses. Recipients There are three hierarchy levels of recipients in a mail message: Tip: To hide or show Cc: and Bcc: fields i n the mail editor, press the Menu key and select View > Show Cc field or Show Bcc field . To: - Message is sent directly to the recipient. Cc: - A copy of the message is sent to the recipient, and the recipient â s name is visible to other recipients of the message. Bcc: - A copy of the message is sent to the recipient, but the recipient â s nam e is not visible to other recipients of the message. Note: The addresses you have entered are checked against your contacts database once you press Send . Names whi ch do not match wi th the contacts database, or addresses which do not have â @â , should be removed from the address fields. If a name you have entered in one of the address fields matches a group na me, the name is replaced with the mail addresses of the group members. Style of sen t mail You can format only HTML messages. Press the Menu key and select Format > Formatting . This opens the following options for formatting: Bold , Italic , Underline and Bullets .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 178 Messaging Tip: To format the font for a select ed text area , press the Menu key and select Format > Font ⦠. To set a preferred font for plain text and HTML mail, press the Menu key and select Tools > Preferences ⦠. To align a mail message, press the Menu key and select Format > Alignment . This opens the following options: Left , Centre and Right . Sending options Tip: In the case of PC mail message (see page 184), Priority and Mail account in use are the only options you can change. The options in the Sending options dialog contain values set in mail settings, as explained on page 172. Press Sending options to open the dialog. Any changes you make in this dialog affect only the current mail message you are about to send. Note: Changing the options in the Sending options dialog affects the format of the message when it is opened by t he recipient. For example, the format may affect the legibility of the characters. Message page Priority : The priority of a message. The options are High / No rmal / Low . Message type : The type of the message. The options are Plain text (no MIME) / Plain text / Format ted text (HTML) . Request read report : Specifies whet her to add to the outgoing mail, a request for you to receive notification, if the recipient has opened your mail. Delivery page Mail account in use : The remote mail service which is used for sending this message. Note: Changing the mail account does not change the default options in other fields of this page.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 179 Messaging Send mail : When the message will be sent. The options are Immediately / Upon request / During next con nection . To retrieve mail Tip: Delete mail regularly from your communicator to free up memory space. For more information, see â To avoid low memory â on page 166. Mail addressed to you is not autom atically received by your communicator, but by your remote mailbox. To read your mail, you must first connect to the remote mailbox and then select the messages you wish to retrieve into your communicator. Connection to a remote mailbox is established via a data call. WARNING! Messages that you mark as deleted when offline will also be deleted from the remote mailbox server, when onli ne. To delete local mail messages without deleting remote mailbox files, see â To avoid low memory â on page 166. To connect to a remote mailbox 1 Select the remote mailbox in the left frame of the main view of Messaging. Tip: If you do not specif y a password when initia lly conne cting to the r emote mailbox, a dialog opens. Type in the password and press OK . 2 Press Retrieve mail . 3 When the connection to the remote mailbox has been established, press the Menu key and select Retriev e > New or Select ed or All mail. 4 When all the mail you have requested is retrieved, press Go offline . Note: Pressing Go offline does not necessarily disconne ct the phone, if there are other applications open that use the connection. Press the Menu key and sele ct File > Disconnect to hang up.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 180 Messaging To subscribe and unsubscribe to remote mailbox folders If your remote mailbox is of IMAP4 st andard, you can edit and synchronise remote inbox folders in your communicator. To do this, you need to subscribe to the folders and make them visible in your communicator. Tip: To create new folders in your remote mailbox, go online, press the Menu key and select File > Folder . You can now choose whether to Create new folder ⦠or Rename folder ⦠. 1 Go online. 2 Press the Menu key and select Receive > Folder subscriptions ⦠. A list of folders in the remote mailbox opens. 3 Select the folder. 4 Press Subscribe . If you have already subscribed to the folder, press Un subscribe to cancel the subscription. 5 Press Go offline and Go online to include the new subscribed folders in the list. To read mail You can read, reply to and forward mail in the ma il viewer. To read received messages, select the message in the Inbox and press Open . The mail viewer shows the message in a read-only state, which means that you cannot edit it or the a ttachments linked to it. If there is a Web link in the message, you can open it by going to that link and pressing Use . Tip: You can create new contacts from the other recipients of a received mail; press the Menu key and select Tools > Add to contacts . If there is a fax, mail or short message link in the message, you can write a fa x, mail or short message by selecting the link and pressing the corresponding command button. This opens the appropriate editor where the recipient field is completed using the fax, mail address or GSM number in the link. To delete the message, press Delete .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 181 Messaging WARNING! Messages marked as deleted when offline will also be deleted from the remote mailbox server, when online. To delete local mail messages without deleting remote mailbox files, see â To avoid low memory â on page 166. To reply to mail 1 Select the mail message in Inbox and press Open . The mail viewer opens. Tip: To forward mail, press the Menu key and select File > Forward . 2 Press Reply . The mail editor opens. If you wish to reply to all the recipients, not just the sen der of the mail message, press the Menu key and select File > Reply to > All recipients . Tip: To search and replace text in a ma il, press the Menu key and select Edit > Find ⦠. 3 Edit the message in the mail editor and press Send . Note: When replying to a mail message, HTML messages are included as attachments. Style of re plied to, and f orwarded mail You can edit the style of replied to, and forwarded mail. 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Preferences ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Define the following: Include message in reply : If you choose Yes , the origina l message is included in the reply to the message. The options are Yes / No . HTML normal f ont : Defines t he default font size and family used in HTML messages. Note that HTML messages may contain tags that change what you set in this option. HTML font si ze : Defines the size of the font used in HTML messages. Plain text font : Defines the font used in plain text messages. Plain text font size : Defines the size of the font used in plain text messages.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 182 Messaging Mail attachments You can send most documents and message s you write in t he other applications of your communicator as mail attachments. WARNING! Mail attachments may contain viruses or they can otherwise be harmful to your communicator or PC. Do not open any attachment, if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender. For more information, see â Certificate manager â on page 224 To add mail attachments Tip: To edit ma il attachments, press the Menu key and select Attachm ents > Edit . You cannot edit att achments in received mail messages. 1 Press the Menu key in the mail editor and select Attachments > Insert file ⦠. 2 Search and select the file you wish to attach to the mail. To view and save mail attachments Attachments always appear at the bottom of an open mail message. You can view the attachments using the appropriate viewers, if available. Tip: To open an attachment for viewing, select it with the Arrows key and then press Enter. 1 Open the mail message containing attachments and press Attachments . A dialog opens. 2 Press Open to open the attachment for viewing. Press Save to save the attachment. Press Delete locally to delete the attachment from your communicator; the attachment is not deleted from your remote mailbox.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 183 Messaging Working online and offline Working online means working with your communicator connected to a remote mailbox via Internet connection. When you work offline which means that your communicator is not connected to a remote mailbox, you can delete only messages, not folders. When online, you can delete, rename or create new folders in your remote mailbox. Note: Any changes you make in the remote mailbox folders while offline take effect in your remote mailbox the next time you go online and synchronise. For example, if you delete a mail message from your communicator when offline, the message will be deleted from the remote mailbox the next time you connect to the mailbox. If you want to delete a message from your communicator to save memory, see â To avoid low memory â on page 166. Managing your mail offline enables you to save in connection costs and work in conditions that do not allow data connection, such as on aircraft. For information about using your communicator on an aircraft, see â Flight profile â on page 91. Remember also relevant warnings, see â IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION â on page 261. PC Mail Whereas you can send and receive Internet mail over a data call, you cannot send PC mail from the communicator. PC mail is mail you can read, write and edit on your communicator, but which you can send and receive only through a PC, the next time you synchronise your communicator with the PC.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 184 Messaging Mail synchronisation with your PC Synchronisation is the process of making the contents of your mail messages and mail folders identical on both your communicator and your PC. This is done by copying and combining information between the two machines. For more information, see PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM. Mail synchronisation copies the messages between your communicator and your PC E-mail program to allow you use either machine for reading and replying to messages. You can convert Internet mail to PC mail so that it is synchronised with a PC, or convert PC mail to Internet mail so that it can be sent directly from the communicator. All synchronisation settings are defined on the PC. The only setting you can do on your communicator is to delete the account you are using. To create new PC mail Note: You need to have set a mail account on your remote PC to be able to create new PC mail. 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Write > New message ⦠. A selection list appears. 2 Select PC mail and press OK . If you have more than one PC account, a dialog opens indicating which PC account will be used when sending the PC mail. Select the PC account a nd press OK . 3 Write th e PC mai l in the ma il edito r.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 185 Messaging To convert to PC or Internet mail Tip: You can view and edit PC mail just li ke Internet mail on your communicator. Note: HTML messages cannot be converted since PC mail does not support the sending of HTML messages. You must change the message type to plain text or non-MIME type in the Sending options dialog, before you can convert the message to PC mail. See page 178 for more information. PC and Internet mail appear together in the folders. 1 Select the mail message or messages you wish to convert. Tip: PC mail is distinguished from Internet mail by a different icon. 2 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Convert to in ternet mai l or Convert to PC mail , depending on the type of mail you wish to convert. 3 If there are multiple PC mail or SMTP services defined, a selection list of available services defined in the messaging server will be shown. Select the service and press Convert . Note: You can convert several mails at the same time, but make sure that the mails are of the same type, either Intern et or PC mail. Short Message Service Tip: Your service provider may send you smart messages in the form of short messages; these messages may include, for example, configuratio n settings. For details, contact your service provider. The Short Message Service (SMS) e nables you to send and receive short messages over the digital wireless network. Short messages can be sent or received even during voice, data, and fax calls. Messages can be read in any mobile phone that has the capability. If the receiving phone is switched off at the time of sending, the short message centre continues to attempt to send the message until th e validity period allowed by the net work expires.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 186 Messaging Note: If you want to send text you hav e written or edited in another appl ication as a short message, all embedded objects or any rich formatting will be lost. You cannot send attachments as short messages, either. To write and send a new short message Note: You cannot change the font, style or format of short messages. Tip: When sending a short message that contains special or accent ed characters to an older mobile phone, the older phone may not be able to view the message. In this case, send the message without specia l or accented characters. 1 Press Write short message in the main view of Messaging. The SMS editor opens, see figure 74. Figure 74 Tip: You can zoom in th e SMS editor. Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom > Zoom in or Zoom out 2 Press Recipien t to select the reci pient, or type the number directly into the header of the message. 3 Press the Arrows key to move down to the message field an d write the short message. To view the length of the current me ssage, press the Menu key and select View > Message length .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 187 Messaging Tip: To define a specific date and time when the short message will be sent, select Scheduled in the Send short message option. 4 If you wish to adjust the sending options of the short message, press Sending options . A dialog with two pages, Sending op tions and Advanced opens. For details, see SMS settings on page 188. 5 Press Send . To receive and read short messages Tip: Your Inbox shows the date of received short messages and the time of the short messages received on the current day. To view when it was sent, open the message in the SMS viewer. Short messages are received automati cally, provided that this service is availabl e and that the phone is on and within network coverage. When a new short message arrives, a tone will sound - unless the device is set to a silent profile - and an information note is shown on the display. The SMS viewer shows the message in a read-only state, which means that you cannot edit it. Tip: To create a contact card of the sender of a short message, press the Menu key and select Tools > Add to Contacts ⦠. Received short messages can also contain some special text s trings such as URLs. If a URL is highlighted when you move the cursor over it, you can open the corresponding link by pressing Use . To reply to short messages Tip: When replying to a message, you can choose whether you want the text of the received message to be in the reply. Select No in Include original in reply in SMS settings to minimise the length of the reply. Open the message, press Reply and write another short message. If the received message has a reply path, the note Reply via same centre is shown in the header of the message. Short messages on the SIM card To move and copy messages from the SIM card to the Inbox, press the Menu key and select Receive > Short me ssage > SIM message s . To move, copy or delete messages, press the corresponding command button.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 188 Messaging SMS settings Any changes you make to SMS settings affect the way in which your short messages are sent and received. 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Tools > Account settings ⦠. 2 Select Short message and press Edi t . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following: General pa ge Press Service centres , which opens a dialog w here you can define new message centres, as well as edit and delete existing ones. All message centres are listed by name and number. Service centre in use : Defines the service centre that is used for delivering the short messages. Tip: To open the system log, press the Menu key and select Tools > Log . Delivery report : If you choose Yes , you can view the status of the sent message ( Pending , failed, Delivered ) in the system log. If you choose No , only the status sent is shown in the system log. Send short message : You can select when you want the message to be sent. The options are Immediately / Upon req uest / Scheduled . When Scheduled is selected, you must define a Date . Validity period : If the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the specified validity period, the message is removed from the short message service centre. If Maximum is chosen, the validity period is set to the maximum value allowed by the message centre. Note that the network must support this featur e. The option s are 1 hour / 6 hours / 1 day/ 1 week/ Maximum.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 189 Messaging Advanced page Reply via same centre : This network service allo ws the recipient of your short message to reply using your message centre. If you choose Yes and the recipient replies to your message, the return message is sent using the same service centre number. This requires that the recipient has subscribed to the Short Message Service, is able to a reply to a message, and uses a device which supports this feature. Note also that the network must support this feature. Include original in reply : Specifies whether text in the received short message is quoted when you make a reply. If you choose Yes , the contents of the message body are copied to a new short message. Concatenation : If set to No , messages longer than 160 characters are sent as several short messages. If set to Yes , messages that are lo nger than 160 characters are sent as several messages, but if the recipient has a Nokia communicator, the messages are received as one long message.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 191 Office 10. Office Office contains the Word Processor, Sheet, and Presentation viewer applications, which are all compatible wi th Microsoft Windows. Office als o contains a File manager application for file and folder management tasks like moving, copying, and renaming files and folders. Figure 75 Word Processor You can use Word Processor to write new and edit existing text documents. You can insert and view images and other files in the documents. You can also send and receive documents as fax, SMS, mail, PC mail, or via infrared. You can open, edit and save documents created with Microsoft Word for Windows versions 95, 97 and 20 00. Note that not all fea tures and formatti ng of the original documents will be supported. Documents made with other versions of Microsoft Word can only be viewed. For information on other file format conversions, see the PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 192 Office To create a new document Tip: You can use the clipboard command shortcuts Ctrl x, Ctrl c, and Ctrl v to cut, copy, and paste text. When you open the Word Processor application, a new document is opened. You can start writing immediately. You can modify the style of a document on a font and a paragraph level. You can use different fonts, font sizes, and styles. You can apply different predefined or user-defined styles by either modifying particular pieces of text separately or by using a template on which the style of the text is based (see page 194). To change fonts 1 Press Font in the document you are creating or editing. A dialog opens, see Figure 76. Figure 76 2 Press Change to change the value of a list item. To see the effect of the changes you have made, press Preview . 3 Press Done to save the changes you have made. To change text style 1 Select the text whose style you wan t to change. 2 Press Style . A list of choices in alphabetical order opens.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 193 Office 3 Select a style option from the list and press Set : These are the default values of the style options in the list: To create a new or modify an existing style option 1 Press Style . 2 To crea te a new sty le optio n, press New . Or, to modify a style option, select the style and press Edit . A dialog opens. 3 Give the style option a new name by typing over the old name. Note that you canno t edit the nam es of th e defaul t styl es. Press Format to view a list of style values you can change. 4 Press Change to change the values of the following: Font , Alignment , Indents , Tabs , Line spacing , Borders , Bullets , and Outline le vel . 5 Press Done to confirm the changes. Style option Font Po i n t size Bold Italics Under lined Justifi cati on Normal URW Sans 12 pt Off Off Off Left Header URW Sans 1 0 pt Off Off Off Left Footer URW Sans 1 0 pt Off Off Off Left Heading 1 URW Sans 16 pt On Off Off Left Heading 2 URW Sans 14 pt On Off Off Left Heading 3 URW Sans 12 pt On Off Off Left Title URW Sans 18 pt On Off Off Centred
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 194 Office Templates Example : You may have a company template which shows the company name and defines a particular layout. You can use templates and save documents as templates when creating and editing documents. To select a template, press the Menu key and select File > Templates > Select template ⦠. A list of available templates opens. Select a template and press OK . To save a document as a template, press t he Menu key and select File > Templates > Save as template ⦠. To delete a template, go to File manager. See page 206. To insert an object Tip: To resize an image after insertion, press the Menu key and select Edit > Object > Object d etails ⦠. 1 Press Insert object in the document you are creating or editing. A dialog opens. See Figure 77. Figure 77 2 Select from the list the type of object you want to insert. 3 Press Insert new to open the corresponding editor. Press Insert existing to open a list of files. Only files which you can insert are listed.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 195 Office Note: Objects in a document are not links but embedded attachments, which may increase the file size of the document dramatically. To hide or make visible text markers To hide or make visible markers that are used in editing within the document, proceed as follows. 1 Press the Menu key and first select Tools > Preferences ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 2 Set the following options on or off: Basic options page : Show tabs , Show spaces , and Show p aragraph marks , Advanced options page : Show forced lin e breaks , Show non-breaking spaces , and Show hard hyphens . To view the outline of a document Tip: To open a specific page in the document, press the Menu key and select Tools > Go to ⦠. 1 Press the Menu key and select View > Outline ⦠. A tree structure of the document opens. 2 To show more details, press Expa nd . To show less details, press Collapse . To open a selected point in the document, press Go to . 3 Press Close to return to the doc ument v iew. To paginate After creating a new document, you can divide it into pages. Press the Menu key and select Tools > More > Paginat e . This command will also update the page numbering.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 196 Office Sheet In Sheet you can work and store your data in a file that is called a workbook. Each workbook contains at least one worksheet. A workbook can also contain chartsheets; a chartsheet is a spreadsheet file containi ng a chart that is based on data from a worksheet. You can open, edit and save documents created with M icrosoft Excel for Windows versions 95, 97 and 20 00. Note that not all fea tures and formatting of the origi nal files will be supported. Files made with other versions of Microsoft Excel may only be viewed. For information on other file format conversions, see the PC Suite guide on the CD-ROM. Workbooks Tip: To add a workbook to the Desk application, press the Menu key and sele ct File > Add to Desk . To create a new workbook, press the Menu key and select File > New workbook . To open an existing workbook, press the Menu key and select File > Open . To save a workbook, press the Menu key in the worksheet view and select File > Save . To send a workbook as mail or via infrared, press the Menu key in the worksheet view and select File > Send . Worksheets To create a new worksheet in a workbook, press the Menu key and select Insert > New worksheet .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 197 Office To enter data To enter data, select a cell with the Arrows key and start typing the data i n the selected cell. To confirm what you have entered into a cell, press Enter, OK , or go to another cell with the Arrows key. To dismiss the action, press Esc or Cancel . You can also enter a formula to perform operations on worksheet data. Sheet application provides some predefined, or built-in, formulas, which are known as functions. To insert a function, press Insert function . A dialog opens. See Figure 78. The function categories you can choose from are as follows: All , Financial , Date and time , Mathematical , Stati stical , Lookup , Te xt , Logical , and Information . Each category has a set of functions, which you ca n see from the list next to Function na me . Select the function you want and press Close . Figure 78
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 198 Office Example: You might want to sum up figures in cells C2 to C4 in cell C5; select cell C5, press Point reference and select the cell range from C2 to C4. Press Enter or OK to confirm the action. The SUM will now appear in C5. In a formula, you can enter constant values or cell references. A cell reference tells Sheet where to look for the values or data you want to use in the formula. To enter a reference to a cell or cells in a formula: 1 Go to the cell you want to edit, and press Edit. 2 Move the cursor to the place where you want to insert a reference, and press Point reference . 3 Select the cells that cont ain the values you want to use. See â To select cellsâ on page 135. The focus remains in the cell you are editing. Press Enter or OK to confirm the action. Figure 79 To select cells There are two ways to select a cell or a range of cells in a worksheet: Example: To select column A, enter A:A. To select row 1, enter 1:1. To select columns B and C as well as rows 2 and 3, enter B2:C3 ⢠Press the Menu key and select Edit > Select . Then enter the selection range or choose a range from the list. ⢠Press and hold the Shift key, and increase the selection frame with the Arrows key. To select entire rows or columns, press and hold the Shift key, and select the desired row or column headings with the Arrows key.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 199 Office To select the entire workshee t, use the shortcut Ctrl A. The selection is cleared when you press the Arrows key or Tab key. To insert cells 1 Select a number of cell(s) that you want to insert into the worksheet. 2 Press the Menu key and select Insert > Cells . A dialog opens. 3 Define whether you want the inserted cell or cells to a ppear above ( Shift cells down ) or left ( Shift cells right ) of the selected range. To insert an entire row(s) or column(s), select either E ntire row or Entire column . 4 Press OK to accept the inserti on and Cancel to dismiss it . To sort cells You can rearrange the order of cells from top to bottom and left to right. 1 Select the range. 2 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Sort . 3 Select either Top to bottom or Left to right . A dialog opens. 4 Define the sorting criteria. 5 Press Close to do the sorting. To search for data 1 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Find . A dialog opens. 2 In the Find: field, enter the string you want to search for.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 200 Office Tip: Pressing Options opens up the following options: Search in values , Search in formulae , Match case , Find entire cells onl y , Direction , and Search by . 3 Press Find to search for the string. Press Options to search the worksheet according to certain criteria. Press Replace to replace the string with something else. To clear cells 1 Choose the cell or cells you want to clear. 2 Press Clear . A lists of choices appears. 3 To clear both the contents and formats of the cell or cells, select All . To clear only the contents of the cell or cells, select Contents . To clear only the formats of the cell or cells, se lect Formats . To adjust column width or row height 1 Select the column(s), or row(s). 2 Press the Menu key and select Format > Column width ⦠or Row height⦠. 3 To increase column width, press > on the Arrows key as many times as necessary. To diminish column width, press <. To increase row height, press ⨠on the Arrows key as many times as is necessary. To diminish row height, press â§ . To adjust the width or height by exact figures, press Define width . Figure 80
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 201 Office To align cell contents 1 Select the cell or ce lls. 2 Press the Menu key and select Format > Alignment . A dialog opens. 3 Define the following options: Horizonta l , Vertical , and Wrap text to cell . To change the ap pearance of cell borders 1 Select the cell or ce lls. 2 Press the Menu key and select Format > Cell appea rance > Borders . A dialog opens. 3 Define the following options: Outline , Top , Bott om , Left , Right , and Line colour . To change nu mber format 1 Select the cell or ce lls. 2 Press the Menu key and select Format > Numbers . A dialog ope ns. 3 Choose the required format from the list. Depending on the format you choose, you may define the place of the decimal. To change fonts 1 Select the cell or ce lls. 2 Press the Menu key and select Format > Font . A dialog opens. 3 Press Change to change the value of a list item. 4 To see the effect of the changes you have made, press Preview . 5 Press Done to save the changes you have made. To change bac kground co lour 1 Select the cell or ce lls.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 202 Office 2 Press the Menu key and select Forma t > Cell appearance > Background colour . A dialog opens. 3 Choose the colour. To insert page break s 1 Press the Menu key and select Insert > Page break . A dialog opens. 2 Define the following options: Break at column and Break a t row . Note: Since the break is placed above and on the le ft side of the selected cell, you cannot insert a page break when the cell A1 is selected. To name cells Tip: To change viewer preferences, press the Menu key and select Tools > Settings . Set the following options on or off: Show gridlines , Show row headers , Show column headers , Automatic recalc ulation , Show zero values , and Show pagination lines . 1 Select the cell or cells. 2 Press the Menu key and select Insert > Name > Add . If the cell or cells already have a name, you can edit the name by selecting Edit . A dialog opens. 3 Enter the name. To name worksheets 1 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Rename worksheet . A dialog opens. 2 Choose the worksheet from the list and name it. To delete cells, columns, rows, page break s, and worksh eets 1 Select a cell with in the area you wa nt to delete. 2 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Delete . A dialog opens. 3 Choose from the list what you want to delete.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 203 Office To go to any sheet or chart within the sa me workbook Tip: T o v i e w s h e e t s i n t h e Chartsheet view, press Sheets/ Charts . 1 Press the Menu key and select View > Worksheets or Sheets/Charts . A list opens. 2 Choose a sheet or chart and press OK to open the sheet and Cancel to dismiss it. Note: You cannot change the order of the sheets. Chartsheets To create chartsheets There can be seven different kinds of charts: Line , Column , Stacked column , Bar , Stacked bar , X/Y scatter , and Pie . 1 Select a range of cells on a works heet. These will provide the data for your new chartsheet. 2 Press the Menu key and select Insert > New chart . A dialog opens. 3 Define the following: Chart na me , Char t type , 3-D , Background co lour , and Axis colour . 4 Press Close to create a new chartsheet and Esc to dismiss it. To edit chartsheets Tip: You can also press the Tab key and Enter to select objects. Press Esc to cancel the selection. 1 Press Select object . A dialog opens. 2 Choose an object from the following list for editing and press OK : Chart , Chart title , X-axis ,Y-axis , X-axis title , Y-axis title , Legend , Major X-axis gridlines , Minor X- axis gridli nes , Major Y-axis gridlines , Minor Y-axi s gridlines , and Series . The setting dialog for the selected object opens. See Figure 81 for an example of X-axis settings being edited. 3 To edit the object, press Change or press Enter. A dialog opens.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 204 Office To delete the object, press Delete . 4 Define the new values. Figure 81 5 Press Close to confirm the change s or Esc to dismiss them. Note: You can select only one object at a time. To replace char tsheet data Tip: To define the general appearance of a chart, press Chart settings . Define the page style and name in the two pages of the dialog which opens. You can replace the data on which your chartsheet is based. 1 Press Sheets/ Charts and select the worksheet your chart is based on. 2 Select a new data area for the chart from the worksheet, press the Menu key, and select View > Sheets/Charts to return to the chartsheet. 3 Press the Menu key, select Tools > Replace data , and press OK to confirm the changes or Cancel to di smiss them. Presentation viewer You can use Presentation viewer to vi ew presentations. You can also send and receive these presentations as mail or via infrared.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 205 Office You can view documents created with Microsoft PowerPoint for W indows versions 95,97 and 2000. Note th at not all features a nd formatting of the original documents will be supported. To view a presentat ion Press Open in the Presentation main view to select and view a document. To close the application, press Close . Tip: You can zoom in and out to get a better view of the presentation. When a document is opened, the top of the first slide is shown. To view the next slide, press Next or Enter. To view the previous slide, press Previous . To scroll the current slide, use the Arrows key. The outline view To get an overview of the whole presentation, press Outline view . This opens up a view where the text content of th e presentation is in a list format. See Figure 82. Figure 82 To view only title text s, press Titles only . To return to the standard sl ide show, press Slide view .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 206 Office To search for and view a slide 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Go to slide ⦠. A list of th e slides in t he presentation opens. 2 Go to the slide you want by using the Arrows key. 3 Press Go to open the slide. To view the presenter â s notes To view the presenter â s notes along with the slides, press the Menu key and select View > Notes view . File manager Tip: Use File manager together with a memory card to remove files and folders from the communicator memory and thus free memory. See â To back up and restore data to and from a memory card â on page 211. You can use File manager to manage the contents and properties of various folders. The main view has two frames: a folder t ree on th e left and a file list on the right. Figure 83 You can toggle between the frames with the Tab key.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 207 Office The folder view The folder tree can contain folders from two roots, the communicator and a memory card. Tip: Avoid saving files to the root of the communicator; use folders instead. Under the communicator root there is C:\Docume nts\ folder that contains four default folders: \Documents\Downloaded\ , \Documents\Photo gallery\ , \Documents\Templates\ , an d \Documents\Tones\ . To show or hide subfolders in the folder list frame, press < and > on the Arrows key. The - and signs in front of the folder icons indicate whether the subfolders are shown or hidden. Folders without either sign have no subfolders, and you can use the Arrows key to switch between the folder view and files view. Note: Multi-selecti on is not possible in the folder l ist frame. The files view Tip: To change the sorting order or the value by which the files are sorted (name, date and time, type, and size), press t he Menu key and select View > Sort by or Sorting order . The file list on th e right shows all the files in the source or folder currently se lected in the left frame. The title of the file list frame shows the path of the currently selected file. The file list frame also shows the application-related icon, name, and the last modification date of the file. The files are sorted in alphabetical order by default. Note: Hidden files are shown only if you press the Menu key and select View > Show all files . To view the contents of a folder 1 Choose a folder in the left folder tree frame and press Op en .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 208 Office A view of all the subfolders and files of the parent folder opens. See Figure 84. Figure 84 2 To view any possible subfolder, select it and press Open . 3 To view parent folders, press Esc. 4 Press Close folde r to return to the main view. The title of the folde r content view shows the path n ame and the number of files and subfolders in the folder, together with the total size of all the files in the folder. This view shows the name, last modification date and time, and the size of a particular file. The icon in front of the name indicates the type of file or subfolder. To open a file 1 Select a file and press Open . The file will then be opened in the corresponding application. 2 To return to the main view, press Close folder . Note: You can open only one file at a time.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 209 Office To move files and folders Tip: For multi-selection, see â To select several items at once â on page 26. 1 Select folders or files that you want to move and press Mo ve in the main view of File manager. A list of folders opens, as shown in Figure 85. Figure 85 2 Search for a target folder with the Arrows key. To hide or show the subfolders of a folder, press Collapse and Expand respectively. You can also navigate in the folder list with the Arrows key and / - keys. To create a new target folder, press New folder . 3 Press OK to confirm the move and Cancel to dismiss it. To create new folders 1 In the main view of File manager select the folder in which you want create a new folder 2 Select File > New folder . 3 Name the new folder. 4 To confirm the changes, press OK . To dismiss the changes, press Cancel .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 210 Office To rename files and folders 1 Select the file or folder in the main view of File manager. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Rename . The cursor now appears at the beginning of the selected file or folder name. 3 Rename the file or folder. 4 To confirm the changes, press OK . To dismiss the cha nges, press Cancel . To view the properties of files, folders, and drives Tip: In the Properties dialog, you can also change a file into hidden or read- only state or a folder in to read-only state. 1 Select the file, folder, or drive in the main view of Fil e manager. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Properties ⦠. A dialog opens, as shown in Figure 86. Figure 86 To search for files and folders 1 Choose the folder or memory storage where you want the search to take place. 2 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Find ⦠. A dialog opens. 3 Enter in the field the string for which you want to search. 4 Press Options to define the search in more detail. See Figure 87.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 211 Office Tip: You can search according to time period, start and end time, and th e file type. Figure 87 Press Change to change the value of a list item. When ready, press Close . 5 Press Find to start the search. To interrupt the search, press Stop . 6 When the search is over, press Open to open the folder or file found. To start a new search, press New find . 7 To return to the main view, press Close . To back up and restore data to and from a memory card It is advisable to take backups of your communicator data regularly. IMPORTANT! Do NOT use this method to restore data you have backed up with Nokia 9210 Communicat or to Nokia 9210i C ommunicator. Use PC Su ite instead. Note: The Backup and Restore commands will copy all data. You cannot back up or restore an individual folder. The Backup and Restore commands are recursive; that is, they copy folders and all the contents with in the
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 212 Office folders. For information about selective backups, selective restoring, and using a PC to back up and restore, see the PC Suite guide on the sales package CD-ROM. To be able to back up to and restore from a memory card, the card should be inserted in the communicator. For details, see â To insert a memory card â on page 25. 1 Press the Menu key and sele ct Memory card > Backup t o memory card ⦠or Re store from memory card ⦠, depending on what you want to do. A dialog opens. 2 If you are making a backup, look for a backup folder on the memory card by pressing Change or type in the name of a new folder in the Backup folder field. If you are restoring data to your communicator, select the folder in the communicator into which you want to restore your data. Normally you should select the root folder. 3 Press Backup to back up all the communicator data to the memory card. Press Restore to restore all the backed-up memory card data to the communicator. 4 Restart the communicator by removing the battery and replacing it again. To lock a memory card You can protect a memory card with a passw ord to prevent unauthorised access. Note: Not all memory cards support password protection. 1 Press the Menu key and select Memory card > Security > Change password ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Type your password in the New password field and type it again in the Confirm password field. 3 Press OK . The new password is set.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 213 Office To remove password protection, press the Menu key and select Memory card > Security > Remove p assword ⦠. Type your password and press Remove . Note: Use a password that is easy for you to remember but difficult for others to guess. If you forget your password, the only way to use your me mory card again is to format the card. Formatting deletes all data from the card! To format a memory card press the Menu key, select Memory card > Format memory card ⦠, and press Format .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 215 Extras 11. Extras Extras contains the follow ing applications: Calcul ator, Clock, Control panel, Recorder, Imaging, Cell broadcast, Video player, and Fax modem. Most of the new applications that you install will be added to the Extras application group. For more information on applications availa ble on the sales package CD-ROM, see Software on CD-ROM Guide in the Using Nokia 9210i Communicator section of the CD-ROM. Figure 88 Tip: To install applications, see sect ion â Install/Removeâ on page 226. Clock The Clock shows the time and date in your home city and country or region, as well as in several other cities and countries in the world. The Clock also includes an alarm clock. To set the current date and time for your communicator, press the Menu key and select Tools > Date and time ⦠.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 216 Extras Tip: To choose the clock type, press the Menu key and select View > Clock type > Digital or Analogue . To set an alarm 1 Press Alarm clock in the main view. An alarm clock view opens. 2 The currently active alarms are listed next to the clock. 3 To create a new al arm, press New alarm or to edit an alarm, press Edit alarm . 4 Define the Time of the alarm and the frequency in Occurrence and Day fields. Define also the Description displayed when the alarm goes off. Tip: To turn off a sounding alarm, press Stop or any key on the keypad of the phone cover. Press Snooze to silence the alarm for five minutes. 5 Press Done to accept the set alarm. To change your home city If your home city and time settings on your communicator are not set correctly, you must first set your home city and then set the time , since your home location defines the time zone used. 1 Go to the World clock main view. Tip: The world map shows the currently selected city in cross hairs. 2 Press Change city . A cities view opens. See figure 89. Figure 89 3 Type the city in the search field or scroll the list and press Select when ready. 4 Press OK to accept the change of time zone or Cancel to dismiss it.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 217 Extras Note: For more detailed information about Clock, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help. Calculator There are two modes in Calculator: desk calculator for simple arithmetic operations and scientific calculator for more complicated mathematical calculations. There are two ways to perform calculation s, either by typing the characters in t he input field or selectin g symbols from the function map. A calculati on is executed by pressing Enter or =. The calculation and its result can be seen on the output sheet on the left. You cannot write in the output sheet, but selection is possible. Figure 90 To move between the input field, output sheet, and function map, press the Tab key. The input field is never empty in the desktop calculator: it contains either t he result of the previous calculation or a zero (0) if you have pressed backspace.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 218 Extras Note: For more detailed information about Ca lculator, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help. Control panel In the Control panel you can view or modify the following: Securit y , Data call barring , Data call barring , Profiles, Data call barring , Certificate manager , Date and time , Install/Remove software , Interne t access, Back up/Restore , About product , Memory, Regional settings , and Default folder Modifying these features affects the operation of your communicator across all the applications . Figure 91 To open a program for editing, select it with the Arrows key and press Select . Security Here you can define the phone security level of your communicator.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 219 Extras IMPORTANT: The default lock code is 12345 . For security reasons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from the communicator. Note that no passcode system can guarantee absolute prevention of unauthorised access. The codes are shown as asterisks. If you are changing a code, you will be prompted for the current code and then the new code twice. PIN code request : If you set the PIN code request On , the communicator requests that you enter the code e very time you turn on the phone. If you enter th e PIN code incorrectly three times in succ ession, you will need a PUK code to unblock the SIM card. When the SIM card is blocked, you cannot send or receive any documents or calls except calls to preprogrammed emergency numbers. Otherwise, the communicator can be used normally. You need the PIN code to change this setting. Note: This setting cannot be changed, if the phone is switched off or if there is no valid SIM card inserted. Note: Some SIM cards do not allow you to turn the PIN code request off. Autolock period : Determines the security time-out period, after which the communicator will lock. The options are None / 2 mi nutes / 5 minutes / 10 minutes . The last optio n allows you to define the number of minutes yourself. When the communicator is locked, you can ma ke emergency calls to predefined nu mbers using the cover phone. You can also answe r incoming calls and make emergency calls using the Telephone application. All other actions are blocked. The t imer is reset by any input, data transfer, printing, and so on. You need the lock code to change this setting.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 220 Extras Lock if SIM card is cha nged : If set On , every time the phone is switched on this security option checks whether the SIM card in the communicator has been changed. If the SIM card has been changed and the new SIM card has not been used with your communicator previously, the communicator locks itself until the lock code is correctly entered. The communicator recognises five different SIM cards as the owner â s cards. You need the lock code to change this setting. Tip: Changing the PIN code requires that PIN code request is selected, the phone is on, and that there is a valid SIM card inserted. PIN code : This setting allows you to change the PIN code. The new PIN code must be from 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 code : This setting allows you to change the PIN2 code. The PIN2 code is required to access some functions, such as the call cost settings, which must be supported by your SIM card. If you enter an incorrect PIN2 code three times in succession, you will need a PUK2 code to unblock the PIN2 code. The new PIN2 code must be from 4 to 8 digits long. Lock code : This setting allows you to change the lock code. The default lock code is 12345 . The new lock code must be from 5 to 10 digits long. If you enter an incorrect lock code five times in succession, the phone will be locked for five minutes after which you can try a gain. If you try again within less than five minutes, you have to wait five minutes more before a code ca n be accepted. Tip: Changing the barring password requires that the phone is on and the Call barring service is activated for your SIM card. Barring password : This setting allows you to change the barring password. If you enter an incorrect password three times in succession, the password is blocked and you must ask the network service provider for a new password. Note: Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 221 Extras Note: When the communicator is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programmed into your phone (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Data call barring Tip: Use data call barring to limit the use of the phone, if you lend it to someone temporarily. Here you can prevent or allow the following data call types: Note: You need a barring password to modify these settings. Outgoing ca lls : When activated, prohibits making data calls. Incoming calls : When activated, prohibits receiving data calls. Internat ional c alls : When activated, prohibits making international calls. Tip: To check the current status of a barring option, select the option and press Check status . Incoming calls when abroa d : When activated, prohibits receiving calls when abroad. International except to home country : When activated, prohibits making international call s to all countries except to th e country that has been defined as the home country. Note: Calls described here as international may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. Accessories Here you can define some of t he settings when you use t he Nokia 9210i Communicator with Advanced HF Car Kit CARK109 or Headset HDC-8L. For further information on accessories for the Nokia 9210i Communicator, see the accessories section of the Getting started guide. Define the accessories options as follows: 1 Double-click the Accessories icon in the Control Panel. A dialog opens
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 222 Extras 2 Select the accessory options that you want to modify. The options are Headset / Car kit . Press Edit . 3 Define the following: Car kit settings Automa tic answ er : Allows you to define whether the automatic answering is on or off when your communicator is attached to the car kit. Default profile : Allows you to choose the profile that will be automatically select ed, when you attach your communicator to the car kit. Headset settings Cover display lig hts : Allows you to define whether the cover display light s are always on or not when the headset is attached to your communicator. Automa tic answ er : Allows you to define whether the automatic answering is on or off when the headset is attached to your communicator. Default profile : Allows you to choose the profile that will be automatically select ed, when the headset is attached to your communicator. Profiles Here you can edit profiles. Profiles define the tones and sound level of your communicator in different operating environments. For details on profiles, see â Profile settings â on page 78. Display Here you define the appearance of the display.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 223 Extras Contrast an d brightne ss page Figure 92 Press and - to adjust the bar you are editing. Contrast level : Pressing increases and - decreases the contrast of the display. Brightness : The brightness level of the display. There are five levels to choose from. Brightness period : A time period after which, if there has not been any key presses within that time, t he brightness will go down to its lowe st level. The level will rise to the level defined in Brightne ss as soon as any key is pressed again. The options are 15 sec / 30 sec/ 45 sec/ 1 min/ 2 min. Tip: Selecting a low brightness level and a short time period for the last two options saves the battery and increases the operation time of the communicator. Screen saver : A time period after which the display will blank out if the device remains inactive. T he options are 2 min / 4 min/ 6 min / 8 min/ 10 min. Colour page Colour palette : The display colour scheme. Th e options are Blue / Red / Green /Grey . Background patter n : The background image of the command button area. The options are Plain / Wheels / Sand /Water / Leaves .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 224 Extras Certificate manager With Certificate manager you can ma nage digital certifica tes which you use when connecting to WWW sites, WAP services, mail servers, and when installing software. You need these certificates when you: ⢠want to connect to an online bank or some other site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confiden tial information , ⢠want to minimise the risk of viruses or other malicous software and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing it. Note however, that even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considera bly smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; Certificat e manager must contain correct, authentic, and trusted certificates for increased security to be available. To open the main view of Certificate manager, press the Extras application button, select Control panel , and select Certificate manager . The main view lists the currently available certificates and their validity information. Note: Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If a certificate is marked Expired even if it should be Valid , check that the date and time in your communicator are correct. To define the usage of the certificate 1 Select the certificate and press View details . A dialog with certificate details opens.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 225 Extras 2 Press Trust settings . A dialog opens. 3 If you want this certificate to be able to certify WWW sites and mail servers, select Web browser and Mail , press Change , and select Yes 4 If you want this certificate to be able to certify the origin of a new software, select Software inst allation , press Change , and select Yes . Note: Before changing these settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificat e and that the certi ficate really belo ngs to the listed owner. To check that a certificate is a uthentic Certificates are used to verify the origin of WWW pages and installed software. However, they can only be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic. If you are adding a new certificate, or want to check the authenticity of an existing certificate, proceed as foll ows: 1 Select the certificate a nd press View details . A view of certificate details opens. 2 The Subject : field identifies the owner of this certificate. Make sure that this is the name of the party to whom you think that this certificate belongs. 3 Scroll the dialog until you see the Fingerprint: field. 4 The Fingerprint: field uniquely iden tifies the certifi cate. Contact the help desk or customer service of th e owner of the certifi cate (see step 2 above) and ask for the MD5 fingerprint of the certificate. Compare the fingerprint wi th the one shown in the dialog. If they match, th e certificate is auth entic. Note: Use this authentic ation procedure each time you add a new ce rtificate. To add or delete certificates To add a new certificate, press Add . A dialog opens in which you can search a nd select the new certificate.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 226 Extras To delete a certifi cate, select it and press Delete . Date and time Here you define the current time and date for your communicator. Time : The current time. Date : The current date. Daylight-saving : Determines how the time of your communicator is affected by changes in daylight saving time. The options are On / Off / Define summer . If Define summer is selected, you have to ent er the dates Summer starts and Summer ends . Install/Remove With Install/Remove you can install new software or remove installed applications from your communicator. When you open the Install/ Remove a pplication, th e Installed software page lists all of the software packages that have been installed, with their name, version number, type, and size. Press Certificate In fo to display the certi ficate details of an installed software package that has a digital signature and a certificate. To install software The types of applications which you can install are those that are specifically intended for the Nokia 9210/9210i Commun icator or suitable for t he Symbian operating system on Crystal style devices, and Java applications.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 227 Extras Note: If you install software that is not intended specifically for the Nokia 9210/9210i Communicator, i ts usage can differ significan tly from the usual Nokia 9210/ 9210i Communicator appli cations. You can download or transfer a software package containing the files of the application into the communicator. Then you can install the application. Software can also be installed from a memory card. A software package is usually one large compressed file containing many component files. Tip: You can also start the installation by browsing for the installation package in communicator memory or memory card with File manager, selecting it, a nd pressing the Enter key. IMPORTANT: When downloading or transferring software packages into the communicator, use only packages whose file names end â .sisâ . An example of a suitabl e file name is â MediaPla yer.sis â . To start the installation, press Install new on the Installed software page. Browse for the software package you want to install, and press OK . The installation process begins. Note: Only install software from sources that offer adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. To help you, the software installation system on the Nokia 9210i Communicator uses digital signatures and certificates on software packages. See page 224. If you are installing software without a digital signature or a certificate, the communicator warns you of the risks of installing software, as shown in figure 93.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 228 Extras Tip: If you have installed PC Suite for Nokia 9210i Communicator on your PC and the communicator is connected to y our PC, you can also install software by double-clicking a file ending with .sis stored on your PC. Figure 93 If you see this warnin g message, only continue in stallation if you are absolutely sure of the origin and contents of the software package. The installation procedure also checks the integrity of the package to be installed. Once these checks are complete, the application is installed on your communicator. During the installation process, you are shown information about the checks being carried out on the package. You are also given options whether to continue with or cancel th e installation. To remove software 1 To remove an installed software package from your communicator, select the software package you want to remove from the Installed software page and press Remove . 2 A dialog appears asking for your confirmation. Press OK to remov e the software. Note: Some software packages update existing software and cannot be removed. IMPORTANT: If you remove software, you can only re-install it by having the original software package file, or by restoring a full back-up that contains the removed software package. If you remove a software
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 229 Extras package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that software. If an another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Installation log To view the list of software installations and removals that have taken place, press the Menu key and go to the Install log page. This list shows what software has been installed and removed, and when that happened. If you encounter problems with the device after installing a software package, you can use this list to find out which software package may be the cause of the problem. The information on this list may also help to pinpoint problems that are caused by software packages that are incompatible with each other. Installation settings On the Preferences page, you can select options related to software installation. You can de fine the followi ng: Delete installation file after use - If set to Yes , the software package installation file (that ends in .sis ) will be deleted from the device after installation. If you download software packages using the WWW browser, this may be helpful in reducing the amount of required storage space. Note: If you want to store the software package file for possible re-installation later on, either set th is to No or make sure that you have a copy of the software package file stored on your PC or on a CD-ROM.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 230 Extras Default instal lation language - You can set the default installati on language to the language that your Nokia 9210i Communicator has. If the software package contains several different language versions of the software, the language version specified here will be in stalled. Sort installed software by - To sort the list of installed software packages, select one of the options Name , Type , or Size . Internet access Here you are able to edit, create new, and delete existing Inte rnet access points. For details on how this is done, see the Internet section of the Settings checklist delivered in your sales package. For details on IAPs, see â To set up your Interne t access point â on page 132. About this product Here you can scroll to see copyright information on the Nokia 9210i Communicator. Memory Here you can view the amount of free memory for storing data and installing new software. You can scroll and view the memory consumption of the following details: Doc uments , Spreadsheets , Sound s , Faxe s , Mails , Short messages , Calendar data , Contacts , Imag es , Installed applications , and Other file types .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 231 Extras If a memory card is inserted in the communicator, press Memory car d to view the amount of available memory on the card. Press Device to return to view the communicator memory. If the memory is getting low, you should remove some documents. Before removing, you can print, fax, or mail them, or transfer them to a PC or a memory card. Regional settings On these four pages you can define the local time, date, numbering, and currency expressions. Note: For more detailed information about Regional settings, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help. Default folder With the Default folder , you can define the fol der which acts as a default savin g folder whenever you wish t o save a document in your communicator memory. For details on how to manage your files and folders, see â File manager â on page 206. Recorder Tip: When you have recorded sounds and speech, you can set them as ringing tones. See page 99. The Recorder allows you to record telephone conversations and voice memos. You can also listen to your recordings and other sound files. The maximum length of a recording depends on the available memory.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 232 Extras You can open files that have been stored in the following file formats: .WAV, .AU, and compressed GSM encoded file format. Compression is done implicitly during the recording process. Recorder contains all the controls like Play , Stop , Pause , and Record that are typically found in recording equipment. Press Resume to continue after recording or playback has been paused. Figure 94 You can change the volume level of the Recorder application by pressing the â§ and ⨠keys on the Arrows key. You can also edit sound files by using the commands in the Edit menu. Note: Obey all local laws governing recording of calls. Do not use this feature illegall y. Note: For more detailed information about Voice recorder, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 233 Extras Imaging The Imaging application acts as a file manager for images. Application folders created for storing images are called albums. Images appear as thumbnail images in albums. A thu mbnail image is a small image representing the original full size image. Imaging supports a wide range of image formats, among them JPEG, GIF, BMP, MBM, and WBMP. Note: This application does not support all image file formats or all variations of an image file format. Tip: Additional file viewers for different file formats are available on the sales package CD-ROM. For more information, see â File viewer â on page 12 of the Software on CD-ROM guide. You can open many commonly used image files directly for viewing. Press Zoom in to enlarge the image, Z oom out to reduce the image on the display, and Rotate to rotate the image. To view image properties, press the Menu key and select File > Properties ⦠You can use the Imaging application to view images and manage image albums. You can delete, rename, copy, and move images from one album to another and create your own favourite albums. Tip: If you have images or albums in the \Documents\ Photo gallery\ directory on an inserted memory card, they also will appear in this view. Figure 95
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 234 Extras Note: Albums can contain only images, not other albums. You can also receive images via IR. For details, see â To receive images via infrared â on page 236. To create a new album 1 Press the Menu key and select File > New album ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Define the following: Name : Name of the album. 3 To save the album in the communicator, press Create locally . To save the album in a memory card, press Create in mem. card . To view album contents Tip: To open an image located outside the image albums, select File > Open from ⦠. 1 Select the album in the Imaging main view a nd press Open . A thu mbnail view of the album contents opens. 2 You can scroll the contents of the album with the Arrows key. To open an image for viewing, press Open . 3 To view the next frame in the image, if available, press t he Menu key and selec t View > Next frame . To return to the previ ous image, select Previous frame . 4 Press Close to return to the thum bnail vi ew. To move images to and from albums 1 Select the image or images in the thumbn ail view with the Arrows key.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 235 Extras Tip: You can select several images with the Space key. You can also use the Edit menu commands and the corresponding shortcuts (Ctrl c, Ctrl x, Ctrl v) to move or copy images. 2 Press the Menu key and first select Edit > Copy or Cut . 3 Open the target album. 4 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Paste . 5 If the target album already has an image or images with the same na me, a confirmation note appea rs asking you i f you wish to replace the existin g image. Choose from the following options: Replace - Th e existing image is replaced with the image you are pasting. Replace all - All existing images are replaced with the same n ame. Skip - Skips the image and continues the operation. Cancel - Cancels the whole paste operation. Tip: To rename albums or images, sele ct File > Rename ⦠., define a name, and press OK. The file extension cannot be changed. To create new images from originals You can choose parts of an opened image, save them as separate images, and reuse them. 1 Open an image. Press the Menu key and select Edit > Select image rang e . The selection frame is now visible on the image. 2 To move the selection frame, use the Arrows key. To change the size of the selection frame, press down the Ctrl key and use the Arrows key. 3 To save the frame as an image, press the Menu key and select File > Save as ⦠. Select Selected r ange . 4 Select the folder you wish to save in, give a name for the new image file, and press OK . To resize images 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Resize ⦠. A dialog opens.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 236 Extras 2 Scroll with the Arrows key to select the new size and press Select or press Best fit to fit the imag e horizon tally to the sc reen. To receive images via infrared Tip: Large i mages transferred from a digital camera may take too much internal memory to be viewed. To scale the siz e of the transferred images down to 640x480 pixels, press the Menu key and select Tools > Use VGA , if the option is not already selected. Note that all cameras may not support this function. 1 Open the album where you want to save the received file. 2 Press Images via infrared . A dialog opens. 3 Select one of the following: Receive in albu m : To receive the image and save it. Receive and mail : To receive the image and send it as an e-mail message. Receive and fax : To receive the image and send it as a fax. 4 Press OK . RealOne Player RealOne Player lets you play audio and video files of the RealAudio and RealVideo formats on your Nokia 9210i Communicator. You can download these files to your Communicator from a compatible PC for playback, or you can play files over the wireless network by streaming them to your Communicator. Note: Streaming is a network dependent feature that requires a HSCSD (High Circuit Switch Data) ne twork. The main view of RealOne Player is shown in figure 96.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 237 Extras Figure 96 For more information and instructions on how to use RealOne Player, refer to the user â s guide of RealOne Player on the CD ROM in the sales package. Cell broadcast Tip: Check with your network service provider to see whether CBS is available. Cell Broadcast is an application which you use with the Cell Broadcast Service (CBS) to view the messages and to subscribe to topics of interest. In areas where CBS is provided, you can receive short messages on various topics such as taxis, weather, service provider services, and directory enquiries. Figure 97 To start or stop receiving CBS messages, in the main view of Cell broadcast, press Reception on or Reception off .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 238 Extras Tip: You can search for different topics. Enter a name of a topic in the search field. Press Read to read messages and pres s Next or use th e commands in the View menu to browse for more messages. To subscribe, scroll to a topic and press Subscribe . A check mark is displayed in the box on the left-hand end of the topic. To unsubscribe, press Unsubscribe . To add, edit, or remove topics when the reception is off, press the Menu key and select > Topic > Add topic / Edit topic / Delete topic(s) . Tip: You can quickly mark a topic as a hot topic by first selecting the topic and then pressing Ctrl M. If you want to be notified with a dialog displaying a message on a particular topic when a new topic message is received, press the Menu ke y and select Topic > Mark as hot topic . The hot topic is marke d with an exclamation mark â !â . To create or rename topic lists To create a new list, press the Menu key and select List > New blank list ⦠or New list with selected topics ⦠Tip: You can sort the topics by pressing the Menu key and selecting a sorting command in the View menu. To change the name of the list that is open, press the Menu key and select List > Rename list ⦠Note that the reception must be turned off. To open topic lists To open a different list, press the Menu key and select List > Select topic list . In different topic lists, you can still subscribe and unsubscribe topics and set them as hot topics.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 239 Extras To detect new topics To add new topics automatically, press the Menu key and select Tool s > Settings ⦠. Define the following: Tip: Create a new empty topic list and select the Yes and All options in t he settings to receive a complete list of topics available in that area. Add new topics to list - The options are Yes / No . If you select Yes , all new topics are added automatically to your current list of topics. If you select No , you will receive only the messages concerning subscribed or hot topics that you already ha ve in your topic list. Languag e - Select the language of the topics you want to receive. Select All to receive topic messages in a ll languages. Note: You will receive on ly the messages that are in the language you h ave chosen. To make sure you receive all messages, select All . Fax modem You can use the communicator as a fax modem with a compatible PC. Your communicator can be connected to a PC via serial cable or by using an infrared connection. Before your PC can recognise the communicator as a fax modem, you need to install a new modem configuration for your PC. Please refer to your operating system manual for more information. During the installation you may be asked to enter the path to the modem information file. The path on the sales package CD- ROM is: \ Software for PC \ Printer and Modem drivers. Advanced users ca n also find a list of supported AT commands from this path. Normally there is no need to use these commands.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 240 Extras Note: Using the communicator as a fax modem requires that data calls are supported by the network operator and that this service is active in your SIM card. To install fax modem driver using cable connection 1 Start Windows. 2 Insert the Nokia 9210i CD-ROM into th e CD-ROM drive of the computer and locate the modem information file (mdmn9210i.INF). Alternatively, you can find the file on the www.forum.nokia.com Web site. 3 Double-click the Modems icon in the Windows Control Panel. A dialog opens. If no modem drivers have been installed on the computer before, continue from step 6. 4 Click the Add button. 5 In the field What type of modem do you want to inst all? select Other . Click Next 6 Select the option Don â t detect my modem; I will sele ct it from a lis t 7 Click Have disk... 8 Click Browse and locate the CD-ROM drive wit h the Nokia 9210i CD-RO M. 9 On the CD-ROM, locate a folder Software for PC/Modem driver s 10 In the Modem drivers folder, select Mdmn9210i.inf file and click Open or OK . Tip: To use High Speed connection, your GSM operator must activate High Speed Data Services on your SIM card. 11 In the Install from disk dialog, Click OK . 12 In the Install New Modem dialog, select Nokia 9210 Communicator (Cable) . If you are using High Speed connection (HSCSD), select a speed higher than 9600 bps and cable connection. Click Next . 13 Select the COM port where the serial cable is connected. Click Next . 14 Click Finish .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 241 Extras 15 Remove the CD-ROM from the drive. 16 In your communicator, press the Extras application button, select Fax modem , and press Open . 17 In the Fax modem application, press Settings 18 On the Connection page of the Fax modem settings, define the following: Connection type : Cable Transfer rate : 19200 or higher. Make sure that this setting is the same both in your communicator and your PC. Data bits : 8 Stop bits : 1 Flow control : Sof tware Press Done . Note: Transfer rate is the speed with wh ich the data is transferre d between your communicator and PC. The best transfer rate for normal GSM calls is 19200 or higher. For high speed calls, you should select 115200. Select the same rat e in your PC application as well. 19 Your communicator is now ready to be used as a fax modem. Press Activate to activate the Fax modem. Fax modem settings To open Fax modem, press the Extr as application button, sele ct Fax modem , and press Open Note that an active PC connection using the fax modem is disconnected after 20 minutes if no data is sent or received. However, an active call is not automatically disconnected.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 242 Extras Note: You cannot change fax modem settings if the fax modem is activated. To change these settings, make sure that fax modem is not active. Open Fax modem and press Settings . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following: Connection page Connection type : Press Change to change this option. The options are Infrared and Cable . If you select Infrared , the rest of the options are automatically set. If you select Cable , define also the following: Transfer rate : The speed with which the data is transferred between your communicator and PC. The best transfer rate for normal GSM calls is 19200. For high speed calls, you should select 115200. Select the same rate in your PC applicat ion as well. Data bits : Defines how many bits are used to form a byte. The default option, 8 , can typically be used. Parity : A parity error-checking procedure. The default option, None , can typically be used. Stop bits : Defines number of stop bits used. The default option, 1 , can typically be used. Flow control : It is recommended to select Software . This setti ng needs to be the same in you PC as well.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 243 Extras Operating system page Windows 2000 : If you are not using Wi ndows 2000, select No and press Done . The rest of the options on the page are dimmed. If you are using Windows 2000, select Yes . Define also the following information about the connection. The information nee ded is provided by the host that you are about to call. If you do not have this information try to use the defaul t options. Connection type : The options are Normal / High speed . Normal is the default. Remote modem type : The options are Analog / ISDN V.110 / ISDN V.120 . Analog is the default. Max. connec tion speed : The default in an analog connection is Automatic . Note: This configurat ion needs to be redefined if you use a diffe rent kind of modem. If the connection settings are incorrect, the call is not created. To activate or disable the f ax modem In the Fax modem main view, press Activate or Disable .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 245 Troubleshooting 12. Troubleshooting If you have problems with your communicator, Club Nokia Careline answers questions and offers instructions over the phone. For more information on the Club Nokia Careline see the Accessories section of th e Getting Started Guide and Nokia Careline Web page. You can also visit Forum Nokia at www.forum.nokia.com for informa tion and support material related to the communicator. 1. Phone or communi cator interface does not start; both displays remain blank Make sure that the battery is properly installed and charged. Make sure that the contacts on the battery and the desktop stand are clean. The battery charge may be too low for operation. Check the display and listen for the low battery warning tones. Charge the battery as described on page 21. If the NOT CHARGING message is displayed, the charging is suspended. Temperature extremes will affect the ability of your battery to charge: allow it to cool down or warm up first. Wait for a while, disconnect the charger, connect it again and retry. If charging still fails, contact your local Nokia dealer. 2. Communicator inter face does not start; cover phone display is flashing The communicator memory is corrupted. Contact your local Nokia dealer. 3. The battery is attached, but the phone doe s not work Try to switch on the phone by pressing the key for several seconds.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 246 Troubleshooting Check that the flight mode is not active. For more information see â Flight profile â on page 91. Restart the communicator by removing the battery, wait ing thirty seconds, and replacing it again. Try charging the communicator. If you see the battery level indicator on the phone but the phone does not work, contact your local Nokia dealer. Check the signal strength indicator: you might be ou tside the network service area. Make sure that the telephone service is activated for your SIM card. Check if there is an error message on the display after switching on. If so, contact your local dealer. Check that the SIM card is correctly installed, see the Getting Started Guide. 4. Communicator interface is not activated or applications stop responding Close the cover and open it again. If this does not he lp, close the cover and remove the battery. Replace the bat tery and open the cover again. Wait while t he communicator performs a self-test and starts. Try charging the communicator. If the device does not respond even after several restarts (disconnect the charger, take battery out, wait for 30 seconds, and replace the battery), remove all temporary files as follows: 1 Disconnect the charger and remove the battery to restart the communicator. 2 Insert the battery and open the cover. 3 When you see the Nokia 9210i Communicator Welcome screen, immediately press and hold down the Ctrl Shift I keys. The I key should be pressed last.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 247 Troubleshooting 4 Temporary files are deleted. This empties the cache , removes cookies, resets plugin registrations and resets the settings you have made in some of the applications including all Internet and profile settings, Desk shortcuts and display settings. All other applications and files stay intact. If the procedures described above do not help, as a last resort before contacting your local dealer you can try formatting the interna l memory of the communicator. Note that formatting the memory removes all items except the standard applications that have been factory pre-installed in ROM memory! If you have made a full backup of the contents of your communicator with PC Suite, you can use PC Suite to format the memory before restoring the backed-up files to your communicator. For more information, see PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM. If you have made a backup to a memory card, see â To back up and restore data to and from a memory card â on page 211. When you format the internal memory, all the settings, documen ts and other data in the internal memory that you have created or modified will be permanently destroyed. To format the internal memory, proceed as follows: Tip: If you have to give away your Communicator, it is a good idea to format the device and restore the factory-installed software from the CD-ROM. This way the next user will be able to start with a fresh device. 1 Disconnect the charger and remove the battery to restart the communicator. 2 Insert the battery and open the cover. 3 When you see the Nokia 9210i Communicator Welcome screen, immediately press and hold down the Ctrl Shift F keys. The F key should be pressed last. 4 Formatting starts. It takes at least two minutes to comple te. 5 With Windows Explorer, locate the All_Nokia_9210_data.si s installation package in the Preinstalled i n device folder of the sales package CD-ROM and install it.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 248 Troubleshooting 5. Cannot make or receive calls Check to see if you have â Flightâ profile turned on. When this profile is active you cannot make or receive calls. Make sure that the phone is not off. Close the cover and switch on the phone. If you get the message INVALID SIM CARD, your SIM card cannot be used in the communicator. Contact you dealer or network service provider. Check the status of your call barrings and diverts, see âÂÂNetwork services settings â on page 82. The phone may be busy: data or fax is being sent or received, or the communicator is being used as a fax modem. Wait for the data/fax transmission to end, or drop the call by pressing the key on the phone keypad. 6. Call quality is poor Your location may not allow better call quality. This problem may occur especially in a moving car or train. Move to a location where the radio signal reception is better. See â GSM data transmission â on page 8. Reception is usually better above ground level, outdoors and while stationary. Sometimes even moving the communica tor slightly will improve recepti on. You can also try using the communicator in the handsfree mode, see page 70. Remember to turn the antenna to an upright posi tion. 7. Cannot divert or bar voice, fax or data calls You may have not subscribed to the service in question, or it is not supported by the network, or the message cen tre number and the number to wh ich you want to divert your calls may be missing or incorrect.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 249 Troubleshooting Fax diverts and barrings are defined in Tools > Account settings ⦠in the Messaging application. Data barring is set in the Data call barring in Control pan el. Data calls cannot be diverted. 8. Cannot select a contact If you cannot select a contact in the Telephone, Fax, SMS or Mail directory, the contact card does not have a telephone number, fax number, wireless phone number or an e-mail address. Add the missing information to the contact ca rd in the Contacts application. 9. Cannot send or receive faxes, short messages or mail Make sure that you have subscribed to these network services. The phone may be off, or the communicator is low on memory. The number format you use may be invalid, or the called number has not answe red within 10 tries, or you are calling to a wrong phone number. The phone may be busy: data or fax is being sent or rece ived, the communicator is being used as a fax modem. Wait for the data/fax transmission to end, or drop the call by pressing the key on the phone keypad. Fax/data barrings or fax diverts may be active. You can define the Fax barrings/ diverts in Tools > Account settings ⦠in Messaging . Fax reception: Your SIM card may not have a fax number. Mail reception: You have not subscribed to a remote mailbox service, or the mail service you are using uses another mail protocol than what you have selected. (Check with your Internet Service Provider whether you should be using POP3 or IMAP4.) If you are using secure connections, your r emote mailbox service also has to support secure connections. There may also be a transient problem with the
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 250 Troubleshooting remote mailbox service, or the Inte rnet servers between the communicator and the remote mailbox. Try again after a couple of minutes, and then contact your Internet Service Provider. Mail sending: You have not subscribed to a remote mailbox service, or the mail server delivering your mail does not comply with the SMTP protocol. If you are using secure connections, your remote mailbox service also has to support secure connections. There may also be a transient problem with the remote mailbox service, or the Internet servers between the communicator and the remote mailbox. Try again after a couple of minutes, and then contact your Internet Service Provider. If you are using the Upon request sending option, mail must be sent in the Document outbox, see â Outboxâ on page 163. If you receive service provider error messages when connecting to your remote mailbox, contact your remote mailbox service prov ider. Your remote mailbox may contain corrupted mail messages or the mail server settings may be incorrect. If you have problems sending mail with attachments, select Cancel sending and try again. If this does not help, try the key combination Shift-Tab-right arrow. Some mail attachments can take up a significant amount of memory and therefore freeing some memory by deleting something from your communicator memory might also help. Short message sending: You have not subscribed to the Short Message Service or the message centre number is missing or incorrect. Contact your service provider. The reason for failure may also depend on the network: the network does not support SMS, fax, or data/mail; the network is out of order or busy; the signal strength is not adequate for sending.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 251 Troubleshooting 10. Phone display shows â Message too long â when I try to open a received short message. The received message is over 1377 characters long. Use the Messaging application to read it. 11. Cannot establish an Internet connection If you are trying to connect to the Internet (i n order to use WWW or to receive or send mail), but the operation does not succeed, you can use the following checklist to find out where the problem might be located: 1 Is the data call active when you are trying to connect? Look at the data call indicator on the phone side. If the data call is dropped after a few seconds after starting to connect, check the phone number in the Internet Access settings. See page 132 for details. If the phone number is correct, the reason may be in poor network conditions, or a congested GSM network. Also check the Data call settings in the Interne t Access settings (connection type, data call type, and maximum connection speed). See page 136 for details. Contact your network service provider if you have problems with data call establishment, and your Internet Service Provider to find out the correct remote modem type. If you are roaming outside your home network, you might want to try the basic GSM data call settings described in a tip on page 137. 2 If the data call is active, but you cannot receive or send mail, try to use the WWW browser to connect to your Internet Service Provider â s WWW pages. If that works, the problem is most likely in the mai l settings or the remote mai lbox service. For more information, see Mail sending troubleshooting on page 249 and Mail settings on page 172.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 252 Troubleshooting 3 If the data call is active, but you cannot download WWW pages with the WWW browser, make note of the most recent status indication displayed to you in the title bar of the WWW browser. ⢠If the status indication reads Waiting for reply from host or Looking up host address , it is likely that the WWW address (URL) has been mistyped, or there is a problem with proxy server settings in the Internet Access Point or the proxy server itself, or there is a transient problem with the WWW server or Internet connections between the WWW server and your Internet Servi ce Provider. Check the proxy server sett ings explained on page 135. Disconnect the call, wait for a couple of minutes, and retry the connection. If the connection still does not succeed, contact your Internet Service Provider. ⢠If the status indication reads Logging into ne twork or Connected , the problem is most likely in your Internet Access Point settings (See page 132 for details) or your Internet Service Provider â s dial-up system, or you might need a script in order to connect to your Internet Service Provider. Disconnect the data call, wait for a couple of minutes, and retry the connect ion. If the connection still does not succeed, contact your Internet Service Provider. 4 If your data call is unexpectedly dropped, this may be a case of poor network conditions, congestion in the phone network, or a too low inactivity period setting. If you ar e unable t o connect to the In ternet af ter repe ated atte mpts, and h ave successfully used your Internet connection previously, or get error messages w hen starting the WWW browser, remove and replace the battery and try again. 12. Infrared problems The communicator may be connected to a PC, laptop, printer, digital camera, wireless phone or another communicator via the infrared connection.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 253 Troubleshooting If you are using the PC Suite for Nokia 9210i Communicator program on your PC, or if you want to receive data from another communicator or a digital camera, you must activate the Infrared connection on your communicator before the connection is made. See PC Suite Guide in the sales package CD-ROM and â To activate the infrared connection â on page 35 of this guide. The PC to which you want to establish the connection must have an IrDA compatible infrared port; installed and activated IrDA drivers; and Microsoft Windows 95/98/98SE/Me. For more information on IrDA drivers and their use in Windows, contact Microsoft. If you have an IBM Thinkpad laptop with Windows 98 SE installed, you ma y encounter problems with infrared connections. If problems occur, proceed as follows: 1 Click the Windows Start button and select Settings > C ontrol Panel . 2 In the Windows 98 Control Panel , open System . 3 In the System properties dialog, select the Device Manager tab. 4 Under Network Adapter s , select IBM Thinkpad Fast Infrared Port and click the Properties button. IBM Thinkpad Fast Infr ared Port Properties dialog opens. 5 Click the Driver tab and then click the Update Driver... button. Update Device Driver Wizard starts. 6 Click Next . 7 Select the Install one of the other drivers option and click the View List... button. 8 Infrared PnP Serial Port has been found. Click OK . 9 Click Next . 10 Infrared PnP Serial Port is ready to be installed. Click Next . 11 The new driver has been inst alled. Click Finish . 12 The computer must be restarted before the new driver c an be taken to use. Click Yes to restart the computer.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 254 Troubleshooting 13. Printing problems If you are using the infrared connection, the infrared port of the printer must be compatible to the IrDA standard. See â To print â on page 32. If you fail to establish an infrare d connection, transfer the fi le to a PC and use the PC to print the document. Alt ernatively, you can fax th e document to the neares t fax machine. See â To write and send a new fax â on page 168. 14. PC connectivity proble ms Make sure that PC Suite for Nokia 9210i Communicator is installed and running on your PC. See the PC Suite Guide for more information. If you use a cable connection, check that the cable is properly attached at both ends. If you use an infrared connection, check that the IR ports are facing each other and the route between the ports is un obstructed. Check that you are using the correct serial port (COM) on your PC. For all other PC Suite problems, see the PC Suite Guide and the PC Suite online help â Troubleshootingâ section. 15. Fax modem problems When you use the communicator as a fax modem, make sure that the communicator and the PC use the same baud rate. If you use the infrared connection, the baud rate is set automatically. If you use the cable connection, set the baud rate in the Fax modem settings. For the PC, the baud rate is set in the connectivity software of the PC.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 255 Troubleshooting If you use the cable connection, fully compatible operation with all PC fax and terminal software cannot be guaranteed. Consult your dealer. If you have problems with your PC fax software, use the infrared connection. If you have problems establishing a data connection with the remote modem, try fixing the data transmission r ate by using an AT command. Common AT commands based on the ETSI 07.07 standard and supported by the Nokia 9210i Communicator are listed in a file on the CD-ROM supplied with the communicator. You can find this file by clicking â AT commands â in âÂÂPC software section â on the CD-ROM. For information on how to use the AT commands and fax modem drivers, consult the documentation of the telecommunication or fax application that you use on your PC. 16. Access code pr oblems The default lock code for Nokia 9210i Communicator is 12345 . I f you forget or lose the lock code contact your communicator dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about Internet passwords, contact your Internet service provider. 17. Low on memory Your communicator can run out of memory just like a PC. There may be several reasons for that: ⢠You have too many applications running. Press the Menu key and check the left most menu for tasklist of open applications. Choose the application that does not have to be open and close it.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 256 Troubleshooting ⢠You have received a lot of mail or you have saved large images or other items that use a lot of memory. To free up communicator memory, remove unnecessary data, move large items to a memory card or transfer them to your PC, if possible. See â To avoid low memory â on page 166 and PC Suite Guide for details. ⢠You have tried to download a large WWW page. See item 19 on this troubleshooting list. You can check the memory usage in the Memory application of Control panel. See â Memory â on page 230. 18. Cannot connect to the Internet when roaming You are able to connect to the Internet when in your home country or region. You are now roaming and your Internet connection does not work. Try using the settings of a basic GSM data connection. Also check that the phone number of your Internet Access Point is in international format. See â Data call page â on page 136. 19. â Memory â error note seen when downloading very large WWW pages Some WWW pages are extremely l arge because they contain many l arge images or tables. These types of pages consume memory in the communicator very quickly. If, when downloading WWW pages, you see an error note about memory, the first action is to close any other applications that you may have opened a fter starting the WWW browser. To do that, press the Menu key and check the leftmost menu for tasklist of open applications. Select and close each item. If you still experience problems, turn off the setting whic h allows loading images automatically. One last action is to exit the WWW browser appl ication, start it again, and try to download the page once more without images.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 257 Troubleshooting Note: Removing data files or installing applications does not have effect on the memory available to the WWW browser.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 259 CARE AND MAINTENANCE 13. CARE AND MAINTENANCE Your Nokia 9210i Communicator is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you to fulfil any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for many years. ⢠Keep the communicator and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. ⢠Keep the communicator dry. Precipitation, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. ⢠Do not use or store the communicator in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the communicator in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the communicator in cold areas. When it warms up (to its normal temperature), moisture can form inside, which may damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the communicator. Non-expert handling may damage it. ⢠Do not drop, knock or shake the communicator. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. Dropping the product may break the colour display, which is fragile.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 260 CARE AND MAINTENANCE ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cle aning solvents, or strong detergents to cl ean the communicator. ⢠Do not paint the communicator. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorised antennas, modifications or attachments could damage t he communicator and may violate regulations governing radio devices. All of the above suggestions apply equally to your communicator, battery, charger or any accessory. If any of them is not working properly, take it to your nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there will assist you and, if necessary, arrange for service.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 261 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION 14. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Traffic Safety Do not use a communicator while dr iving a vehicle. Always secure the phone in its holder; do not place the phone on the passenger seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. Remember road safety always comes first! Operating en vironment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area a nd always switch off the phone of your communicator whenever it is forbidden to use it , or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the phone only in its normal operating positions. To maintain compliance with radio frequency exposure guidelines, always use Nokia approved accessories. Place the communicator in an approved carrying case or belt clip when carrying the communicator while the phone is on.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 262 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Parts of the phone are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the phone, and persons with a hearing aid should not hold the phone to the ear with the hearing aid. Always secure the phone in its holder, because metallic materials may be attracted by the earpiece. Do not place credit cards or other ma gnetic storage media near the phone, because information stored on them may be erased. Electronic devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic e quipment may not be shie lded against the RF signals from your communicator. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 20 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a hand-held wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemaker s: ⢠Should always keep the phone more than 20 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker when the phone is switched on; ⢠Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket; ⢠Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for interference. ⢠If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your communicator immediately. Hearing aids Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your service provider.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 263 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Other medical devi ces Operation of any radio t ransmitting equipment, including communicators, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately sh ielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off the phone of your communicator in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles (e.g. electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti-skid (an ti-lock) braking systems, electron ic speed control systems, air bag systems). Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You shou ld also consult t he manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Posted facilities Switch off the phone of your communicator in any facility where posted notices so require. Potentially explosive atmos pheres Switch off the phone of your communicator when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advised to switch off the phone when at a refuel ling point (service station). Users are reminde d of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 264 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using liquified petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such a s grain, dust or metal powders; and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Vehicles Only qualified personnel should service the communicator, or install the communicator in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty which may apply to the unit. Check regularly that all wireless phone equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the communicator, its parts or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including both installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in- vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could re sult. Using the phone of your communicator while in the air is prohibited. Switch off the phone of your communicator before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network and may be illegal.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 265 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION FCC regulations prohibit using your phone while in the air. Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone ne twork and may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to the offender, or legal action or both. Emergency calls Important: The Nokia 9210i Communicator, like any wireless phone, operates using radio signals, wireless and landline ne tworks as well as user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions can not be guaranteed. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any wireless phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies). Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless phone networks or when certain network services and/or phone features are in use. Check with local service providers. To make an emergency call: 1 If the device cover is open, close it. 2 If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the communicator. 3 Press as many times as needed (e.g. to exit a call, to e xit a menu, etc.) to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. 4 Key in the emerge ncy number for your present locat ion (e.g. 911, 112 or other official emergency number). Emergency numbers vary by location. 5 Press the key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide and your local cellular service provider.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 266 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION When making an emergency call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Remember that your communicator may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident - do not cut off the call until given permission to do so. Important power supply i nformation WARNING: This apparatus is intended for use when supplied with power from a Lithium-ion battery and chargers AC P-12, ACP-9E, ACP-9X and ACP-9A. Other usage will invalidate any approval given to this apparatus and may be dangerous . Use only batteries, charger s and accessories approved by the communicator manufacturer for use with this particular communicator model. T he use of any ot her types will invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the communicator , and may be dangerous. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer.When you disconnect the power cord of any accessor y, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Certification information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE EU REQUIREMENTS FOR EX PO SURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your communicator, like any mobile phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exc eed the limits for e xposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy recommended by The Council of the European Union.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 267 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organisations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The limits include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit recommended by The Council of the European Union is 2.0 W/kg.* Tests for SAR have been conducted using standard operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at mult iple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station antenna, th e lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale t o the public, compliance with the European R&TTE directive must be shown. This directive includes as one essential requirement the protection of t he health and the safety for the user and any other person. The highest SAR value for the phone of Nokia 9210i Communicator when tested for compliance against the standard was 0.34 W/kg. While there may be differences between the SAR leve ls of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the EU requirements for RF exposure. * The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of tissue. The limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 268 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www.nokia.com.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 269 Glossary AT Commands Operations of a fax mode m can be controlled by AT commands. The se commands give the advanced user an opportunity to control all the features of the modem. A list of common AT commands based on the ETSI 07.07 standard and supported by the Nokia 9210i Communicator is available on the CD-ROM included in the sales package of your communicator. Barring passw ord The barring password is a 4-digit code needed to change fax and voice call barrings, see â To restrict voice calls â on page 84. The pass word is not located in your communicator or SIM card, but in the network. You obtain the password from your network service provider when you subscribe to the call barring service. Cookies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the server to you, to store information about your visits to a Web site. When you accept cookies, the server is able to evaluate your use of the Web site; what you are interested in, what you want to read, and so on. DNS Domain Name Service. An Internet service that translates domain names like www.nokia.com into IP addresses like 192.100.124.195. Domain names are easier to remember but this translati on is needed because the Interne t is based on IP addresses.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 270 Domain name and Host name The terms â domain name â and â host name â are sometimes, slightly inaccurately, used as synonyms. In a full domain name, e.g. www.forum.nokia.com, the first part of the name is the name of the host, and the following parts are names of domains to which the host belongs. Each host name corresponds to a certain IP address. H ost names are used because they are easier to remember than IP addresses. DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) Tones The system used by touch-tone telephones. DTMF assigns a specific frequency, or tone, to each key so that it can easily be identified by a microprocessor. DTMF tones allow you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised telephony systems, etc. Gateway IP address The address of a WAP gateway. (see: WAP gateway). Hotspot A World Wide Web (WWW) page may contain hotspots, such as selection lists, text entry fields, and reset/submi t buttons, which enable you to input information in to the WWW. HSCSD High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data is circuit-switched wireless data transmission for mobile users at data rates up to 43.2 Kbps which is four times faster than the standard data rates of the Global System for Mobile (GSM) communication standard in 1999. HSCSD is comparable to the speed of many computer modems that communicate with today's fixed telephone networks.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 271 HTML (Hypertext Mark-up Language) A language used to define the appearance and content of WWW documents. HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Pr otocol) A document transfer protocol used in the WWW. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. See Secure Socket Layer (SSL) Hyperlink A link on a WWW page that leads to another World Wide Web page or site, or another place on the same page. Hyperlinks are usually underlined or shown in a different colour from the surrounding text. Hyperlinks can also be pictures. IAP (Internet Access Point) The point where your communicator connects to the Internet by way of a data call. An Internet access point can be provided, for example, by a commercial Internet service provider (ISP) or by your own company. Images, inline, external Images within a retrieved WWW page are inline images. Larger images are often placed as external images and have to be viewed separatel y. IMAP4 (Internet Mail Access Protocol, ver sion 4) A protocol used for accessing your Remote mailbox.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 272 IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) IETF are responsible for most of the Internet standardisation. Nokia 9210i Communicator is using many IETF specifications. In the callback settings, one of the settings is specified by IETF whereas the other methods are specified by Microsoft. ISDN connections ISDN connections are a way to establish a data call between the Communicator and your Internet Access Point. ISDN connections are digital from end to end and as such offer quicker set-up times and faster data rates than Analog connections. In order to use ISDN, both your Internet service provider and network provider have to support them. Java An object-oriented, general purpose programming language developed by Sun Microsystems and originally designed for handheld devices. Java is language similar to C , but simplified to eliminate language features that cause common programming errors. Compiled Java code can run on most computers because Java interpreters and runtime environments exist for most operating systems Lock code The lock code is a five-digit code needed to lock and unlock the communicator. The default lock code for Nokia 9210i Communicator is 12345 . The lock code is also required when you change certain settings. Keep it secret and in a safe place, separate from the communicator.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 273 MCN (Micro-Cellula r Network) technology Microcells are used for increasing the capacity of wireless networks in urban areas. MIME (Multipurpose Interne t Mail Extensions) A standard Internet format which permits, for instance, multiple mail objects in a single message. The mail objects can be, for example, formatted multifont text messages and non-textu al elements, such as images and audio fragments. PIN (Personal Identity Number) The PIN code protects your phone from unauthorised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN code request is selected, the code is required each time the phone is switched on. The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 Code The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain functions supported by the SIM card. The length of the PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digits. Plug-in A plug-in is add-on software that can be downloaded from the WWW. The communicator uses plug-ins to display a document that the WWW application itself cannot show POP3 (Post Office Protocol, version 3) A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing the Remote mailbox.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 274 Point-to-point pro tocol (PPP) A common networking software protocol which enables a ny computer with a modem and a phone line to connect directly to the Internet. Protocol A formal set of rules that govern how data is transferred between two devices. Proxy In some networks, the connection betwee n the WWW and the site you want to connect to is block ed by a firewall. The firewall protects the network from unauthorised external access. A proxy is an intermediary program that enables access through the firewall. A proxy can a lso serve as a network cache to speed up the retrieving process. PUK (PIN Unblocking Key) code The PUK is an 8-digit code supplied with the SIM card. The code is required when you want to change a disabled PIN code. If you enter an incorrect PUK code ten times in succession, the SIM card is rejected and you cannot make or receive any calls, except emergency calls. When the SIM is rejected, you will need a new SIM card. You cannot change the PUK code. If you lose the code, contact your network service provider. PUK2 Code The PUK2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The code is required when you want to change a disabled PIN2 code. If you enter an incorrect PUK2 code ten times in succession, you will not be able to access the functions
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 275 which require the PIN2 code. To u se these functi ons again, you will ne ed to obtain a new SIM card from your network service provider.You cannot change the PUK2 code. Roaming agreement An agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) A security protocol that prevents eavesdropping, tampering, or message forgery over the Internet. Documents using SSL are identified with the prefix HTTPS. SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card The SIM card contains al l the information the cellular network needs to identify the network user. The SIM card also contains security-related information. Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) An Internet protocol governing the transfer of electronic mail. TCP port Identifies the data port of the destination computer. TCP/IP (Transmission C ontrol Protocol/Inter net Protocol) A protocol that governs data communication in the Internet and in the TCP / IP networks.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 276 Template In word processing a template or a style sheet is a file or form that defines the layout of a document. A template may determine parameters like the page size, margins, and fonts. You can use the same style sheet for many documents. For example, you can define one style sheet for personal letters, another for official letters, and a third for reports. Transport Layer Secur ity A security protocol similar to SSL offering end-to-end encrypted and authenticated connections. The server to whi ch the connection is established is authenticated by the u se of certificates. Data transfers are secured with encryption algorithms. The Nokia 9210i Communicator supports TLS version 1. See also Secure Socket Layer (SSL) URL (Uniform Resource Locator) Link information required by the WWW to connect to a given WWW host computer. The URL usually starts with http://. For example, the Nokia Wireless Data Forum home page can be found at http:// www.forum.nokia.com. URLs are often referred to with phrases like â Home page location, â â Site location, â â can be found at... â Voice Mailbox A voice mailbox is a network service or a personal answering machine where people can leave you voice messages. WAP Wireless Application Protocol. The transport protocol for WAP services, used by the WAP browser.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 277 WAP access point An extension to an Internet access point (see: IAP), which provides additional information that the WAP browser needs in order to be able to connect to a WAP service.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 279 Index A About Guides 3 Access codes, See Security of phone Accessories 221 Car kit 222 Headset 222 Applications Creating shortcuts to 17 Disappearing 245 Installing 226 Removing 226 Arrows key 19 AT commands 269 Attachments to Calendar entries 118 Mails 182 B Background image 66 Backups To memory card 211 Barring password Changing 220 Barring status 221 Battery Charging 21 Precautions 22 Business card Own 95 Receiving 106 Sending 105 Buttons Application 16 C Calculator General operation 217 Calendar Anniversaries view 124 Attachments 118 Changing entry types 116 Creating new entries 112 Creating task lists 126 Day view 121 Defining entry information 112 Deleting entries 117 Deleting task lists 127
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 280 Editing entries 116 Editing task lists 126 Entries 111 General commands 119 General settings 128 Month view 119 Searching entries 127 Sending entries 112 Settings 128 Symbols 125 Task lists 126 Task lists view 122 View settings 129 Views 118 Week view 120 Weekly time schedule view 123 Year schedule view 124 Callback 137 Calls Advanced settings 87 Answering 45 , 72 Barring 60 , 84 Charging 87 Conference 74 Diverting 62 , 83 Lock code 60 , 61 Making 42 , 70 Managing conference calls 75 Multiple 73 Options during calls 45 PIN code 61 PIN2 code 61 Poor call quality 248 Private 75 Recent calls 71 Recording 73 Register 53 Settings 56 , 77 , 86 Switching between calls 74 Transferring 76 Troubleshooting 248 Using phone book 70 Waiting 76 CBS Creating topic lists 238 Detecting new topics 239 Opening topic lists 238 Overview 237 CD-ROM Installing software from communicator â s CD- ROM 34 Cell Broadcast Service, See CB S viewer Cell broadcast viewer 237 Cell Broadcast viewer, See CBS vi ewer Certificate management 224 Character key 19
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 281 Characters Special 26 Chartsheets Creating 203 Editing 203 Replacing data 204 Cities 216 Clock 215 Alarms 216 Changing your home city 216 Codes Autolock period 219 Overview PIN code 59 PUK code 274 Security options 218 Troubleshooting 255 Communicator Facts 5 , 230 Interface 11 Overview 1 Restarting 246 Connectors 20 Contact card Adding fields 97 Attaching pictures 99 Attaching ringin g tones 99 Changing fields 97 Changing group memberships 103 Creating 94 Creating SIM contact card 104 Field information 98 Opening 96 Receiving 106 Renaming fields 97 Searching 96 Sending 105 Sending via SMS 108 Settings 107 SIM directory options 105 Storing DTMF tones 101 Templates 100 Troubleshooting 249 VIP Group settings 109 Contact database 109 Contact group 102 Contact information Overview 8 Contacts Cannot select a card 249 Moving from other devices 36 Search details 97 Contacts main view 93 Control key 18 Control Panel 218 Currency 231
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 282 D Data Transferring 36 Data call barring 221 Date format 231 Desk Adding links 66 Changing background image 66 Main view 65 Writing n otes 66 Desk, application 65 Dialogs 13 Digital certificat es 224 Disappeared applications 245 Display Elements 11 Indicators 13 , 41 Settings 222 Troubleshooting 245 Documents Creating 192 Inserting objects 194 Outline 195 Pagination 195 Sending 30 Templates 194 Text markers 195 Text style 192 DTMF tones Sending 44 , 77 Storing in a contact card 101 E Emergency calls 91 Enter key 20 Escape key 18 F Fax Access requirements 159 Polling 170 Receiving and reading 162 , 169, 170 Sending 163 , 164 , 168 Settings 171 Troubleshooting 249 Writing 164 , 168 Fax modem 239 Activating 243 Disabling 243 Settings 241 Troubleshooting 254 Fetching Faxes 170 Mail 179 File manager
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 283 Creating folders 209 Files view 207 Folder view 207 Moving files and folders 209 Overview 206 Renaming files and folders 210 Searching files and folders 210 Viewing folders 207 Viewing properties 210 Files .sis files 227 Saving 29 Fixed dialling 89 Flight profile 91 Folders Default saving folder 231 Frames changing size 147 opening as a new page 147 G General features 26 Glossary 269 H Help Key 19 Troubleshooting 245 Viewing 3 , 48 Home city 216 I Image albums Creating 234 Viewing 234 Images Albums 233 Creating new 235 Moving 234 Receiving via infrared 236 Resizing 235 Imaging 233 Inbox 162 Indicators on display 13 Infrared Activating 62 Settings 35 Troubleshooting 252 International call s 43 Internet Access requirements 131 Callback settings 137 Connection scripts 139 Creating or modifying connections 133 Data call settings 136 Establishing a connection 141
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 284 Internet access point 132 PPP compression 138 Proxy settings 135 Setting up connections 132 Settings 134 Troubleshooting 251 , 256 Invalid SIM card 248 J Java 156 K Keyboard Keys 16 Keyboard shortcuts 17 Keypad Keys 40 Locking 46 Unlocking 47 Keys On phone keypad 40 L Lock code 7 , 42 , 61 , 219 , 255 , 272 Changing 220 lock code 220 Log 33 M Mail Access requirements 159 , 172 Adding attachments 182 Advanced settings 175 Attachments 182 Deleting 179 , 181 Editing accounts 176 General settings 173 Reading 162 , 180 Receiving (fetching) 179 Replying to 181 Sending 163 , 164 , 176 , 178 Server settings 174 Settings 172 Signature 175 Synchronisation 184 Troubleshooting 249 Viewing and saving attachments 182 Writing 164 , 176 Measurement unit 231 Memory Card 24 Details 230 Troubleshooting 255 , 256 Memory card Backups 211
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 285 Formatting 213 Inserting 25 Locking 212 Password protection 212 Removing password 213 Restoring from 211 Menu key 19 Menus In phone 48 , 49 Scrolling 48 Shortcuts 49 Message box cleanup 166 Messages Opening 160 Messaging Application 159 Centre 160 Deleting messages 166 freeing up memory 166 Inbox 160 , 162 Opening folders and messages 160 Outbox 160 , 163 Selecting recipients 165 Sorting 161 Messaging centre 160 Multisel ection 26 N Network services Settings 82 Notes 66 Number format 231 O Office, application 191 Offline 183 Offline viewin g 148 Online 183 Outbox 163 P Pages 13 PC Connectivity Troubleshooting 254 PC mail Converting to 185 Creating 184 Phone Answering 72 Book 70 Call divert menu 62 Call register menu 53 Infrared menu 62 Messages menu 50 Recent calls 71
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 286 Scrolling menus 48 Settings 58 , 77 Settings menu 56 SIM services menu 63 Phone numbers Searching for 43 , 70 Phone security 218 Phone, See also Calls Picture Attaching to a contact card 99 PIN code Changing 220 PIN2 code Changing 220 Pointer 146 Preferred application 17 Presentation viewer 204 Presentations Outline 205 Searching slides 206 Viewing 205 Viewing slides 206 Printing 32 Prints Troubleshooting 254 Profiles 47 , 78 Creating new 79 Properties of Files, folders and drives 210 R Recorder 231 Regional settings 231 Remote Faxbox 171 Mailbox 160 , 172, 183 Remote mailbox 179 Subscribing to 180 Restoring From memory card 211 Ringing tone Attaching to a contact card 99 Playing 99 S Screen Settings 222 Security .sis files 227 Security certificates 224 Security of phone 7 , 218 Service numbers 44 Settings Fax 171 Fax modem 241 Mail 172
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 287 SMS 188 Shift key 18 Short messages, See SMS Shortcuts In communicator interface 27 In Phone menus 49 Shortcuts to applications 17 SMS Access requirements 159 Receiving and reading 162 , 187 Settings 188 Troubleshooting 249 Writing and sendi ng 163 , 164 , 186 Software Installing 226 Removing 226 Speed dials 44 , 81 Spell checking 31 Spreadsheet Aligning 201 Background colour 201 Borders 201 Clearing cells 200 Column width 200 Deleting 202 Entering data 197 Fonts 201 Inserting cell s 199 Naming cells 202 Naming worksheets 202 Number format 201 Page breaks 202 Row height 200 Selecting cells 198 Viewing 203 Spreadsheet application Chartsheets 203 Overview 196 Workbooks 196 Worksheets 196 Stickers 7 T Tabulator (Tab) key 18 Telephone Application 69 Settings 77 Telephone, See also Calls Text Searching for text 30 Time format 231 Transfer from other devices 36 Troubleshooting 245 Blank display 245 Cannot divert or bar 248
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 288 Cannot make calls 248 Cannot select a contact 249 Cannot send or receive 249 Deleting temporary files 246 Downloading large pages 256 Fax modem 254 flashing display 245 Formatting memory 247 Infrared 252 Internet connec tions 251 Internet when roaming 256 Invalid SIM card 248 Lock codes 255 Low memory 255 , 256 Message too long 251 No response 246 Not charging 245 PC connectivity 254 Phone does not work 245 Poor call quality 248 Printing 254 Restarting 246 V Video Playing 236 Video player 236 Viewing Images 233 Voice mailbox Calling 72 Creating 72 Settings 85 W WAP Access requirements 131 , 152 Bookmarks 154 Differences from WWW 152 Navigating 155 Setting up connections 153 Settings 156 Web pages changing frame sizes 147 Viewing in black and white 147 Viewing in offl ine 148 Wireless data transmission Limitations 8 Word Processor, application 191 World Wide Web Bookmarks 150 Browser application 141 Cache view 149 changing frame sizes 147 Cookies 149 Differences from WAP 152
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 289 Emptying cache 149 Emptying history 149 Frame options 148 History view 149 Loading images 148 Navigating 143 Plugins view 149 Pointer 146 Settings 148
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. Copyright é 2000- 2003 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Reproductio n, transf er, distrib ution or stora ge of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior written perm ission of N okia is pro hibited. Nokia, Nokia Conn ecting People, B ounce and Triple Po p are trademar ks or registered t rademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound m ark of Nokia Corporation. O ther product a nd company name s mentioned herein may be t rademarks or tradenames of their respective owne rs. T his p ro duct inc lu des s o ft w a re lic en s ed f r om Sy m bian Ltd é S ym b i an L td 1998 - 20 03. A ll r i ghts r es e r ve d. Symbian OS and all Symbian OS -b ased trademarks and logos are tradem arks of Symbian Li mited. . Java⢠is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc é 1984-1997 D ataViz Inc. All rights rese rved. This softw are con tains por tions of the file tra nslation library of Conver sions Plus, a produ ct of DataV iz Inc., 55 Corpora te Drive, Trumbul l, CT 06611 USA (20 3) 268-0030. International C orrectSpe ll⢠English spelling cor rection sys tem, 1995 b y Lernout & Hauspie Spee ch Products N.V. All rights reserved. Re production or disassembly o f embodied a lgorithms or d atabase proh ibited. English spelling s oftware develo ped by Lernout & H auspie Spee ch Products N.V. UK English Con cise Interna tional Electr onic Thesaurus Co pyright é 199 5 by Lernout & Hau spie Speech Pr oducts N.V. All rights rese rved. Reprod uction or disa ssembly of emb odied progra ms and database s prohibit ed. Incorporates MPPC î compression f rom Hi/fn⢠Part of the sof tware in this product is é Copyright ANT Lt d. 1998. All rights r eserved. Stac î, LZS î, é19 96, Stac, Inc., é199 4-1996 Microso ft Corporation. In cludes one or more U.S. Pat ents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126 739, 5146221, an d 5414425. Other patents pe nding. Incorporates L ZSî compression from Hi/fnâ¢. Hi/fn î, LZS î, é19 88-98, Hi/fn. Inclu des one or mo re U.S. Patents: No. 4 701745, 501600 9, 5126739, 5146 221, and 5414425. Other patents pending . Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvem ents to any of the products described i n this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible for any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequential or indirect damages howsoever caused. The contents of this document are provided "as is". Except as required by applicable law, no warranties of any kind, either express or implied , including, but not li mited to, th e implied w arranties o f merchant ability and f itness for a particula r purpose, are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this do cument. Nokia reserves the right to revise thi s document or withd raw it at any time without prior notice. The availability of particular products may vary by region. Please check with the Nokia dealer nearest to you.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. This product uses certificates for security functionality. More information on Nokia certi ficates can be acquired from Nokia web pages. DECLARATION OF CO NFORMITY We, NOKIA CORPOR ATION de clare unde r our sole responsi bility t hat the pr oduct RAE -5N is in c onformit y with the provisio ns of the foll owing Council D irective:1999 /5/EC. A copy of the Declarati on of Conformit y can be found f rom http://www.nokia.com/phones/d eclaration_of_conformit y/ IMPORTANT NOTICE REGARDING THE W ARRANTY In order to be able the use of this product for many years, please note that it has a very fragile and expensive colour display , which may break if you drop, knock or shake the product. Our Limited Manufacturer ôs Warranty shall not apply if the product has been subject to rough handling.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. Table of Contents Introduction ...................... ........................ ................... .............. 1 Getting help........ ........... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 3 Facts about you r communicator .......... ........... .............. .......... ........... ........... ..... 5 GSM data transmission ................. .......... .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 8 General information .................... ......................... .................... 11 Communicator d isplay................ ........... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........ 11 Communicator keyb oard............ ............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........ 16 Connectors .......... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 20 To charge the battery ......... ........... .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ..... 21 Memory card ................. ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... .............. .......... ... 24 General features ............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 26 To install software from the CD-ROM ........... .............. ............. ........... .......... ... 34 To activate the infra red connection .......... .......... ........... .............. .......... ........... 35 To transfer dat a from other devices ............ ........... ........... ........... ............. ........ 36 Phone ........ ......................... .................. ......................... .............. 39 Selection keys ....... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 40 Display indicators .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 41
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. To make a call............ ........... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 42 To answer a call ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 45 To manage calls ................... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........ 45 Keypad lock .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ... 46 To change profile s ......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... 47 To view help ....... ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... 48 To use the menu s................. .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........ 48 Messages (Menu 1) ............... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 50 Call register (Menu 2 ) .................. ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ........... ..... 53 Settings (Menu 3)............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... .............. ........ 56 Call divert (Menu 4)................. ........... .......... .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... 62 Infrared (Menu 5 ) ............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... 62 SIM services (Me nu 6)............. ............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... 63 Desk .................... ......................... ................... ........................ .... 65 Main view ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ............. ... 65 Telephone .................. .................. ......................... ...................... 69 To make a call manually ......... ........... ............. ........... ........... ............. ........... ........ 70 To call a number in the Telephone direct ory .......... ............. ............. .............. 70 To call a number in a recent ca lls list ........... ............. ........... ............. ........... ... 71 To answer a call ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 72 To call and create a voice mailbox ........... ........... ........... ........... .......... .............. 72
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. To record a call ....... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 73 To make a new call during a call............. ............. ........... .............. .......... ........... 73 To make conference calls ..... ............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... 74 To transfe r calls ................. ........... ........... .......... ........... .............. .......... ........... ........ 76 To answer a waitin g call ............... .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ..... 76 To send DTMF tones d uring a call ................ ........... ........... ............. ........... ........ 77 Telephone Setting s ................. .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... .............. .......... ... 77 Flight profile ............... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........ 91 Contacts ... .................. ......................... ......................... .............. 93 Contacts director y .................. ............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 93 To make a contact card................. ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 94 To open a contact card ........... .............. .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 96 To move or copy contacts from a SIM card .................... ............. .............. ..... 96 To search for a cont act card .................. .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 96 To change fields in a contact card.................. .............. .......... ........... ............. ... 97 To attach a ring ing tone ....... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 99 To insert a picture................... .......... .............. .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 99 To create or modify t emplates ...... ........... ........... ........... ............. ........... .......... ... 100 To store DTMF tones ..... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... .............. .......... ........... 101 To create contac t groups ................ ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 102 To create a SIM contact card ................ ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ..... 1 04 To send a contact card as a busin ess card ...................... ........... ............. ........ 105
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. To receive a business card ................ .......... .............. ........... .......... .............. ........ 106 Settings ............... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 10 7 To create a new contacts dat abase................ ........... .......... .............. ........... ..... 109 Calendar . ......................... ........................ ......................... .......... 111 Calendar entries ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... .............. .......... ........... ... 111 Views .............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... 118 Icons ............. .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ............. .1 2 5 Task lists ................... ........... ............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........ 1 26 To search for Calendar en tries ................. ........... ............. ........... .......... ........... ... 127 Settings ............... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 12 8 Internet ................................. ......................... .................. .......... 131 To set up your Interne t access point ............... .......... .............. .......... .............. 132 To connect to the World Wide Web.... .............. .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 141 To open a Web page ..... ........... ........... .......... .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... 143 To browse the WWW............... ........... .......... .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... 144 WWW settings ........................................................................................................ 148 Cache, History, and Plugins view ......... .............. .......... ........... ............. ........... ... 149 Bookmarks .......... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 150 WAP ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ..... 151 Java............ ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ... .. 156
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. Messaging ..................................... ......................... .................... 159 Messaging centre........... .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 160 Fax ......... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........ ... 168 Mail .......... .......... ........... .............. .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ... .. 172 Short Messag e Service .................. ............. ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 185 Office ......................... ......................... ......................... .............. 191 Word Processor............... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 191 Sheet ................. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........ 196 Presentation viewer ...... .............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 204 File manag er ............... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........ 206 Extras ................... ......................... .................. ......................... .. 215 Clock .................. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ....... .2 1 5 Calculator ............ ............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 217 Control pane l .................. ........... ........... ........ ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ..... 2 18 Recorder ......... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... ............. ........ 231 Imaging ........ ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ... 23 3 RealOne Player.............. ........... .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... .......... ... 236 Cell broadcast ............ ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ............. ........... ........... ..... 237 Fax modem .............. ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... ........... ........... .......... ........... 239 Troubleshooting ......... ......................... ......................... .............. 245
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. CARE AND MAINTENANCE ................... ......................... .......... 259 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION ................ ...................... 261 Glossary .............. ......................... ................... ........................ .... 269 Index ................... ................... ......................... ........................ .... 279
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. FOR YOUR SAFETY Read these simple gu idelines. Breaking th e rules may be danger ous or illegal. Further detail ed information is gi ven in this manual . Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIR ST Don â t use the communicator while driving. INTERFERENCE All wireles s phones may get interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any regulations or rules. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Don â t u se the pho ne at a refu elling point. Don â t use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF N EAR BLAST ING Don â t use t he phone where blasting i s in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE SENSIBLY U se only in the normal position. Don â t touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair phone equipment.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. ACCESSORIES AN D BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTAN CE Your communicator is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACKUP COPIES Remember to make backup copies of all important data. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user â s guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. CALLING Close the cover and ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Enter the phone nu mber, including the area code, th en press . To end a call, press . To answer a call, press . EMERGENCY CALLS Close the device cover. Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press as many times as needed (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu, etc.) to clear the display. Enter the emergency number, then press . Give your location. Do not end the call until t old to do so.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 1 Introduction 1. Introduction Congratulations on purchasing the Nokia 9210i Communi cator. It is a complete communications tool: it is a wireless phone, messaging device, and a palmtop organiser in one package. Figure 1 Phone Earpiece Front Back Microphone
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 2 Introduction The Nokia 9210i Communicator consists of two parts: the phone and the communicator interface. The phone is on the device cover and the communicator interface is inside the cover, both as shown in Figures 1 and 2. Figure 2 Both these parts use the same information from the memory of the communicator - they are not separate devices. For example, the phone uses the names and phone numbers stored in the Contacts directory of the communicator interface, and the communicator interface uses the phone for voice and data communications, for example, when sending and receivi ng faxes and connecting to the Intern et. Tip: The comm unicator interface has no power on/ off button - it switches it self on when you open the cover and switches off when you close the cover. The communicator interface contains many organiser and communications applications. The large keyboard, command buttons, and display make using the applications easy. commun icator interface
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 3 Introduction The phone is designed for making and answering calls quickly. The communicator looks and operates like other Nokia wireless phones, except the earpie ce and microphone are at the rear of the device. The phone is switched on and off by pressing the button on the cover. WARNING: Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Getting help Online Help The communicator has a help function, which you can access from any application or view. To view help, press the key on the communicator interface keyboard. You are shown a page of information relevant to the task you are doing. You can also search the help topics for specific subjects and keywords. Tip: The key is on the bottom row of the keyboard. About the guides in the sales package The Nokia communicator sales package contains the following guides either in print or as PDF files. ⢠To help you begin to use your communicator, turn to the Getting Started Guide supplied in your sales package. It explains the start-up procedure and gives basic information on how to use the various applications.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 4 Introduction ⢠This userâ s guide explains in more detail how the Nokia 9210i Communicator operates. â General information â identifies the variou s parts of the communicator and their functions, as well as the common features of the communicator. The rest of this user â s guide deals with the communicator applications and the phone. There is a short glossary of Internet and wireless terms and abbreviations at the back of the user â s guide . ⢠The PC Suite Guide explains the functionality of PC Suite for the Nokia 9210i Communicator. With PC Suite you can move, copy, synchronise, back up, and restore data between your communicator and a compatible PC. ⢠The Software on CD-ROM Guide explains in detail the functionality of the applications found on the CD-ROM that you can install on your communicator. ⢠The Add-on Applications Guide gives a brief introduction of other software available for the Nokia 9210i Commun icator. This guide is only available in a printed version. ⢠The Settings Checklist helps you to connect your Nokia 9210i Communicator with different kinds of wireless services. The PC Suite Guide and the Soft ware on CD-ROM Guide are both on the CD-ROM under the section â Using the Nokia 9210i Communicator â . In this user â s guide and the Getting Started Guide, the names of the commands on the display are in bold and the settings and options are in italics. Note: If you are switching from the Nokia 9000 Communicator, the Nokia 9000i Communicat or, the Nokia 9 110 Communicator, or th e Nokia 9110i Communicator to the Nokia 9210i Communicator, see â To transfer data from other devices â on page 36 and in the PC Suite Guide on the CD- ROM.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 5 Introduction Facts about your communicator Network Services The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 900 / 1800 networks. Dualband/triband is a network dependant feature. Check with your local service provider if you can subscribe to and use this feature. A number of features included in this guide are called Network Services. These are special services that you arrange through your wireless service provider. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them through your service provider and obtain instructions for their use from your service provider. Note: Some networks may not support all language-dependent characters and/ or services. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from ACP-12, ACP-9E, ACP-9X and ACP-9A. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers and accessories approved by the phone manufacturer for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 6 Introduction accessories, please check with your dealer. When you disconne ct the power cord of any accessory, grasp a nd pull the plug, not the cord. Services that need to be subscribed to are typically the short message service, Internet, and fax. After you have subscribed to t he service funtions, you can then activate these functions as described in this user â s guide. The manual activation commands for various services are not presented in this user â s guide (for example, using the and characters for activatin g or deactivating services). The Nokia 9210i Communicator, neve rtheless, is capable of handl ing commands given in that form. For these commands, please consult with your service providers. Because the number of special services depends on what se rvices are available in your home network, it is, unfortunately, impossible to provide a comprehensive list of the services and settings you need in this use r â s guide. Therefore, this user â s guide gives general information about additional services. Please contact your network operator for further information about the availability and the details of services in your home network. Tip: Write the information you obtain from your service provider down on the Settings Checklist for future reference. If a service requires separate phone numbers or specific settings, they must be stored in the settings of the communicator. For example: Sending and receiving short messages requires that this service is supported by the network you are using and activated for your SIM card, and that t he phone number of the message centre is stored in the settings of the SMS application. Internet access requires that data service is supporte d by the network you are using and activated for your SIM card. In addition, you must have obtained an Internet access point from an Internet service provider.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 7 Introduction Stickers on the sales package The stickers contain important information for service and customer support purposes. Keep these stickers in a safe and secure place. Attach the sticker to the page preceding the Table of Contents of this user â s guide. The correct place for the sticker is indicated with a frame. Attach the sticker to the Club Nokia I nvitation Card, if supplie d in the sales package. Access codes The Nokia 9210i Communicator uses several access codes to protect against unauthorised use of your communicator and SIM card. The access codes you need most often are: ⢠the lock code to lock up your communicator, and ⢠the PIN code, which is provided with the SIM card. IMPORTANT: The default lock code is 12345 . For security reasons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from the communicator. For more information on changing access codes, see section â Securityâ on page 218. Note that no passcode system can guarantee absolute prevention of unauthorised access. You can change access codes that are used by both the phone and the communicator interface via either of them, provided t hat the code can be changed. For further details on access codes, see â Securityâ on page 218.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 8 Introduction The Internet applications of the communicator use passwords and user names to protect against unauthorised use of the Internet and its services. These passwords are changed in the settings of the Internet applications. Contact information Tip: You can synchronise the contact information on your communicator with a corresponding application on a compatible PC. See the PC Suite Guide on the CD- ROM for details. All contact information that you store in the Contacts application, such as names, addresses, and phone numbers, goes into the Contacts directory. The phone, the communicator interface, and each of the applications have their own views of the Contacts directory. The information shown depends on the information the selected application can use. For example, when you are making a call via the phone, you can view the name and phone number(s) of the contact. Possible fax numbers, e-mail addresses, job titles, and so on, are not shown. GSM data transmission The Nokia 9210i Communicator employs the data transmission capabilities of the GSM network to send faxes, short messages, and e-mail, and to establish connections with remote computers. Wireless data connections can be made from most locations where your phone operates. However, it is recommended that you move the communicator to a location where the strongest possible wireless signal can be obtained. When the signal is strong, data transmission is efficient. In general, you should not expect the same performance from wireless data communications as from landline communications, due to the inherent characteristics of the wireless environment. The following factors may impa ir wireless connecti ons:
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 9 Introduction Noise Radio interference from electronic appliances and equipment, as well as from other phones will affect the quality of wireless data transmission. Cell handover As the phone user moves from one network cell to another, the signal strength of the channel drops and the wireless telephone exchange may handover the user to a different cell and frequency, where the signal is stronger. A cell handover may also occur when the user is stationary, due to varying wireless traffic loads. Such handovers may cause slight delays in the transmission. Electrostatic discharge A discharge of static electricit y from a finger or a conductor may cause erroneous functions in electronic devices. The discharge may result in distorted display and unstable software operation. Wireless connections may become unreliable, data may become corrupted, and the transmission halted. In this case you need to end the existing call (if any), close the cover and switch off the phone (if on) and remove the battery. Then replace the battery and establish a new wireless connection. Dead spots and dropouts Dead spots are areas where radio signals cannot be received. Dropouts occur when the phone user passes through an area where the radio signal is blocked or reduced by geographical features or large structures.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 10 Introduction Signal impairment Distance and obstacles can cause signals to become out-of-phase. They can also cause reflected signals. Both situations result in a loss of signal strength. Low signal strength Due to either distance or obstacles, the radio signal strength from a cell site may not be strong or stable enough to provide a reliable data connection for communication. Therefore, to ensure the best possible communication, remember the following point s: ⢠The data connection works best when the communicator is in a stationary position. Attempting wireless data communication while in a moving vehicle is not recommended. Fax transmission is more easily impaired than data or short message transmission. ⢠Do not place the communicator on a metal surface. ⢠Check that the signal strength on the communicator display is sufficient. Moving the communicator within a room, especially towards a window, may result in a stronger signal. If signals are not strong enough to support a voice call, data connection should not be attempted until you can find a location with better signal reception. Note: When the antenna is up , the signal is stronger.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 11 General information 2. General information This chapter explains how the communicator operates and how to supply power to the communicator. For information on first start-up and setup of your communicator, see the Getting Started Guide. Communicator display Figure 3 The communicator interface is turned on by opening the cover. The application that was active the last time the communicator was used is shown on the display. When you close the cover, the communicator interface turns off its display and saves all data. Scroll bar Commands Command bu ttons Search fie ld Indicato r ar e a Name and icon of appli cation Menu bar
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 12 General information Tip: When a command is dimmed, it cannot be used. The commands always correspond to the command buttons, as shown in Figure 3. The applications are run in the middle of the display. The indicators show application and system-related information. To move around a selected frame and select items, use the Arrows key at the low er right-hand corner of the keyboard. Where there is a search field at the bottom of the display, you can search for items by using the keyboard to enter text into the search field. Figure 4 If there is more than one frame in the view, the selected one is always highlighted. You can move from one frame to another by pressing the Tabulator key. See Figure 4. This item is selected. Details of item. The left ha nd fra me is highl ighted . Pr ess the Tab k ey to highl ight the righ t fram e. . The commands that you can apply .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 13 General information Dialogs and pages Figure 5 An example of a dialog which contains several pages is shown in Figure 5. Indicators The application icon and application name in the indicator area display the application you are in at the moment, as shown below . The icons that appear on the Inbox/Outbox indicator rows change according to the application and current situation. The battery level and signal strength indicators are the same as shown on the phone display when the phone is on. This is a page. This is a dialo g. Use the Arrows k ey to mo ve within a page. Another page. To go t o it, press the Menu k ey.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 14 General information Call status - You have a voice call, and the handsfree loudspeaker and microphone are on. - A voice call with the handsfree off. The loudspeaker and microphone are muted. - An open data connection, see the Internet chapter on page 131. - The communicator is receiving or sending a fax. - The communicator is trying to establ ish an infrared conne ction. - An infrared connection has been established. - The infrared connection is obstructed. - The communicator is connected to a PC. - The communicator is connected to a PC via cable. - The communicator is being used as a fax modem. - The communicator is in a profile, in this case in the â Meetingâ profile. See â Telephone Settings â on page 77. Applicat io n icon Application name Inbox/Ou tbox Signal streng th an d battery level Time
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 15 General information - Time. You can adjust time in the Clock application. See page 215. Inbox/Outbox - The inbox indicator informs you that you have received a fax, short message, or mail. - The document Outbox contains unsent messages. See â Outboxâ on page 163. Battery level - The battery is low and you should recharge it. - The battery is charging. The bar scrolls until the battery is fully charged. The outlet plug icon indicates that the communicator is connected to an external power source. - The battery is fully charged. All the four bars are displayed. Signal strength - The communicator is connected to a wireless network. Whe n all the four bars are shown, the wireless signal reception is good. If the signa l is weak, make sure the antenna is up. You ca n also try to improve the recepti on by moving the communicator slightly or by using it in the handsfree mode. - The phone is on, but it is outside network coverage. - The phone is off. You cannot make or receive calls, and you cannot receive messages with any of the communications applications (SMS, data, fax, or mail).
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 16 General information Communicator keyboard Figure 6 In addition to the normal character and number keys, the keyboard ha s a number of special keys, as shown in Figur e 6. Application buttons The buttons at the top of the keyboard start the corresponding applications or open application groups. The buttons are: Desk , Telep hone , Messaging , Interne t , Contacts , Calendar, Office and Extras . To use the applications When the cover is opened, the application th at was active the last time the communicator was used, is shown on the display.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 17 General information To switch to another application or application group, press the corresponding application button . You can even do this duri ng a call. You need not exi t an application be fore starting another. A ll inactive applica tions remain in the background until you activate them again. Note: When you open the WWW application, a ll other applications are cl osed to reserve memory for WWW. To send or receive calls or messages with any of the communications applications, remember that the phone must be switched on and in a service area with adequate wireless signal strength. Note: Information need not be specifically saved. When you press Close , switch to another application, or close the device cover, the Nokia 9210i Communicator saves all data. To create a keyboard shor tcut to a preferred link or application Some applications buttons like Office, Desk, and Extras do not open applications directly. However, you can specify an application in an application group as the preferred application or a link on Desk as the preferred link and access it directly from the keyboard. You can open a preferred application by clicking Ctrl the application bu tton. Example: If you make the Word Processor application preferred inside the Office application group, you can press Ctrl Office within any application to open Word Processor. To make an application preferred, open an application group (such as Office), press the Menu key, and select Tools > Preferre d application . Select the application from the list. See the exampl e in the column adjacent to this paragraph. To make a link preferred, open Desk, press the Menu key and select Tools > Preferred link ⦠Select th e link from the li st.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All r ights reserved. 18 General information Escape ( Esc) To cancel an action, you can either press the Esc key or Cancel . Pressing the Esc key also cancels and dismisses a dialog, and dismisses an information note. Tabulator or Tab You can use the Tab (Tabulator) key to move from one frame to another. When writing or editing documents, the Tab key moves the cursor to the next tab stop. Shift The Shift key is used togethe r with letter keys to insert capital letters and used together with number keys to inse rt special characters. The Shift key does not need to be held down when pressing a key: pressing first Shift and then a letter or number key generates an uppercase or special character. In combination with Control key and a particular letter key the Shift key generates shortcut commands. See â Shortcutsâ on page 27. In writing and editing text, the Shift key and the Arrows key can be used to select text, see â Shortcutsâ on page 27. Control (Ctrl) Pressed together with other keys on the keyboard, the control key generates shortcut commands which can be used in viewing and writing text. See â Short cutsâ on page 27.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 19 General information Character (Chr) Tip: You can use the character key with other keys to zoom the view and activate or deactivate infrared. Press the character key to open a character table where you can select special characters. Press the character key together with characters and commands that are shown in green colour on the keyboard to access them. Press the character key, keep it pressed down and tap a letter key to access accented and other special letters. Help ( ) For online help at any time, press the key on the communicator keyboard. For more information, see â Online Help â on page 3. Menu Tip: Using the menu key, the Zoom option is sometimes available. It allows you to magnify the view on display. Pressing the Menu key reveals options. The options available depend on the application you are in. Use the Arrows key to move to the desired option and press Select . The chosen option only affects the item that is currently selected, open, or being sent. The Menu may also contain the generic option Settings . Arrows key Tip: In the WWW browser application, use the Arrows key to move a pointer around the display. See page 146. The Arrows key can be used to move the cursor or selected frame.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 20 General information Enter When the cursor is shown, pressing Enter moves the cursor to the beginning of the next text line or adds a new line. Enter can also be used to open folders, applications, and documents. When a command is underlined, you can press Enter instead of the command button. When information notes are shown, press Enter instead of OK. In options and settings, when a value can be toggle d, you may press Enter instead of Change . Connectors The Nokia 9210i Communicator can be connected to a variety of devices. See Figure 7. Figure 7 Infrared connection Charger connecti on RS232 adapt er cable DLR-2L or headset HD C-8L connectio n
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 21 General information Use the infrared port for connect ing to a compatible PC, printer, digital camera, or another communicator. To charge the battery Note: See important safety information on battery usage on page 22. Tip: To check the current battery level, see t he battery indicator on the communicator or phone display. 1 Connect the charger cable to the bottom of the communicator, as shown in Figure 8. Figure 8 2 Connect the charger to the proper voltage AC wall outlet. While charging is in progress, the battery level indicator scrolls on the phone display. 3 When the battery is fully charged, the bars stop scrolling and four bars are displayed. You may now remove the charger plug from the communicator. Note: You can use all the features of the communicator during charging.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 22 General information When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of operation time remain, a warning tone will sound, and the message BATTERY IS LOW will be repeated at regular intervals on the phone display. When the charge level becomes too low for operation, the RECHARGE BATTERY message will be displayed, accompanied by a warning tone. If you do not connect the commun icator to a charger, the communicator switches itself off. Note: When you connect a communicator with a fully discharged battery to a charger, it will take 30-60 seconds before the CHARGING message appears on the display and the battery indicator bar starts scrolling. After that, it may take 10-30 seconds before you can switch the phone on. Battery information Tip: Read this section for information on how to prolong the life of your battery. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery which is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on bottom of the battery) for example when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 1 5 ð C and 25 ð C (59 ð F and 77 ð F). A communicator with a hot or cold battery may temporarily not work, even when the batte ry is fully charged. Batteries' performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 23 General information Do not dispose of batteries in a fire ! Dispose of batteries according to local regulations (e.g. recycling). Do not dispose as household waste. Note that a new bat tery â s full performance is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles! The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the operating time (talk-time and standby time) is noticeably shorter than normal, it is ti me to buy a new battery. Use only batteries approved by the communicator manufacturer and recharge your battery only with the chargers approved by the manufacturer. Unplug the charger when not in use. Do n ot leave the battery connect ed to a charger for longe r than a week, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused a fully charged battery will discharge itself over time. Temperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Battery operation time is affected by the following: whether both the phone and the communicator interface are on, radio signal strength, various phone settings, and the length of the screen blanker period. It is always recommended to keep a charged battery in the communicator. Keeping the battery charged maximises the lifetime of the backup battery supplying power to the real-time clock of the communicator. In case the backup battery is drained, it will be automatically charged the nex t time a charged battery is reconnected to the communicator. Always close the device cover be fore removing the battery. Closing the cover will save all data.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 24 General information Note: The battery does not fit into place if the SIM card is not correctly installed. Do not force the battery into plac e! Check that you have inserted the SIM card as described in the Getting Started Guide. If the SIM card is incorrectly instal led, remove it by pullin g it out of the slot, and insert it aga in. Memory card Tip: To protect the memory card with a password, see â To lock a memory card â on page 212. You can use a memory card to manage your documents, contacts databases, applications, backups, and so on. Use the items on the memory card in the same way as corresponding items on the communicator. You can, for example, install and remove software to and from the memory card with the Install/Remove software application, and send messages to contacts in the contacts directory of the memory card. Note: Do not remove the memory card in the middle of an operation. Note: If you want to use a Nokia 9210 Communicator â s memory card in your Nokia 9210i Communicator, you must first format the card. Note that formatting deletes all information from the memor y card. To format the memory card, open the File manager application in Office and press the Menu key. Select Memory ca rd > Format memory c ard ⦠, and press Format . However, you can use a Nokia 9210 Communicator â s memory card in your Nokia 9210i Communicator temporarily for copying files between the memory card and the device. If you do so, restart your Communicator after inserting the original memory card by removing the battery and replacing it again.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 25 General information To insert a memory card 1 Close the device cover and make sure that the phone is switched off. If it is on, press . 2 Open the hatch at the back of the communicator, using a minimum of two fingers - one finger on each si de of the hatch. 3 Slide the memory card under the memory card holder as shown in Figure 9. Make sure that the gold contacts of the card are facing down. Figure 9 4 When you have secured the card in place, close the hatch. WARNING: Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 26 General information General features To select several items at once Where multi-selection is available, you can select several items at once. The selected items are highlighted. The commands you use affect all the selec ted items. Multi-selection works in most lists. To select items one by one, scroll to the item and pres s and hold down Ctrl. While pressing down Ctrl, scroll to each item you want to select and press the space bar. To select a larger se t of consecutive items, paint the items by pressing and holdi ng Shift using the â§ and ⨠arrows on the Arrows key. Multi-selection is cleared when you press the Arrows key. Special characters The character key Chr on the communicator keyboard is used to create cha racters that are not included on the keyboard. The character key can always be used when you are able to enter characters from the keyboard. Note: Some special characters may get distorted when sent out of your communicator. This happens, for example, with mail or short messages, and is because of differences in network protocols. To insert special cha racters from the char acter table 1 Press and release the Chr key. A dialog opens. 2 Press the Menu key to select the page with the character you want to insert. 3 Select the special character or characters, then press Insert .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 27 General information To insert special charac ters from the ke yboard There are two ways to insert special characters directly from the keyboard. To insert characters printed on the keys in green, press and hold the Chr key and simultaneously press a key with a special character printed in green. To generate special characters by using certain unmarked keys, for example, â aâ and â eâ , do as follows: 1 Press and hold the Chr key and simultaneously press a letter key. The first special character matching the letter key is displayed. 2 Continue to hold down the Chr key and press the letter key again. The second special character is shown in place of the first one, and so on, until the first character is shown again. Press Shift or the Caps lock key to change the case of the special character. Shortcuts Tip: Many shortcuts a re also displayed next to menu commands in applications. There are several shortcuts you can u se in the document applications. The shortcuts vary depending on the application used. The following table lists some of the available shortcuts: Shortcut Function Ctrl a Ctrl c Ctrl x Ctrl v Ctrl z Selects all Copies selected text Cuts selected text P astes selected text Undoes (the last action)
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 28 General information Note: For information on the shortcuts available for the WWW application, see the Internet section of this guide. Ctrl b Ctrl i Ctrl u Applies bold Applies italics Applies underlining Ctrl t Ctrl d Full screen mode (if available) Deletes files, messages, shortcuts and other items. Ctrl p Print or Properties Ctrl n Ctrl o Ctrl e Creates a new file Open Close Ctrl s Ctrl Shift s Save Save as Chr left/right arrow (on Arrows key) Moves the cursor to the beginning or end of the line Chr up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Moves up or down a page Chr Ctrl up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Moves to start or end of document Shift Ctrl left/right arrow (on Arrows key) Selects the previous or next word Shift right/left/up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Selects one text character or line Shift Chr up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Selects text, page by page, inside a document Shortcut Function
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 29 General information To save files When you close a new file for the first time, or want to save it, you will be asked to enter a name for the file and to identify a folder in which it should be saved. Figure 10 The following commands become available in the dialog: OK - Confirms the name of the document and saves the document. Browse - Opens a dialog in which you can browse for a location where you save your file. Change format - Opens a list of formats. You can now change the forma t of the document being saved. Cancel - No saving is done and the dialog is closed. Note: If you want to quit the application, but you do not want to save the file, press the Menu key and select File > Discard changes , then close the file.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 30 General information To send documents In addition to sending messages in the Messaging application, you can also send documents out of the communicator in the applications where the Send function is available on the Menu list. As a fax - You can send th e document as a f ax. As a mail - You can send the document as a ma il message. As a short message - You can send the document as a short message. Via infrared - You can send th e document via infrared. Note: When you open a document, the document is opened in the appropriate editor or viewer. The commands vary according to the editor/viewer. To search for text You can search for text strings in t he applications where this function is available on the Menu list. 1 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Find ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Type the text string in the search fi eld and press Find . 3 Once a text string match is found, it is highlighted. To find out if there are more of the same text strings in the document, press Find next . 4 To refine the search, press Options . A dialog opens where you can define options of Case sensitive or Match whole word . To replace te xt 1 Press the Menu key, and select Edit > Find ⦠.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 31 General information Press Replace . 2 Type the t ext string t o be replaced in the Find: field and the text you want to replace it with in Replace with: field. 3 For more search and replace options press Options . In the Find options dialog you can select a case sensitive search or a search only matching whole words and not parts of a word. You can also choose to replace all occurrences of a text in the document without fu rther confirmation. Tip: Replace all is available only if you h ave selected Yes in the Replace all dialog. 4 Press Replace or Replace all . To check spelling Note: You can spell check only English text and words. You can check words and text for spelling in the applications where Spell chec k ⦠is available on the Menu list. To be able t o use this function, you first nee d to install the Spell checker from the CD-ROM found in the sales package of your communicator. For details, see â To install software from the CD-ROM â on page 34. Tip: You can select individual words to spell check. Otherwise the whole text is searched and spell checked. 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Spell check ⦠. I f the Spell checker comes across a word it does not recognise, a dialog opens. 2 You can type in the correction in the correction field. Or, move to the Suggestions field and press the Tab or Enter keys to open a list of suggestions. 3 Select a word from the list of suggestions, then press Replace to accept the correction or suggestion. 4 If during step 2 you want to add an unrecognised word to the dictionary, press Add .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 32 General information To print You can print various items, such as documents, pictures, faxes, mails, and short messages. Refer to the user â s guide of the printer for detailed safety instructions on the printing device. To view or modify the page setup, press the Menu key and select File > Printing > Page setup ⦠To preview the document before printing it, press the Menu key and select File > Printing > Print pr eview To print a document or a file, 1 Press the Menu key and select File > Printi ng > Print ⦠. A note appears, showing the print range, connection type, and printer used. 2 Press Print . A dialog opens. To change the printing options, press Options . 3 To preview what you are about to print, press Print preview . A dialog opens. To define page setup, press Page setup . Figure 11
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 33 General information When printing via infrared, make sure that the infrared port of the communicator faces the infrared port of the printer. Keep the infrared connection clear. If the connection is obstructed for too long, for example, if something is moved between the infrared sensors or the communicator is moved, printing is interrupted. For details on infrared connection, see page 35. Log Log contains information about the communication history of your communicator. The log shows all, or certain types of communication events in chronological order. With log files you can monitor your communications, use the information to create or complete contact cards, or reply directly to the sender in the log. Tip: The shortcut to open the log is Shift Ctrl L. Figure 12 Tip: To change the categories Date and time and Duration to Subject and Status , press < and > on the Arrows key. To access the log You can access the log from the Menu of several applications. Press the Menu key and select Tools > Log . To make use of an individual communication event 1 Choose a log event and press Use . The command buttons change.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 34 General information Tip: A communication type can have one of the following delivery statuses: pending , delivered , failed , sent , not sent , and scheduled . 2 You can now do the following: send a fax or short message to the contact, call the contact, or add the contact to your Contacts directory. Check the comma nd buttons for available options. To view only certain communication types 1 Press Filter by type to choose a communication type you want to view. Press Filter by direction to choose whether you want to view communicatio ns originated by you or by the remote party. 2 Select from the options. 3 Press OK . To erase the contents of the log Log events remain in the log database for only a set number of days after which they are automatically erased to free memory on your communicator. To redefine the number of days, press the Menu key and select Tools > Log duration ⦠. 1 To erase some or all the contents of the log, press the Menu key and select File > Clear log ⦠. 2 Type in the date. All log events with an earlier date will be removed from the log. 3 Press Clear . To install software from the CD-ROM The applications and files on the communicator â s CD-ROM are ready to be installed or moved to the communicator. Proceed with installation as follows: 1 Ensure that you have installed PC Suite on your computer. You can find this program on the CD-ROM in the sales package.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 35 General information Tip: For more information about PC Suite, see the PC Suite Guide on the CD-ROM. 2 Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 3 Either: Connect your communicator to your computer using the adapter cable supplied in the sales package. Or: Prepare the communicator and the compute r for an infrared connection. For more information, see â To activate the infrared connection â on page 35. 4 If the CD-ROM user interface doe s not open automatically, double-click the file â Nokia9210i.e xe â in the CD-ROM file structure. 5 Select a program you want to install from the CD-ROM user int erface and click â Installâ . Tip: See the Add on Applications Guide for information on other software available for your communicator. Note: Remember to install applications in the same language as your communicator. Use a memory card to gain more space for the different applications and files on the CD-ROM. Note: For information on the installable applications, see the Software on CD- ROM Guide on the CD-ROM. To activate the infrared connection Tip: To activate the infrared, you can also press the Menu key and select Tools > Receive via infrare d . 1 Make sure that the infrared port of the communicator faces the infrared port of the other device. 2 To activate the infrared connection, press Chr (the key with the infrared symbol; this key is on the right-hand side of the keyboard, next to the Enter key). 3 To end the infrared connection, press Chr again.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 36 General information To transfer data from other devices IMPORTANT! Do NOT use the method described in section â To back up and restore data to and from a memory card â on page 211 to restore data you have backed up with Nokia 9210 Communicator to Nokia 9210i Communicator. Use PC Suite instead. Nokia 9110/9110i Communicator (Data mover) Data mover transfers data from the Nokia 9110 /9110i Communicator to the Nokia 9210/9210i Communicator. Via infrared you can transfer contact cards, calenda r events, notes, and Internet access settings, for example. You can either choose to transfer all data or define the categories of data that you want to transfer. Note: You cannot transf er your WWW or WAP bookmarks to the Nokia 9210i Communicator with Data mover. To open Data mover, pres s the Extras application button, scroll with the Arrows key, and select Data mover. To transfer all data 1 In the main view, press Transfer now . 2 Activate the infrared connection on the Nokia 9110/9110i Communicator. The transfer begins. All items are tran sferred to the Nokia 9210i Communicator. To transfer selected data Tip: Alternatively, press the Menu key and select Tools > Options ⦠. 1 In the main view, press Options . A dialog with four pages opens.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 37 General information 2 On each page, press Change to select or desele ct the data categories to transfer to the Nokia 9210i Communicator. To select or deselect all items on a page, press Select all or Unselect all . W hen you are ready, press Do ne . . 3 In the main view, press Transfer now . Activate the infrared connection on the Nokia 9110/9110i Communicator. The transfer begins. All items are transferred to the Nokia 9210i Commu nicator. 4 When the transfer is compl ete, press OK to close the application. 5 If the transfer fails, a dialog is displayed. Press OK to tr y again. Note: You can cancel the t ransfer process at any stage when the Cancel command button is available. Compatible Nokia phones, personal organisers, and PCs Tip: To transfer data from other personal organisers, first synchronise data between the device and the PC application and then synchronise data between the PC application and the Nokia 9210i appl ication. To transfer dat a from the Nokia 5100/61 00/7100/8 200/8800/ 9110/9110 i mobile phone, your laptop or desktop PC, or the PalmPilot personal organiser to your Nokia 9210i Communicator, see the PC Suite guide on the sales package CD-ROM. Note: To transfer contacts from your old SIM card to your Nokia 9210i Communicator, see â To move or copy contacts from a SIM card â on page 96.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 39 Phone 3. Phone Figure 13 With the cover phone you can make, receive, and manage calls, send and receive short messages, search for phone numbers, change profiles and define many settings. For more complicated tasks like sending long DTMF sequences or modifying phone settings, use the Telephone application. See the Telephone chapter, starting on page 69. Phone Earpiece Front Back Microphone
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 40 Phone Selection keys When operating the phone, press keys one at a time. The phone keypad is not functional when the cover of the communicator is open. Switches the phone on and off. Switches between profile s. See â Profile settings â on page 78. Scroll through menus, submenus or settings. If there are no active calls, you can use the scroll keys to browse through the phone book. When a call is active, you can adjust the volume level by pressing the scroll keys. Tip: To call your voice mailbox, press and hold . Dials a phone number and answers a call. Sends the ongoing call to hold if pressed during a call. In the standby mode shows the list of the most recently dialled nu mbers. Ends any active call, cancels a dialled call, or clears the display. 0...9 The number and alphabet keys. Tip: If you have subscribed to two phone lines, you can switch between them by pressing and holding . Used for creating functions. The function of these two selection keys depends on the text shown on the bottom of the display. See Figure 14. Note: Hold the phone as you would any other mobile phone with the antenna pointed up and over your shoulder. Note: As with any other radio transmitting devi ce, do not touch the antenna unnecess arily when th e phone is switched on . Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may caus e the phone to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 41 Phone Warning: Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. To use the selection keys Figure 14 Example: Pressing the selection key under the text Menu gains access to the menu functions. Selection keys are the keys located just below the right and left corners of the cover display. Commands on the display vary according to the situation and previous selections. Tip: A press of the key will return the display to stand-by mode. Often you must confirm the selecti on by pressing OK . If available, you can use Back command to return to the previous menu level without making any changes. Display indicators The display indicators inform you about the current operation of the phone. The indicators described below are shown when the phone is ready for use, with no characters entered on the display. NETWORK NAME or LOGO - The wireless network you are currently using.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 42 Phone and bar - The current signal strength at your location. The more bars visible, the stronger the signal. and bar - Battery charge level. The more bars visible, the more charge the re is in the battery. - The phone keypad is locked or the lock code is active. - The phone will not ring to notify you of an incoming call. - You have received one or several new voice messages. - You have received one or several new short messages. - You have received one or several new faxes. - Infrared transmission is active. - Call diverting is active. To make a call To make and receive calls, ⢠the phone must be switched on, ⢠the communicator must have a valid SIM card fitted, and ⢠you must be located in a service area of the wireless network. Tip: When a call is active, you can use the and keys to lower or raise the volume level of the earpiece. 1 Key in the area code and the phone number of the person you wish to call. If you make a mistake, you can remove the digit s one at a time by pressing Clear repeatedly. To clear the whole display, press and hold Clear . 2 Press to dial the phone number. 3 To end the call, press . Note: The microphone and earpiece are on the rear of the device.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 43 Phone International calls When making international calls, start by pressing twice quickly. The internation al call characte r â â appears on the display, which informs the network centre to select the inte rnational dial ling prefix. After this you can enter the country or region code, area code and phone number. Note: Calls described here as international may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. To search for phone numbers You can retrieve phone numbers from me mory by the name with which the phone number was stored. For more information, see â To call a number in the Telephone directory â on page 70. Tip: To choose which memory to use, press Names , scroll to Options and press Se lect twice. Scroll to choose Device , SIM card , or a contacts database you have created and press Select . 1 Press Names . 2 Scroll to Search and press Select . 3 Key in the name of the person whom you want to call, or the first letter(s) of the name. 4 Press Search . The name closest to the keyed characters will appear. 5 If the name found was not the one you searched for, scroll through the names with and until you reach the correct one. 6 Press Details to view the details of the highlighted name, or press to call the person. If the person has several numbers, scroll the selection frame onto the one you want and press .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 44 Phone To speed dial Speed dialling is a handy way to call frequently-used phone numbers. You can define up to eight speed dial numbers in the communicator memory. For information on how to set speed dials, see page 81. There are two ways to speed dial: Tip: Pressing and holding dials your voice mailbox number. ⢠Press and hold the number of the speed dial location where you have stored the phone number. For this method to work, you must enable speed dialling, see â Call settings (3-1) â on page 56. Example: Press 2 if the speed dial location for the phone number is 2. ⢠Key in the number of the speed dial location where you have stored t he phone number. Press . The phone will display the phone numbe r briefly, and then dial it. Note: Speed dialling is not possible during a call. To call service numbers Your service provider may have stored service numbers on your SIM card. For more information, see â To call a number in the Telephone directory â on page 70. 1 Press Names . 2 Scroll to Service Nos. and press Select . 3 Scroll to the service number an d press to call the n umber. To send DTMF tones If you need to send l ong DTM F sequen ces, i t is mor e con venient to sen d them vi a the communicator interface, see â To send DTMF tones during a callâ on page 77.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 45 Phone Tip: For an expl anation of DTMF tones, see the Glossary on page 270. 1 Make the call to the desired phone number. 2 Key in the digits you want to send as DTMF tones. The digits are sent one by one to th e networ k. To answer a call Tip: To change your ringing tone, see â To attach a ringing tone â on page 99. When you receive a call, the phone gives a ringing tone and the text Call flashes on the display. If silent-profile is active, only the keypad and display light will flash. If the caller can be identified, the caller â s name or phone number, and the text Calling , will be displayed. Tip: You can answer the call even while usin g the search or menu functions. 1 To answer the call, press . If you do not wan t to answer the call, press . The caller will he ar the alerting tone cha nge to a bu sy tone. To mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, press Mute . Tip: If the Divert if busy is activated to divert th e calls, for example, to your voice mailbox, rejecting an incoming call will also divert the call. See â To divert voice calls â on page 83. 2 To end the call, press . To manage calls There are a number of functions you can use during a call. Many of the in-call options are network services. To access the functions, press Options during a call. Some or all of the following in-call options may become available: Answer - Allows you to answer an incoming call. Reject - Allows you to reject an incoming call.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 46 Phone Tip: If you start making a new call during the curre nt call, the current call is put on hold automatically. Hold / Activate - Hold allows you to put the current call on hold. To activate the original call agai n, select Activate . New call - Puts the active call on hold and dials a new phone number. Send DTMF - Transmits DTMF tones. See â To send DTMF tones during a call â on page 77. End active call - Ends the active call. End all calls - Ends both the active and held call. Contacts - Opens the phone book. Menu - Opens the Me nu. Mute / Unmute - Switches the microphone of the communicator off or on. If the communicator is connected to a handsfree car kit, Mute also turns off the microphone of the car kit. Swap - Allows you to alternate betwe en two calls, an act ive and a held call . Transfer - Enables you to connect two voice calls together and disconnect yourself from both calls. See â To transfer calls â on page 76. Conference - If one call is active and anoth er call is on hold, th is option merges them into a conference call . Private - During a conference call, Pri vate a llows you to converse privately with a selected participant. Keypad lock The keypad lock makes accidental key presses ineffective.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 47 Phone When the keypad is locked, you can answer calls normally by pressing . During a voice call, the keypad is unlocked and the communicator can be operated in the usual way. After the call, the keypad is automatically locked again. The keypad will be unlocked automatically when the communicator is connected to a car kit. When the communicator is removed from the car kit, without being switched off, the keypad will be locked automatically again. To lock the keypad Press Menu and then the key within 3 seconds. Note: While the keypad is locked, the icon and the Unlock command are displayed. To unlock Press Unlock and then the key within 3 seconds. Note: When the phone is locked, cal ls may be possible to the emergency number programmed into your phone (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). To change profiles Example: If you use the Meeting profile in a meeting the phone rings only once so as not to disturb others. You can use the Profiles key to adjust phone tones for the various operating environments of the communicator. One profile is always in use. For more detailed information on the various profiles, how to adjust the settings and so on, see â Profile settings â on page 78.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 48 Phone Tip: You can also use the scroll key and OK t o s e l e c t a profile. 1 Press the key on the keypad. 2 Press the key again until the selection frame is on the desired profile. 3 To select the profile , press and hold . To view help Most menu functions are provided with a he lp text, which giv es a brief description of the displayed function. 1 Scroll to the menu function about which you want help. 2 Wait for a few seconds. The first page of the help text will appear. The text scrolls automatically. If you want to scroll it manually, press the scroll keys or More . 3 To exit help, pre ss Back . To use the menus Tip: You can access the menu functions even during a call. The phone offers a set of menu functions that allow you to tailor the phone for your particular use. The menus and submenus can be accessed by scrolling the menu or using the appropriate shortcuts. To scroll the menus 1 Press Menu . 2 Press either or to scroll the list of menus until you reach the desired menu. 3 Press Select to access the menu. If the menu contains submenus, reach the one you want with either or and press Select .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 49 Phone 4 To return to the previous menu level, press Back . To exit the menu without changing any settings and to return to the stand-by mode, press . To use menu shortcuts All the menus, submenus and settings are numbered. Th is number is shown in the upper right corner of the display. Example: To set the Anykey answer on, first press Menu and then press the numbers 3, 1, 1 , and 1 in sequence. 1 Press Menu . 2 Key in the index number of the menu you wish to access. Menu structure The following menu table lists the names of the main menus and their submenus. Some menus are subject to the availability of th e service in your area. Thi rd-level menus are not shown. Menu Function Submenus MENU 1 MESSAGES 1 Write message , 2 Inbox , 3 Drafts, 4 Sent , 5 Cell broadcast, 6 Se rvice command editor , 7 V oice messages MENU 2 CALL REGISTER 1 Missed calls , 2 Received calls, 3 Dialled numbers , 4 Clear recent call lists, 5 Call duration , 6 Call costs MENU 3 SETTINGS 1 Call settings , 2 Phone settings , 3 Securit y sett ings , 4 Restore factory settings MENU 4 CALL DIVERT 1 Divert all voice calls , 2 Divert if busy , 3 Divert if not answered , 4 Divert if out of reach , 5 Divert if not available 6 Dive rt all fax calls , 7 Divert all data calls , 8 Cancel all diverts
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 50 Phone Messages (Menu 1) The Short Message Service (SMS) is a network service which enables you to receive and send short messages. Contact your service provider for details. Write message (1-1) In this menu you can write and send a short message. Inbox (1-2) Tip: To change the tone of an incoming SMS message, see â Profile settings â on page 78. When you receive a short message or picture message, a text indicating the number of messages that have been received and the indicator will appear on the display and a tone wil l sound, unless the communicator is set to a sil ent profile. A note is also shown when you receive faxes or mail. To read received faxes or ma il, you must use the respective applications of the communicator interface. Tip: You can call the phone number while viewing the message by pressing twice. 1 Press Read twice to view the message, or press Exit to view it later. If you view a message later, press Menu > 1 > 2 , scroll to the desired message and press Read to view the message. 2 While viewing the message, press Options to scroll through the list of options and press Select at the highlighted option to se lect it. The available options are: Delete - Erases the selected message from the memory. Reply - Opens the editor for a reply. Key in the reply and press Options > Send . MENU 5 INFRARED MENU 6 SIM SERVICES Only available, if supported by your SIM card.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 51 Phone Forward - Asks for the number where the message should be forwarded. Enter the number and press OK to forward the message. Edit - Opens the curre nt message in the editor where you can modify the message. Use number - Copies the phone number from the message a nd moves it onto the phone display. You can now call th e number with . Details - Shows the sender â s name and number, the date and time the message was sent, and the number of the message centre. Drafts (1-3) In this menu you can view, modify, and send your draft short messages. Sent (1-4) In this menu you can view and modify the short messages you have sent. Cell broadcast (1-5) This network service allows you to receive SMS messages on topics that you have predefined on the communicator interface. See â Cell broadcast â on page 237. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. On - Sets the information message reception on. Off - Turns the information message reception off.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 52 Phone Service command editor (1-6) Tip: These re quests a re also known as USSD commands. In this submenu, you can send service requests, such as activation commands for network services, to your service provider. For more information, contact your service provider. Voice messages (1-7) Listen to vo ice messages (1 -7-1) Tip: To call your voice mailbox quickly, press and hold . When you enter this submenu, the phone automatically calls your voice mailbox at the phone number stored in menu 1-7-2. If required, key in the access code for your mailbox or answering machine when the connection has been made. If the voice mailbox number has not been saved before, the phone asks for you to save it first. Note that the voice mailbox is a network service and you may ne ed to subscribe to it first. Voice mailbox number (1-7-2) In this submenu, you can store and edit your voice mailbox number. A voice mailbox can be a network service or your personal answering machine. For more information and for the voice mailbox number, contact your service provider.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 53 Phone Call register (Menu 2) Missed calls (2-1) Tip: Received calls and Missed calls functions are network services which work only in networks that allow you to view the caller â s phone number. Lists calls that you have missed. Note: The communicator only registers missed calls when the phone is switched on and within network coverage. Received calls (2-2) Lists calls that you have received. Dialled numbers (2 -3) Lists calls that you have dialled. Clear recent call lists (2-4) Select wh ich calls you want to era se. The opt ions are All / Missed / Dialled / Receive d . IMPORTANT: The phone numbers are erased without warning. You can not undo the operation. Call duration (2-5) Shows the duration of your outgoing and incoming calls, and allows you to reset the timers.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 54 Phone Last call duration (2-5-1) Shows the duration of the last outgoing or incoming call in hours, minutes or seconds, for example, 0:02:15. All calls â duration (2-5-2) Shows the total duration of a ll calls made and received with any SIM card tha t you have used with the communicator. Received calls â duration ( 2-5-3) Shows the total duration of calls received with any SIM card that you have used with the communicator. Dialled calls â duration (2-5-4) Shows the total duration of calls made with any SIM card that you have used with the communicator. Clear time rs (2-5 -5) Asks for the lock code and then resets all timers. You cannot undo the reset operation. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and services by your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off for billing, taxes and so forth.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 55 Phone Call costs (2-6) This network service allows you to check various call costs. The costs are shown in charging units or unit s of currency that you have set in Menu 2-6-3-2. The call cost is shown for each SIM card separately. For these settings you need the PIN2 code, the PIN code, or no code at all, depending on your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. Last call cost/units (2-6-1) & All calls â cost /units (2-6-2) Last call cost/units (2-6-1) shows the cost or units of the last, or current call. All calls â cost/units (2-6-2) shows the total cost or units of all calls made with the current SIM card. Whichever menu you choose, press Options to access the fol lowing three submenus: Clear cost counters (2-6-3-1) Resets all cost counters. You cannot undo the reset operation. Show cost / S how in unit s (2-6-3 -2) You may select whether the call costs and call cost limits will be displayed in currency or charging units. Contact your network service provider for the prices of charging units. The display shows the option that is currently not selected. To select the option shown on the display, press Select . If you selected Show c ost , key in the charging unit price. Use or to insert a decimal point. Next, enter the currency name.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 56 Phone Call cost limit (2-6-3-3) This function allows you to limit the total costs of outgoing calls to a specified number of charging units or un its of currency that you have set i n Menu 2-6-3-2. To turn the limit on, select On . Key in the cost limit in charging units or currency units. If you define the limit in currency units, you can press or to insert a decimal point. After the limit has been turned on, the number of remaining uni ts is shown on the display when in stand-by mode. When all units have been used, no calls can be made. To turn the limit off, select Off . Note: When no more charging units or currency units are left, calls may only be possible to the emergency number programmed into your communicator (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Note: The actual time invoiced for calls and by your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off for billing, and so forth. Settings (Menu 3) Call settings (3-1) Anykey answer (3-1-1 ) When selected, you can answer an incoming call by pressing any key on the keypad, except , , or Mute selection key.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 57 Phone Automatic redial (3-1-2) When this function is selected and you call a number that is busy or does not answer, the phone will at tempt to call the n umber until the call is connected. Th e maximum number of redials is 10. Press to end the call attempt s. Speed dialling (3-1-3) When selected, you can dial phon e numbers stored in the speed dial locations by simply pressing and holding the assigned speed dial ke y. See âÂÂSpe ed dials â on page 81 for more information. Call waiting service (3-1-4) Call waiting is a network service. Contact your operator for subscription. For more information see â To answer a waiting call â on page 76. Choose Activate to enable cal l waiting, Cancel to disable call waiting, or Check status to show whether call waiting is active and for which call types. My number sending (3-1-5) This network service allows you to set your phone number either to be displayed or to be hidden from the person you are calling. Set by network rese ts the phone to the default setting, On or Off , that you have agreed upon with your service provider. Summary after call (3-1-6) If you set this function to On , the phone will briefly display the duration and cost (network service) after each call.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 58 Phone Line for outgoin g calls (3-1-7) If your network supports this service, you can have two phone lines in your communicator. You can select which line you want to use for making calls. For more information, see â Line sele ction page â on page 90. Phone settings (3-2) Clock (3-2-1) You can select whether the time is shown on the display. Cell info display (3-2-2) When this function is selected, the phone will indicate when it is used in a network cell based on Micro-Cellular Network technology. MCN technology increases the capacity of wireless networks in urban areas. The setting will remain in effect even if the SIM card is changed or the phone is switched off. Welcome note (3-2-3) You can write a message of up to 44 characters which appears on the display when you switch on the phone. Network selection (3-2-4) The network to which you are connected can be selected either automatically or manually.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 59 Phone If you select Automatic , the phone automatically selects one of the wireless networks available in your area. Outside your home network service area, the communicator will select one of the networks that has a roaming agreement with your home network. If you select Manual , the phone will show a list of available networks and you can select the network you wish to use if this network has a roaming agreement with your home network service operator. If no such agreement is in force, the text No access will be displayed and you must select another network. Confirm SIM service actions (3 -2-5) You can set the phone to show you the confirmation messages sent between your phone and the network when you are using the SIM services by selecting the option Yes wit hin the menu 3-2-5 (Confirm SIM service actions). Security settings (3-3) The purpose of the security system is to prevent unauthorised use or altering of important settings. In most cases, activating or changing the security options requires the appropriate access code. See â Securityâ on page 218. Note: When security features that restrict calls are in use (call barring, closed user group and fixed dialling, or system lock etc.), calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some net works (e.g. 112 or other official emergency numbers). PIN code reques t (3-3-1) The options are On an d Off . See â Securityâ on page 218.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 60 Phone Call barring service (3-3-2) This network service allows you to restrict incoming calls to, and outgoing calls from your phone. You need a barring password to be able to use this function. Contact your network service provider to get a barring password. The options are: Outgo ing calls / Internatio nal call s/ International calls except t o home country / Incoming calls / Incoming calls when abroad / Cancel all barrings . Closed user gr oup (3-3-3) This network service allows you to set the communicator to accept calls to and from a selected group of people. For details on creating a user group and activating this service, contact your network service provider. Preset - Resets the phone to use a use r group the SIM card owner has agreed upon with the network service provider. On - Uses a particular user group. Calls can be made to or received from the members of the selected group only. Off - Calls can be made and received in the normal way. You can use this option only if you are entitled to do so. Lock if SIM changed (3-3-4) You can protect your phone against unauthorised us e with the lock code. To do this, enter your lock code and select the option Yes . For details, see â Securityâ on page 218. Note that no passcode system can guarantee absolute prevention of unauthorised access.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 61 Phone Change of access codes (3-3-5) In this submenu, you can change the lock code, the PIN code, the PIN2 code and the barring password. See â Securityâ on page 218. The access codes may only include the digits 0 to 9. Lock s ystem (3-3-6) Tip: You can also press Menu and # to enter your lock code. In this submenu, you can lock the communicator. Pr ess Select and enter your lock code. The communicator locks immediately. When your communicator is locked, you can make emergency calls to predefined numbers using the cover phone. You can also answer incoming calls and make emergency calls using the Telephone application. All other actions are blocked. Even if you remove and replace the battery and switch on the phone, the communicator will remain locke d. To unlock the communicator, press Unlock and enter the lock code. For more information on locking and other security options, see â Securityâ on page 218. IMPORTANT: The default lock code is 12345 . For security reasons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from the communicator. For information on changing the lock code, see section â Securityâ on page 218. Note that no passcode system can guarantee absolute prevention of unauthorised access. Restore factory settings (3-4) You can reset some of the menu settings to their ori ginal values. You ne ed the lock code for this function. This function will not affect stored phone numbers and names, access codes, earpiece volume setting, call timers, cost counters, selected application tones or SMS messages.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 62 Phone Call divert (Menu 4) Tip: The icon is shown in the stand-by mode when you have activated the Divert all voice calls . This network service allows you to direct your incoming voice calls to another phone number when you do not want to be disturbed, or when the phone is switched off or outside the network coverage area. For details, see â To divert voice calls â on page 83. The options are: Divert all voice ca lls / Divert if busy / Divert if not answered / Divert if out of reach / Divert if not available / Divert all fax calls / Divert all data calls / Cancel all diverts . Select Activate to set the divert setting on if allowed by the network, Cancel to set the setting off. Select Check status to check whethe r the divert i s activated or not. If you select Divert if not answered or Divert if not available , you ca n also select Set delay to choo se a delay time before the call is diverted. The options are 5 sec / 10 sec / 15 sec / 20 sec / 25 sec /30 sec . Infrared (Menu 5) If you want to receive data from another device via infrared, use this function. Make sure that the infrared port of the communicator faces the infrared port of the other device and press Activate . For more information, see â To activate the infrared connection â on page 35. Note: Do not point the IR (infrared) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device is a Class 1 Laser product.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 63 Phone SIM services (Menu 6) In addition to the functions available in the phone, your SIM card may provide additional services that you ca n access in the menu 6. Menu 6 is shown only if it is supported by your SIM card. The name and contents of the menu depend entirely on the services available. For availability, rates and information on using the SIM services, contact your SIM card vendor, for example your network service provider, service provider or other third-party vendor. You can set the phone to show you the confirmation messages sent between your phone and the network when you are using the SIM services by selecting the option Yes wit hin the menu 3-2-5 (Confirm SIM service actions). Note: Accessing these services may involve sending a text message (SMS) or making a phone call for which you ma y be charged.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 65 Desk 4. Desk Tip: Your favourite links can be, for example, certain WWW pages, WAP services, applications, documents, and photo albums. Desk is an application where you can create and manage links to your favourite documents, applications, or third-party software. Main view When you first use Desk, the main view has at least the following links by default: an Internet shortcut to Internet setup, a document named â Start here! â , an d a WWW link to the official Nokia Web site. You cannot select more than one link at a time. You can delete Desk links only in the Desk application. Tip: You can change the order in which a link appears. Select the link, press the Menu key, and select File > Move . Using the Arrows key, move the link across the display and press Place here . Figure 15
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 66 Desk To add a link Tip: To view and change the icon, label or parameters of a link, select the link, press the Menu key, and then select File > Properties ⦠. 1 Select the program, program group, or other item for which you want to add a shortcut to Desk. 2 Press the Menu key and then select File > Add to Desk . To write notes Tip: You can start writing a note quickly in any application or even during a phone call by pressing the Desk application button twice. 1 Press Write note . A simple te xt editor opens. Figure 16 2 Write the note. 3 Press Close to save th e document. The note will now appear i n the main view of Desk. To change the background image You can also customise the background image of the Desk main view. 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Settings ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Define the following: Background image : The options are Yes / No.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 67 Desk Image file : Press Change to browse for an image. Press Preview to view the image. 3 Press Done . Note: The image file you choose as a backgroun d image should be scal ed to appear equal to or bigger than the screen size. For details, see â Imagingâ on page 233.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 69 Telephone 5. Telephone Tip: You can also switch to other applications during a phone call. You can use the Telephone application to make and receive phone calls, handsfree calls, or conference calls. You can record and redirect calls, use voice mailboxes, and manage settings and profiles. Open the Telephone application by pressing the Tel application button on the keyboard. To make phone calls, ⢠the phone must be switched on, ⢠the communicator must have a valid SIM card fitted, and ⢠you must be located in a service area of the wireless network. Some of the operations explained here can also be made using the cover of the communicator. Note: Opening or closing the cover does not affect active phone calls. If you have made a voice call using the Telephone application and you close the cover, you can continue the call with the cover phone.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 70 Telephone To make a call manually Tip: To disable the handsfree mode, press the Menu key, select Settings > Call ⦠> Audio when cover opened and press Change to switch the handsfre e mode Off . 1 Type the telephone number in the field at the bottom of the main view. 2 Press Call . Use the handsfree mode to speak and li sten to the communicator from a short distance when the cover is opened, or close the cover and continue with the cover phone. To call a number in the Telephone directory When you have no a ctive voice calls, the Telephone application main view shows the Telephone directory. The default direct ory is in the communicator memory. From the top of the telephone list, you can select directories contained in the SIM card and - if fitted - directories contained in a memory card. Contact cards that do not contain any phone numbers appear dimmed. 1 Select a contact in the directory either by scrolling or by using the search field. Tip: To redial the last dialled number you can also press the shortcut keys Chr Tel. 2 Press Call . If the contact has more than one phone number, a list opens, list ing all the contact â s phone numbers. Choose a number from the list and press Call .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 71 Telephone Tip: You can zoom in and out to either make the text more readable or fit more entries on display. Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom in or Zoom out Figure 17 To call a number in a recent calls list Tip: A shortcut to open the Missed calls v i e w i s C t r l Tel. 1 In the main view, press Recent calls . The Dialled calls dialog opens. If you have new missed calls, the Missed calls dialog opens. 2 To see calls from one of the other lists, select a command button on the right of the display. For example, to see a list of received calls, press Rece ived cal ls . Tip: You can create a new contact card by using a telephone number listed in Recent calls . In the ma in view, press Recent calls . Select a call, press the Menu key, and Edit > Add to contacts . 3 Select a number from the list and press Call . Now you can either leave the cover open to use the handsfree option or close the cover and continue the call normally.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 72 Telephone To answer a call Tip: To adjust the volume of the speaker during an active call, use the Arrows key: pressing > increases the volume, pressing < decreases the volume. Figure 18 Tip: The c aller â s name appears in the note if the telephone number is sent with the call, and if the caller â s number is listed in your Contacts directory. 1 When you receive a call and the communicator cover is open, a note about the incoming call appears. To answer the call, press Answer or close the device cover and answer the call via the cover phone. 2 If you do not want to tak e the call, press Reject . To mute the ringing tone, press Mute tone . Note: You cannot have two active calls at the same time unless you are in a conference call. A current call is automatically put on hold when you answer a new incoming call. For information about conference calls, see â To make conference callsâ on page 74. To call and create a voice mailbox Voice mailboxes work just like an answeri ng machine. You can use th em to store incoming messages of missed calls. Many network operators provide a voice mailbox service with the SIM card. If your SIM voice mailbox does not have a number, you can type it yourself. Note that you are still required to contact your network operator for a phone number to use with this voice mailbox.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 73 Telephone Tip: Anoth er way to call your voice mailbox is to press and hold the key on the front cover of the phone. To call your voice mailbox, in the main view of the Telephone directory, press Voice mailbox . See Figure 17. If you have more than one voice mailbox, a dialog prompts you to choose a mailbox from a list. You can also create additional voice mailboxes as follows: 1 Contact your network operator for a number to use with an additional voice mailbox. 2 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Voice mailboxes ⦠. 3 When the Voice mailboxes dialog appears, press Add . Type a n ame and number. To record a call You can record the conversation during a call. Once a call is in progress, press the Menu key and select Call > Record to open the Recorder application. For more information on the Recorder application, see page 231. Note: Obey all local laws governing recording of calls. To make a new call during a call You can have an active call and a call on hold at the same time. You can switch between the two calls. This situation applies whether you ma de or received either of the calls. The display can show a maximum of three calls, although you can have only two calls connected at the same time. See Figure 19. To answer the WAITING call you must first end either the ON HOLD or the ACTI VE call.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 74 Telephone 1 If you already have an active call and a call on hold, drop one of the calls or merge them into a conference call. 2 Press New call and make the new call. The previous call will be put on hold. 3 To switch between calls, use the Arrows key. The active call is framed with a dark line. The command buttons change according to the status of the selected call. For example, a call on hold can be changed to an active call by highlighting it with the Arrows key and then pressing Activate . Figure 19 4 To end a call, select the call you want to end with the Arrows key and press End call . To make conference calls The conference call is a network service. Contact your network operator to check if this service is available. In a conference call, you and up to five persons can hear each other simultaneously. The display shows a conference call as a single call. 1 Make a call. 7KLVî FDOOî îÂÂî ZLWK î WKHî GDUNî OLQHî &DOOî VWDWXVî LFRQ
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 75 Telephone 2 Once the called person has answered, make a call to a second person by pressing New call . The first call is put on hold. 3 Wait until the second person answers the call. 4 To place both persons into a conference call, press Conference call . The display shows a single conference call. Press Confer ence commands to list the two participants of the conference call. 5 To include another person, press New c all . The con ference call is put on hold. When the person an swers the call, press Confe rence call . This new person is included in the conference call. 6 To include further persons, repeat step 5. Tip: You can close the cover and continue the call via the cover phone after you have i ncluded all participants in the conference call. Figure 20 To remove a conference call participant 1 Press Conference commands . 2 Select the caller from the list of participants and press Drop . See Figure 20. To talk privately with one of t he conference call participants 1 Press Conference commands .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 76 Telephone 2 Select a participant from the list and press Private call . The call is now split into two: the conference call is on hold and the one-to-on e call is active. 3 Once you have finished the private conversation, you can return to the conference call by pressing Confer ence call . Tip: To view log files of all calls, press the Menu key and select Tools > Log . The General log shows all calls, both incoming and outgoing, voice and data. To transfer calls Call transfer is a network service where you connect two calls together and disconnect yourself from both calls. Contact your network operator to check if this service is available. When you have one call on hold, and another call active or an outgoing call alerting, press the Menu key and sele ct Call > Transfer to connect the calls together. Note: You may be charged for some of the cost of the t ransferred call; contact your network operator for details. Note: You can only transfer voice calls. Fax, data, or conference calls cannot be transferred. To answer a waiting call To know that you have a call waiting, and to be able to answer it, you must first subscribe to the call waiting network service. Call waiting is sel ected in network services. For more information, see page 85. 1 When you receive a new call while you already have an active call, you hear a sound and see a note informing you of a new incoming call. 2 Press Answer . The active call is put on hold.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 77 Telephone To send DTMF tones during a call A dual tone multi-frequency tone system is used by all touch-tone telephones. DTMF assigns a specific frequency, or tone, to each key so that it can easily be identified by a microprocessor. DTMF tones allow you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised telephony systems, etc. To send DTMF tones during a call, you have two methods: Tip: Besides the numbers 0 - 9 , you can also use the characters p , w , * , and # when sending DTMF tones. For information on these characters, see â To store DTMF tones â on page 101. ⢠Type the digits with the communicator keyboard. No menu or command button selection is needed before starting to type the digits. Each keystroke gene rates a DTMF tone which is transmitted while the call is active . ⢠Alternatively, 1 Press Send DTMF . The DTMF sequences you have stored in the contact card of the person you are talking with are show n. For information on how to store DTMF sequences, see page 101. 2 Select a DTMF sequence. You can edit the sequence . If there are no stored sequences, you can type a new DTMF sequence into the input field. 3 Press Send tone . Note: You can send DTMF tones du ring a conference call by typi ng the digits with the communicator keyboard, but you cannot access stored DTMF sequences. Telephone Settings In the Telephone main view, press the Menu key and sele ct Settings to select one of the followin g settings.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 78 Telephone Profile settings The profiles are used for grouping the settings of different operating environments of the communicator. In the settings you can modify the profile features. One profile is always in use. To change the profile in use, press the Menu ke y. Use the Arrows key to se lect the Profiles icon at the right-hand end of the menu bar and a new profile from the menu list. Figure 21 To select and modify a profile, press the Menu key and select Settings > Profiles ⦠. The profiles provided with your communicator are: General - The default profile of the communicator. Silent - You can set this profile on when you want all the alert tones to remai n silent (ex cept Clock an d Calendar alarms - see â Noteâ on page 79). Meeting - You can specify how the communicator operates when you are in a meeting, such as setting the volume of th e tones low. Outdoor - You can specify how the communicator operates when you are outdoors. 3URILOHVî LFRQ
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 79 Telephone Pager - You can set this profile on when you want the communicator to act as a pager. The default settings are that the re is no ringing tone and that you get an alert tone for received short messages. Flight - Sets the Flight profile on. For more information, see â Flight profileâ on page 91. Note: If you have turned on the Clock alarm or an alarm for timed entry in Calendar, it remai ns on in all profiles, including Silent . To create a new profile 1 To create a new profile, press the Menu key, select Settings > Profiles ⦠, and press New . The current values of the General profile are copied to the new profile. 2 To modify the settings of any of the profiles, highlight a profile name and press Edit . A dialog with four pages opens, as shown in Figure 22. For each of the pages, define the following: Figure 22 General pa ge Name : Type the name of the profile. Some profiles cannot be renamed.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 80 Telephone Ringing type : Choose the ringing type for the ringing tone. The options are Normal / Ascending / Ring onc e . Ringing tone : Define the sound for the incoming call. Press Change to choose from sound files provided with the communicator or to browse for ot her sound files, if availabl e. To record a ton e, see page 231. Ringing tone, line 1 : and Ringing tone, l ine 2 : Define the sound for incoming calls on two alternate lines, if available. Press Change to choose from sound files that have been provided with the communicator or to browse for other sound files, if ava ilable. Personal tones : Define whether the personal ringing tone of callers are used. The options are On / Off . For information about attaching a ringing tone to a contact card, see â To attach a ringing tone â on page 99. Alerts page Clock alarm , Calendar alarm , Received SM S , and Received fax : Choose a specific sound for each of these situations to alert you. Highlight an option, then press Change to choose from sound files provided with the communicator or browse for other sound files. To adjust the volume of an alarm, press Volume . Notifica tions pa ge Keyboard tone : Adjusts the keyboard sound. The options are Off / Quiet / Loud . Phone keypad tone : Adjusts the keypad sound. The options are Off / Quiet / Loud . Notification tones : Switches the notificati on tones between On / Off . Notification tones are tones made by the communicator alerting you to an error (such as an incorrect key press) or to a situati on (such as a low battery).
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 81 Telephone Other pa ge Play ringing tone for : Allows you to choose which incoming calls will make a ringing sound. The options are All calls / VIP group only/ None . If you choose VIP group only , only the calls coming from someone defined as a VIP will ring; see page 109 in the Contacts chapte r. All other calls alert on the display with a message, but will not ring. Speed dials Tip: See also â To speed dial â on page 44. Speed dialling is a quick way to call frequently used numbers. You can assign spe ed dials to eight phone numbers. An example is shown in Figure 23. 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Speed di als ⦠. 2 To assign a number to a speed dial loca tion or to change an existing number, press either Add number or Change numbe r . You see a list of contacts from the contacts database in your communicator â s internal memory. 3 Highlight a contact card and press Select . When a contact card without phone number is highlighte d, the Select command is dimmed. Location number 1 is reserved for calling your default voice mailbox; see page 85 for more information. You cannot change its value. For more information on voice mailboxes, see page 72.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 82 Telephone Figure 23 Network services settings Note: Network services may not be provided by all operators. If services are provided, you may have to subscribe to them. Tip: To change voice call diverting or barring settings, the phone must be switched on. Information about the status of these services is stored in the network. Therefore, the current settings are not shown until you request the information from the network as follows: 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Network services 2 For example, to check the setting of Divert if busy , select Call diverting ⦠, highlight it with the Arrows key, then press Check status . While the communicator is making a request to the network, a query note is shown on the display. 3 After a successful request, the new status now appears in the settings list.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 83 Telephone Figure 24 To divert voice calls Voice call diverting allows you to direct your incoming voice calls to another phone number. This is also known as call forwarding. 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Network s ervices > Call diverting ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Choose divert options: Divert all calls â All incoming calls are diverted. Divert if busy â Incoming calls are diverted when you are engaged in another call. Divert if out of reach â Incoming calls are diverted when the phone is switched off or outside the network service area. Divert if not answered â Incoming calls are dive rted if you do not answer them within a certain time period. Time delay â Applie s to the option Divert if not answered . Time delay allows you to choose the time period after which the call is diverted. You can set the delay to Default / 5 seconds / 10 seconds / 15 seconds / 20 seconds / 25 seconds / 30 se conds Divert if not available â In a s ingle action, this option turns on diverting of Divert if busy / Divert if out of reach / Divert if not answered . 3 Press Change , and select one of the following options:
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 84 Telephone To: â Type the number to which you want to divert the calls. Default voice mailbox â Calls are diverted to your voice mailbox. If you have more than one mailbox, you must choose one from a list shown to you. See page 85 for more information. Off â Turn off the divert. To restrict voice calls To restrict voice calls you use the voice call barring network service. To use call barring or change the barring settings you need a barring password, which you can obtain from the network operator. 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Network services > Call barring ⦠. The Voice call barring dialog opens. 2 Choose one of the available options: Outgoing c alls â Calls cannot be made. Incoming calls â Calls cannot be received. International calls â Calls cannot be made to other countries or regions. Incoming calls when abroad â Calls cannot be received when you are outside your home country. International exce pt to home country - If you have enabled inte rnational roaming with your network operator, you cannot make international calls abroad, except to your home country. Note: Calls described here as international may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. If you subscribe to the alternate line network se rvice, voice call barring applies only to the Selected line .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 85 Telephone Note: When security features that restrict calls are in use (call barring, closed user group and fixed dialling), calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or other official emergency numbers). To cancel all call diverts or barrings, press Cancel all . Other network services 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Network s ervices > Other services ⦠2 Other network service settings contai ns the following options: Network select ion â Allows you to change the way a network is selected and also register to another network. You can set the network sel ection to either Automati c or Manual . In automatic net work selection, the communicator selects the most appropriate network. In manual network selection, the communicator searches for available networks and presents you with a list of networks found; you can then select wh ich network to use. Call waiting - Press Change to choose On or Off . For a brief description of call waiting, see â To answer a wa iting c all â on page 76. My number sending â Determines whether your number is hidden or presented to the person you are calling. Press Change to see the options Default / On / Off . Voice mailbox settings For information on voice mailboxes, see page 72. 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Voice mailboxes . 2 To change the settings of a voice mailbox, highlight it and press Edit . A dialog with two pages opens. See Figure 25.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 86 Telephone Figure 25 Properties pag e Define the following options: Name : Type a descriptive name for the mailbox. Number : Type a number for the mailbox obtained from the network service. Note: The type of voice mailbox determines whether you can edit both of these fields. For example, the name and number of a SIM voice mailbox ca nnot be edited. DTMF tones p age DTMF : Define DTMF tones for a voice mailbox not provided with your SIM card. Each tone is represented by a character. Press Add to type characters and store them with a label, such as DTMF2. You can also select No DTMF tones . If you are editing a voice mailbox provided with your SIM card, this page is dimmed. Call settings 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Call ⦠. 2 Define the following options:
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 87 Telephone Audio when cover opened : Determin es whether the handsfre e mode is selected automatically when you open the cover. Press Change to toggle On / Off. Automa tic redi al : Whe n this setting is set On and you call a number that is busy or does not answer, the communicator attempts to call the number until t he call is connected. Press Change to toggle On / Off . Advanced settings 1 Press the Menu key and select Settings > Advan ced ⦠. 2 Define the following options: Call costs page Tip: To see the phone serial number, press the Menu key and select Tools > Serial number (IMEI) . Your network operator may ask you for this information. If your network supports the call charging display service, use this page to change call charge settings and to view cost counters. Your communicator will prompt you for your PIN2 code. If this pa ge is dimmed, your SIM does not support this network service. Figure 26 Display credits : Determines the information about call costs shown in the call display during a call. The options are No / Used / Remaining . Cred its are amounts of money, measured either in units or currency.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 88 Telephone Currency : Type a maximum of three characters to indicate your choice of currency. You can type numbers or letters. For example, you can type â FIMâ for Finnish currency. This field is used with Unit price below and with Show in currency . Unit price : If you use currency to measure call costs, type a decimal number for the price of each charging unit. You must also complete the Currenc y field above. Maximum cost limit : You have two options: No limit or a value that you can define in the field. You can define the limit in eit her units or in currency. If you are in a call when the cost limit is reached, the call ends. You cannot make any more calls. You see a note on the display before and after the call limit is reached. Press Calculate costs : The informa tion in this dialog is: Last call: - The cost of the last call made. All calls: - The cost of all calls made since the cost counter was reset. See Figure 27. Remaining credits - If you have defined a limit in Maximum cost limit this field displays the amount of money or units remaining. Press either Show in units or Show in currency to choose how you want call costs to be displayed in your communicator. â Unitsâ is a network measuremen t, such as 21 units. â Currencyâ is shown in the characters you have typed in the Currency field. Press Clear costs to clear the cost counters. You a re required to enter your PIN2 code.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 89 Telephone Figure 27 Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending upon network features, rounding-off for billing, taxes and so forth. Fixed dialling page Fixed dialling is a network service which allows you to restrict your calling to a limited set of numbers stored in the SIM card. The service is offered by some network operators. When the fixed dialling service is active, the SIM phone book list shows only numbers in the fixed dialling list. You still have access to the communicator â s Telephone directory, but you cannot call those numbers. If your SIM card does not support this network service, this page is dimmed. Figure 28
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 90 Telephone If you want to change the settings or vie w the fixed numbers, you are required to enter your PIN2 code. When the service is set to On , press Edit numbers to add, modify, or delete numbers. You are required to enter names and numbers i nto the fixed dialling list. Note: When Fixed Dialling is set on, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Line selection page If you need two lines (phone numbers) for your communicator, you must subscribe to the alternate line ne twork service and check that this feature is act ivated in your communicator. If this servi ce is unavailable or you do not use i t, the Line selection page appears dimmed. Each line can have different settings for some of the Telephone features. Figure 29 The options on this page are: Selected line : Defines the line used for outgoing calls. The options are Primary / Alternate . Fax calls alwa ys use the primary line. If Block line selection is active (see the next paragraph) you cannot change the line in use.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 91 Telephone Block line selection : Allows you to block the changing of the selected line. The values are On / Off . Changing the value requires you to enter your PIN2 code. Note: Block line selection option is not provided by a ll network operators. Flight profile The flight profile prevents you from accidentally turning on the phone in an aircraft. To select the flight profile: 1 In the Telephone main view, press the Menu key, scroll across the menu bar to the Profiles icon , then highlight Flight . 2 Press Select . With the flight profile active, you may do tasks which do not require the use of wireless network. For example, you can read previously downloaded mail, write mail, notes, short messages, faxes, or update your calendar. Once you have left the aircraft, turn off the flight profile by pressing Exit profile . Then you can turn on the phone by pressing , and your short messages, faxes, and mail will be sent automatically. When the flight profile has been s elected, emergency calls can be made as follows (close the communicator cover): 1 Press . The phone display will read Flight profile is active. . 2 While the note is visible (for approximately five seconds) you can dial an emergency number preprogrammed into your communicator, for example, 112. 3 Press .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 92 Telephone IMPORTANT! Using your phone while in the air is prohibited. Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network and may be illegal. If the aircraft personnel allow use of the communicator interface, you MUST activate the Flight profile. The Flight profile will allow use of the communicator interface only and will prevent use of the phone. Be aware that all communications applications require use of the phone.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 93 Contacts 6. Contacts You can use the Contact s application to create , edit, and manage a ll contact information, such as phone numbers and addresses. Start the Contacts application by pressing the Contacts application button on the keyboard. The main contacts database is in the communicator â s memory. You can also store contacts in the SIM card and in databases on an attached memory card. You can synchronise your contacts with Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Note s, and Lotus Organizer programs when you connect your communicator to a compatible PC. For information on synchronising your contacts with a PC, see the PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM. Contacts directory The main view of Contacts contains two frames. Figure 30
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 94 Contacts Tip: You can toggle between the two frames with the Arrows or Tab keys. In the left-hand fra me, there is a li st of contacts in the curren tly open contact s database. At the top of the list there is your own card and other available contacts databases. Below th e list there is a search box for fin ding entrie s. In the right-hand frame there is the currently selected contact card. Contacts databases can be located in the communicator â s internal memory, on a memory card, or on a SIM card. A memory card may contain severa l contact databases. Contact data is shown for one contacts database at a time. For example, to see contacts store d on the SIM card, use the Arrows ke y to scroll down the list to the SIM card and press Open . An individual contact card contains the information of one person. A group contact card contains more than one contact person. You can see the name of a group contact card in bo ld font in the list. Contacts are listed by name. You can change the sort order of the list. See â General page â on page 107. You can create more than one contacts database in a memory card. For more information see page 109. Note: You cannot delete your own business card, the internal contacts database of the communicator, the contacts database on a SIM card, a read-only memory card contacts database, or contacts in a read-only contacts database. To make a contact card 1 In the Contacts directory main view, with the left-hand frame highlighted, press New card . A ne w card is created using the default templ ate.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 95 Contacts 2 To make a new contact card using a particular template, press the Menu key and select File > New card . You are prompted to choose a template from a list. 3 When the contact card opens, enter information into the various fields. You can fill in the information on your own business card using the same method. See an example in Figure 31. Note: The title of the P.O . Box field is only displayed when editing the fields. To display the words â P.O. Box â before the P.O. Box number after editing type, for example, â P.O. Box 123 â in the fiel d. 4 To save your contact card, press Done . Note: The speed dial icon next to a contact card telephone number means that you have defined a speed dial for that telephone number with the Telephone application. Figure 31
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 96 Contacts To open a contact card Tip: To copy or move a range of contacts, sele ct the contacts, press the Menu key and select File > More options > Copy to or Move to. . 1 In the Contacts main view, with the le ft-hand frame highlighted, select a card. 2 Press Open to open the card in a full display view. To move or copy contacts from a SIM card 1 In the Contacts main view, with the left-hand frame highlighted, select the SIM card and press Open . 2 Press the Menu key and select File > More options > Copy to or Move to. 3 Choose the Contacts database as the target directory and press Select . To search for a contact card Tip: If you cannot find the contact in th is database, go to the top of the Contacts directory list, and open either the SIM card or the memory card database. You may have stored your contact in one of these other locations. 1 In the search field under the Contacts directory list, enter characters which match the beginning of the name of the contact. For example, to find Manfred, enter M or Ma or Man. The names of contacts which match the characters you entered are displayed. For more information on the rules of searching, see â Notes on using the search field â on page 97. 2 Using the Arrows key, select a contact and press Open .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 97 Contacts Notes on using the search field A search checks the most important fields in a contact card. The matching of search criteria is limited to the beginning of words. For example, to search using the characters â Annâ finds â Annabel â but not â Joanneâ . Example: john.carr@florida.edu or http://florida.edu/ ~john.carr The search also checks the contents which follow the following characters: ' . ' (period) or ' / ' (forward slash) or '@ ' ( â atâ symbol) or ' ~ â (tilde). To change fields in a contact card To add a field You can add fields to a contact card to suit your own circumstances. For more information on specific fi elds, see â In format ion on fields â on page 98. 1 Open a contact card. 2 Press Add field . A list opens, showing fields you can add to the card. 3 Using the Arrows key, select a field and press Select . To rename a field You can rename fields to suit your contacts. For example, after adding three new Tel fields, you could rename them to Tel ( Business) , Tel (Private) , and Tel (Car) respectively.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 98 Contacts Tip: If you want to delete a field on all cards based on the same template, it is simpler to delete it from the template attached to the card. See â To create or modify templates â on page 100. 1 Open a contact card. 2 Select the field you want to rename. 3 Press Rename field . A list of alternative names for the field opens. If you are not allowed to rename the field, the Rename field command button is dimmed. Information on fields Company , First name , Last name , Suffix , Title , Middle Name , Job title , Birthday - You can have only one of each of these fields. Telephone number fields - Storing a â â (plus) character before the country or region code allows you to use the same phone number abroad. Enter mobile phone numbers in this field to send short messages. Countr y or regi on - Enter a country or region name. If you want the a ddress of a contact to be displayed in the format of the country or region, use the same country or region names as listed in the option Default country or region on page 107. Note: Some extra types of field, such as Job des cription , may appear only if they exist in an imported contact card.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 99 Contacts To attach a ringing tone Tip: To play a ri nging tone, use the File manager application to open a ringing tone file. See â To open a file â on page 208. The default ringing tones are not displayed in the File manager. You can set a specific ringing tone for each contact card. When that contact ca lls you, the communicator plays the chosen ringing tone (if the telephone number is sent with the call). 1 Open the contact card. 2 Press the Menu key and select Card > Ringing tone . A dialog showing the current ringing tone of this conta ct is displayed. 3 Press Change . A list of default sounds is displayed. 4 Select a sound and press Select . Press Browse to sea rch for other sound files stored in the communicator. Note: To use personal ringing tones, this feature must be active in the profile that you are using. For more information, see â To create a new profile â on page 79. To insert a picture Tip: To define your default folder, go to Control panel and open the Default folder application. 1 Open the contact card. 2 Press > on the Arrows key t o select the picture frame on t he right-hand side of the card. Press Insert picture . A dialog displaying the contents of the default folder opens. Press Br owse to search for image files, if necessary. Tip: Alternat ively, to insert a picture, press the Menu key and select Card > Insert picture . 3 Select a file and press OK . The image is ope ned in an image viewer. The framed area will be inserted into the contact card. Move the area with the Arrows key and enlarge or reduce the frame size with the and - buttons. Press Insert . For more information, see â Imagingâ on page 233.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 100 Contacts To create or modify templates Tip: Templates do not apply to contact cards in the SIM card, because the layout of a SIM contact car d is fixed. Templates define a set of fields which the communicator uses when creating or displaying a contact card. The default template provides a typical range of fields. You can modify the default template. Y ou can also create custom templates with fields suitable for a particular group of people, such as those living overseas. Figure 32 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Card templ ates . A list of templates opens. 2 Either press New to create a new template, or move to an e xisting template in the list and press Open . A contact card template opens. 3 Edit the template. You can change the name of the template and add or remove fields. After you have created a contact card, the card and its template are linked as follows: ⢠In a template, if you add or change fields or their labels, changes affect all contact cards created from that template. If a field is deleted from the template, the fiel d is deleted from all the cards, except where the fi eld contains data. ⢠In a card, if you remove fields that belong to a template, the empty field will still be there the nex t time you open the card.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 101 Contacts To store DTMF tones DTMF tones are the tones you hear whe n you press the number keys on the phon e keypad. DTMF tones allow you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised telephony systems, etc. You can store a sequence of DTMF tones for a contact card. When you make a call to the contact, you can retrieve the sequence. It will save you from re-entering the characters. 1 Open or create a contact card. 2 Press Add field . A list opens. 3 Scroll down the list to DTMF and press Select . The DT MF field i s inserted in the contact card. 4 Enter a DTMF sequence in the DTMF fi eld. If you need a phone number-DTMF combination number for a contact, store the phone number followed by the DTMF sequence in the Tel field. You can use the following non-numeric characters: Character Function *# The asterisk and hash symbols may be used if the D TMF service requires them p Inserts a pause of approx. 2 seconds before, or between, D TMF characters w If you use this character , the remaining sequence is not sent until you press Send tone again du ring the call.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 102 Contacts To create contact groups You can create contact groups to save time by sending e-mails and short messages to all members of the contact group in one action. 1 With the Contacts directory main view displayed, press the Menu key and select File > New group ⦠. A blank group contact card opens. 2 Enter a name for your group. 3 To add contacts to the group, press Add memb er . A list of contact cards and groups opens. 4 Select a contact and press Add . Note that you can add another contact group to a group. 5 To attach a picture for the group, press > on the Arrows key to move to the picture frame. Alternatively, press the Menu key and select Group > Insert picture . A dialog displaying the contents of the default folder opens. Select a file and press OK , or press Browse to search for a picture file. 6 To save the group contact card, press Done . An example of a contact group with members is shown in Figure 33. Figure 33
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 103 Contacts The company name, if it also exists in the original contac t card, appears to the right of the name of the contact. Select Open to view the details of any of the group members. To change group memberships for a contact or a group Figure 34 1 To view or change the groups to which a contact or a group belongs, open the contact card, press the Menu key, and select Card or Grou p > Belongs to groups . A list opens, showing memberships for the contact or group. 2 To add the card to a new group, press Add to group . A list of contact groups in the current database opens. 3 Select a group and press Add . Your contact card or group contact card is added to the group. 4 Press Done to save your changes.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 104 Contacts To create a SIM contact card You can view the SIM directory by selecting SIM card in the Contacts directory. The contacts in your SIM card are displayed with SIM location numbers, as shown below: Figure 35 1 In the SIM card main view, press New contact . A dialog opens, as shown in Figure 36. If fixed dialling is active, the SIM contents show only your fixed dialling numbers. For more information on fixed dialling, see page 89. 2 The memory location shows the first free location number. To change the location, press Change . 3 Type a name for the contact. 4 Type a number for the contact. Note: The length of the name and the phone number you can enter is defined by the SIM card. For example, s ome SIM cards allow a maximum of only fourteen characters.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 105 Contacts Figure 36 SIM directory options You can sort the contents of the SIM direct ory in alphabetical order or by memory location. Press the Menu key and select View > Sort by > Name , or Sort by > SIM location . To see a summary of the usage of the SIM database, press the Menu key and select File > Properties . If fixed dialling is active, you can see only information about fix ed dialling numbers. To send a contact card as a business card Tip: You can send only one business card in each message you send; however, you can send it to many recipients. When you send or receive a contact card between the communicator and other devices, the term â business cards â is used. A busine ss card is a contact card in a format suitable for transmission, usually vCard format. You can a dd received business cards to your Contacts directory, where they become contact cards. 1 In the Contacts directory main view, select the card you want to send.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 106 Contacts Tip: PC mail and the short message service are explained in th e â Messagingâ chapter, starting on page 159. If a contact card is sent as a short message, the card is sent in t he Sending format defined on page 108. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Se nd . In the Send submenu, make a further choice of media: As a mail / As a short message/ Via infra red . You may have other sending options if you have installed additional software. An editor dialog opens, depending on the sending medium you have chosen, as shown in the example below. The contact card you want to send ha s now become a â business card â . Figure 37 3 To choose who receives the sent card messages, press Recipient . Tip: If you change the setting to in clude images in the message, do not forget to change it back after you have sent the message to reduce call charges. 4 If you are sending via the short message service, the images are left out by default to reduce call charges. If you want to include the image in the message, you must change the setting. See â Send as a short message page â on page 108. 5 If you are about to send via infrared, make sure you activate the receiving of infrared in the other device first. 6 Press Send . To receive a business card When you receive a business card from another device, you are alerted by a notification message. This message appears automatically on the dis play, in any application. Follow the screen prompts to view the business card.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 107 Contacts Note the following informat ion about the contents of received card(s): A field is displayed i f it is recognised; if n ot, it is ignored. Audio data, in a supported format, is set as the personal ringing tone of the contact (if you choose to add the card to your Contacts directory) To add the received card to your Contacts directory, press Add to Contacts . The card is converted to contact card format. To reject the card, press Delete . Settings Press the Menu key and select Tools > Settings , then select a page, as follows: General page Figure 38 Default tem plate : A l l o w s y o u t o d e f i n e w h i c h t e m p l a t e i s u s e d w h e n c r e a t i n g a n e w contact card. When you press Change , you can c hoose a template from a list of templates used with the current database.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 108 Contacts Name display : Allows you to define the display order of names in the Contacts directory main view. The values are First name Last name / Last name , First name . The names will be displayed in the same order in the Telephone application and the cover phone. Default country or r egion : Concerns the country or region whose address format is used when viewing contact card addresses in various displays in the communicator. By default, the address format of the country or region you enter in the Country or r egion field of a contact card is used. If you do not enter information in the Country or region field, the communicator uses the address format of the Default c ountry or region . Each country or region has a predefined address format. Press Change to see a list of countries and regions. Send as a short message page Example: The Nokia 9000 i/ 9110/9110i commun icators and most of the major e- mail clients support the vCard format. Sending format : Allows you to define the format used when sending a business card via the short message service. T he values are Compact / vCard . Co mpact is more widely supported but the number of fields sent is more restricted. Use vCard format if you know the receiving device understands vCard format. Using vCard format, you can send all fields except Note and DTMF . Send contact card pictures : Allows you to control the attaching of pictures when sending business cards in vCard format via the short messa ge service. The options are No / Yes .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 109 Contacts VIP group page VIP group : Allows you to nominate an existing cont act card group to be treate d as VIP group . You can restrict the ringing of incoming calls so that only calls from a member of a VIP group will ring, the others will not ring. See Profile settings, â Other page â on page 81. To create a new contacts database Contacts databases are created on a memory card. 1 Press the Menu key and select File > More options > New database . 2 Type the name of your database, then press the Enter key. See Figure 39. Your new database is added to the Contacts directory as a folder. 3 To add a new card to the new database, select and open the databa se in the Contacts directory, then press New card . To copy or move contacts to the new database, select existing contacts from the Contacts directory, press the Menu key, and select File > More options > Copy to or > Move to . Tip: To see a summary of the usage of the database, press the Menu key and select File > Properties . Figure 39 Note: If you have a read-only memory card, you cannot make changes to the contacts or databases on that card.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 111 Calendar 7. Calendar In the Calendar application, you can create and check your scheduled events, appointments, anniversaries, and birthdays. You can also list things to do and set alarms to all of the calendar entries. You can synchronise your calenda r and tasks with Microsoft and Lotus programs when you connect your communicator to a compatible PC. For information on synchronisation , see â To transfer data from other devices â on page 36 and the PC Suite Guide on the CD-ROM. Calendar entries There are four types of entry that you can store in the Cale ndar application: Example: Use appointment entries for meetings and business lunches. ⢠Appointment entries are the basic entries in your calendar. ⢠Event entries are related to the whole day, not to a specific time of day. Event entries do not appear in the Weekly ti me schedule. ⢠Anniversary entries are repeated annually on the same date. Use Anniversary entries for annual reminders of important dates, such as birthdays or celebrations.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 112 Calendar Tip: You can use the standard clipboard command shortcuts Ctrl X and Ctrl V to cut entries and paste them to a different place. ⢠Task entries are for writing down lists and things to do. These tasks can be prioritised and organised into task lists. Tasks can also have deadlines. There are seven different views to view entries. Pre ss Change view to choose a view. For more information about different views, see â Viewsâ on page 118. To create new calendar entri es There are two ways to create calendar entries: Tip: To send a calendar entry to reserve a time in other device calendars, move to the date that contains the entry an d select the entry with the Arrows key, press the Menu key and select Send > As a short message or Via infrared ⢠Start typing your entry. As you enter characters, Calendar ope ns the default entry dialog of the current view. ⢠Press the Menu key and select File > New entry . Select the entry you want to create. The options are: Appointment ⦠, Event ⦠, Anniversary ⦠, or Task ⦠. This is the way to cre ate a new calendar entry when you do not want to use the default entry type for the particular view. To define information in a calendar entry Tip: To change the default values of an entry details dialog, press the Menu key and select Entry > Default settings . Figure 40
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 113 Calendar Tip: To see how attachments are added to an entry, see page 118. Note: Day, event, anniversary, and task entry all have slightly different entry dialogs. The following descriptions of each dialog page list all the possibilities. Details page Description : The description of the entry. Tip: An untimed entry is displayed with a icon. Timed : Specifies whether a day entry is timed or untimed. â Timedâ means that the entry has a specific start time, en d time, and duration. â Untime d â means that the entry happens on a particular date, but at no specific time. If you select No , you may have to define the date for the day entry in the field below. If you select Yes , you must define the starting and ending time. Date : The date of the entry. Start : The time or date when the ent ry starts, depending on the entry type. Example: The start year may be a person â s year of birth, and the number of years since the start year may be a person â s age. Display year : Displays the start year of the anniversary, the number of years that have passed since the start year, or no year information. The options are Starting year / In number o f years / None. Duration : The durati on of the entry. If you change the value in the Start an d End fields, this field is updated. End : T he time wh en the en try ends. Priority : The priority of a task. The options are High / Normal / Low . Task list : The task list to which the task ent ry is connected. Due date : The deadline of a task. Start warning : The days before the due date when a task starts being shown in today â s entry list.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 114 Calendar Alarm page Tip: You can set an alarm for a task entry only if you have also set a Due date . Set alarm : Specifies whether an alarm is set for the entry. Time before : The time when an alarm set for a timed day entry will go off. Alarm time : The time when an alarm set for an untimed entry will go off. Days before : The number of days before an entry when an alarm will go off. Repeat page Example: If your club has a meeting which takes place on the first Monday of every month, you can set the entry to recur accordingly by selecting Monthly by day . On this page you can determine whether and when you want an entry to be repeated: Repeat type : The repe at type for the entry. The optio ns are No rep eat / Daily/ Working days / Weekly / Monthly by day / M onthly by dat e / Yearly by day / Yearly b y date . Note: Define Repeat type first since the choice of options in the rest of the fie lds depends on what you have selected. Repeat on days : The days on which the ent ry is repeated. Use the Arrows key to go to a day you want to select and press Select . You can select more than one day at a time. See Figure41. Figure 41
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 115 Calendar Repeat on dates : The dates on which the entry is repeated. Use the Arrows key to go to a date you want to select and press Select . Yo u can select more tha n one date at a time. See Figure 42. Figure 42 Example: To define an entry that is repeated Daily with two days between every repeat, define â every 3 days â in Repeat interval . Repeat interval : The time period between repeats. Repeat indefini tely : Frequency of the repetition. The options are Yes / No . Note: It is still possible to remove or edit a single entry even if the entry is repeating. If you edit an entry and change any options except the repeat options, a sele ction list appears. Y ou then choose how you want the change to take place from the following options: All occurrences / Only this occurrence / This and future occurrences / This and past occurrenc es . Status pag e On this page you can define a background colour and status for the entry, as well as specify whether you wa nt to synchro nise the en try: Tip: Colour is a handy way to categorise entries - you see more easily how your time is reserved. Colour marking : Allows you to define the color and letter for the entry symbol, which appears after the text of the entry in all views. When you check your calendar entries in th e Weekly time or Year schedules, th e colour is used for the bar indicating the en try. The letter is used to filter Calendar entries in the Year schedul e.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 116 Calendar Example: If you are not sure if an entry will take place, you can mark it as Tentative . Tentative : Whether an entry is confirmed or n ot. A tentat ive entry is indicat ed with icon next to the entry text . Crossed out : Wh ether an entry has been completed or not. Crossing out an entry does not remove it from the calendar. Synchronisation : Wh ether your calendar entries are shown to othe rs when you connect to the network and synchronise your calendar. The options are Public , Private , and No synchronisation . See the PC Suite Guide on the CD- ROM for more information about synchronisation. To edit an entry 1 Select the entry in the view. 2 Press Enter. A details dialog for the entry opens. Edit the details on the various pages. You can now, for example, reset the alarm or redefine how the entry is repeated in the ca lendar. S ee â To define information in a calendar entry â on page 112. To change an entry type Example: You might have entered an event, but you now want to change it to an appointment. 1 Select the entry in the view. 2 Press the Menu key and select Entry > Change entry type ⦠. 3 Choose a new entry type from the list.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 117 Calendar Tip: To change the default entry type of a particular view, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Default entry type in â View settings â on page 129. To delete entries You should tidy up your calendar from time to time by deleti ng entries, since calendar entries accumulate over time and consume memory. Note: You can also back up your calendar data to a compatible PC. See the PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM for details. To delete a single entry There are two ways to delete a single entry: Tip: The shortcut to delete a single entry is to select it and press Ctrl D. ⢠Select the entry in the view, then press the backspace key. A note is displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. ⢠Select the entry in the view, press the Menu key, and then select File > Delete entry . To confirm the deletion, press OK . To delete a range of entries using defined cr iteria Tip: You can move entries to another file and then to a PC to free up memory. 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Move/Delete ⦠. A dialog box is displa yed with a suggested range of entries to be deleted. 2 Press OK to delete all the entries defined in the dialog box at step 1, or press Options to define further criteria (including whether you want to â moveâ or to â deleteâ . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following and press Done to return to the previous dialog. Details page Action : The consequences of removing the entries. The options are Delete / Move to a file . Entries : The ty pes of entries which will be removed. The options are All / Crossed out .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 118 Calendar Time period : The time scope of the removal. The options are Whole calendar / Until today / From today / Other . Start : The start date of the entries to be removed. End : The end da te of the entries to be removed. Entry types page Choose from the following options: Appointments / Events / Anniversaries / Tasks. To view, create, and delete attachments 1 Open a calendar entry by pressing Enter. The entry details dialog with four pages opens. 2 Press Attachme nts . A selection list of attachments linked to the calendar entry opens. 3 To view a selected attachment, press Open . To create a new attachment, press New . To delete an attachment, press Delete . 4 If you want to add a new attachment, sele ct the type of attachment and press Insert new to create the new attachment or Insert existing to browse for an existing attachment. Views Tip: You can press the Calendar application button repeatedly to cycle the view. The Calendar consists of seven views. The purpose of each view is to help you organise your calendar so that you manage your time effectively on a daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly basis. You can customise the display of each view.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 119 Calendar Commands in all views Tip: In most of the views you can go to today â s date by pressing the Space key on the keyboard. The following command buttons are available in all of the views: Edit - Opens a selected calendar entry for editing. New entry - Enables you to create a n ew calendar entry if there are no entries for that day. You can also create a new calendar entry by just starting to enter characters on the keyboard, see âÂÂTo create new calendar entries â on page 112. Change view - Opens a selectio n list from which you can switch to any of the other calendar views. The options are Month / Week / Day / Task lists / Weekly time schedule / Year schedu le / Anniversaries. Go to da te - Opens a search dialog from which you can, by typing in the desired date, switch to any date in the calendar. Enter the date and press OK . Press Today to go to today â s date. Press Browse to browse through the calendar. Month view Figure 43
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 120 Calendar Left frame Tip: To edit an event, the right frame must be active. If you are in the left frame, go to the desired date and press the Enter key. The focus moves to the right frame. One row in the day table equals one week. Abbreviations for the days of the week are in the highest row. Today â s date is marked in green. Dates that have scheduled events are marked in bold and blue. The currently selected date is highlighted. Right fr ame Tip: To see a list of icons that are displayed in all views, see p age 125. The events of the currently selected date are shown in the day details frame on the right. Week view Tip: To change the starting day of the week, press Extras, open the Control panel , and select Regional settings . Choose Date page and then First day of the week . Figure 44
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 121 Calendar Tip: To move the position of the title box from left to right, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Title location in â View settingsâ on page 129. The week view shows the events for the sele cted week in seven day boxes. The coloured indicator area next to a day box shows the date and name of t he day. Today â s indicator area is framed green. Day view Figure 45 The day view shows the events for the sel ected day. Tip: To change the time period covered in one time slot, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Time slot allocation in â View settingsâ on page 129. Events are grouped into one time slot according to their starting time. To view the day view of the previous day, press < on th e Arrows key. To view the next day, press >.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 122 Calendar Tip: In day and week views, you can quickly move to a different date by pressing the Tab key, selecting the desired date with the Arrows key, and pressing Enter. Task lists Figure 46 Tip: To see how to-do task lists are created, see page 126. You can create one or several business or per sonal task lists which may contain tasks with or without deadlines. You can also set an alarm or a repeat for a task. The page number in the upper right corner of the Task list view indicates the position of the task list among the other task lists. For example, in Figure 46, â 1/6â means that there are altoget her six task lists and â Urgent ta sks â is the first list. Tip: To see a list of all task lists, press the Tab key. To view the previous task list, press < on the Arrows key. T o view the next task list, press >. Due dates are shown to the right of a task, in brackets.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 123 Calendar Weekly time schedule Tip: You can select different bar colours for different types of entries. See â Status page â on page 115. Figure 47 The weekly time schedule shows the reserved hours for the selected week. This means that only timed entries are shown The currently selected time box is framed. Entries are marked with bars. Example: Use a green bar for hobbies and a red bar for business trips to get a quick overview of your activities during a week. See â View settings â on page 129. If a time box contains entries, the bar across the bottom of the weekly time schedule shows the details of the entry. The n umbers to the right of the entry description indicate the number of entries contained in that time box. For example, 1/2 in Figure 47 means that you are seeing the details of the first of two entr ies. If a time box contains more than one entry, you can view a list of the entries by pressing the Tab key.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 124 Calendar Year schedule Figure 48 The year schedule shows the time table for the selected year. Only e ntries with colours are shown in the year schedule. If there are several colours connected to the day, only one can be shown. Abbreviations for the days of the week are in the highest row and the months of the year in the far le ft column. Time boxes have the same functions as in the Weekly time schedule. Anniversaries Figure 49
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 125 Calendar Tip: To change the number of months shown in the anniversary view, press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. See Months in view in â View settings â on page 129. The anniversary view shows the anniversaries for four months at a time. You can add here all the birthdays and other anniversaries that you want to be reminded of. Note: Only anniversary entries are shown in the anniversary view. Icons You can see the following symbols in Calendar : - Alarm - Anniversary - Attachment - Event - Repeating entry - Tentative entry - Task - Task, with high importance - Task, with low importance - Untimed entry
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 126 Calendar Task lists To create a new task list 1 Press the Menu key and select File > New task list ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 2 Define the task list on the two pages of the dialog. See â Details pageâ and â Visibility pageâ below. 3 When you are ready, press Close . The new task list is added in Task li sts. Details page Tip: If you choose to sort a task list manually, all ta sks on the list appear numbered. You can en ter a new tas k entry randomly by focusing on a location in the list. You can also change the order of the tasks by cutting and pasting (Ctrl X and Ctrl V). List name : The name of the task list. Position : The position of the task list among the other task lists. Sorting : How the tasks are sorted hierarchically in the task list. Th e options are Manual / Priority then date / Date then priority . Visibility page Show tasks : The views in which the tasks on the list will be shown. The options are All views / Task list view . Task position : The positio n of the tasks in an event list if the tasks are all shown in All views . To edit a task list 1 Open the task list. 2 Press the Menu key and select View > Task list settings ⦠. A dialog with two pages, Details and Visibility , opens, as explained above.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 127 Calendar To delete a task list 1 Open the task list. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Delete task list . To search for Calendar entries You can search through th e entries for particular pieces of te xts. 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Find entry ⦠. A search field opens. 2 Enter a key word for the entry you want to search for, or press Options to restrict the search by defining a set of qualifications. A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following: Details page Refine search : Defines the search . The options are No / Entries with an alarm / Entr ies with repetition / Crossed out entrie s . Time period : The time scope of the search. The options are Whole calendar / Until today / From today / User def ined . From : The starting point of the search. Until : The ending point of the search. Entry types page Choose the type of entries you want to find. The options are: Appointments / Events / Anniversaries / Tasks . Tip: You can stop a search by pressing Stop . 3 To start searching, press Find . A chronological list of the find results is shown. See Figure 50.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 128 Calendar Figure 50 4 Select an entry and press: ⢠Edit to open the entry details dialog for editing, ⢠Go to to go to the date or view where the entry is located or, ⢠New find to star t a new search . 5 Press Close to ret urn to the currently active view. Settings General settings 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > General settings ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Define the following: Default view : The default view when ope ning either another or a new calendar file. Display untimed entries : The location of untimed appointment, event, and anniversary entries in the entry list of all the timed views. 3 Press Done to return to the currentl y active view.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 129 Calendar View settings You can define the appearance of the view and default entry types for each view by following these steps: 1 Go to the view you want to define. 2 Press the Menu key and select View > View settings ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 3 Define the view settings on the two pages of the dialog. See â Details pageâ and â Entry typesâ below. 4 Press Done to return to the currentl y active view. Note: The contents of the di alog vary in different vi ews. The following i s a list of all the possibilities. Details page Default entry t ype : The en try type which is inserted in the view by defau lt when you create a new entry. The options are Appointme nt / Event / Anniversary / Task . Wrap text : Specifies whether or not the information in the entry is wrapped when viewed in any of the views. Title loca tion : Specifies whether the title of the week is on the left or right of the display in the weekly view. Time slotTime slot allocation : The time period covered in one time slot of the daily views and weekly time schedules. The options are 2 hours / 1 hour/ 30 minutes / 15 minu tes . Day starts : The time when a day starts in the Daily view. Day ends : The time when a day ends in the Daily view.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 130 Calendar Show colour markings : Specifies whe ther all entry symbols or only symbols with the letter specified in Defa ult colour are shown in the year vi ew. Default colour : The symbols and background colours of the different entry types in the particular view. Months in view : The number of month boxes in the anniversary view. Entry types On the Entry types page you can choose the entry types you want to appear in the view you are defining: Appointm ents / Events / Anniversaries / Tasks .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 131 Internet 8. Internet This chapter describes how to get access to the Inte rnet and how to use the Internet applications. When you take your communicator into use, it has the following browser applications: WWW - A World Wide Web (WWW) browser supporting frames, JavaScript, and SSL (v.3) protocol. Tip: To access WAP services, you need both an Internet access point and a WAP access point. See page 153. WAP - A browser for accessing various types of information, entertainment, and other services in Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) format. WAP is suited to mobile devices with small screen displays and limited amounts of memory. WAP uses mainly text but does support pictures. To connect to the Internet, ⢠the wireless network you use must support data calls, ⢠the data service must be activated for your SIM card, ⢠you must have obtained an Internet access point from an Internet Service Provider (ISP), and ⢠you must have entered the proper Internet settings. Note: The Mail application, described in the Messaging chapter, also uses an Internet connection . See â Mailâ on page 172. Your ISP can give you instructions on how to conf igure the Internet set tings. Follow the instructions carefully.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 132 Internet Note: You must have your phone turned on, within network coverage and free of any other voice or data call to connect to the Internet. To set up your Internet access point Note: To be able to use the Internet servic es, you need to configure an In ternet connection. Some Internet service providers may offer you the possibility to configure your Internet settings by sending you a smart message via SMS. This might reduce the number of settings you need to enter yourself, or eliminate the need altogether. Please contact your In ternet Service Provider (ISP) for details. Internet connections To set up and change the Internet settings, go to the Control panel in the Extras application group and open Internet access. For more information, see page 218. Figure 51 The first two lines contain a summary of the details of the preferred connection. Define the following:
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 133 Internet Tip: You may have to set up several Internet connections, depending on the sites you want to access. For example, browsing the WWW may require one setup; browsing your company â s intranet may require another connection. Preferred connec tion : The default connection wh ich will be used to connect to the Internet. If idle, stay online : The connection to the Internet will au tomatically close after the inactivity period defined here. The opt ions are For 2 minutes / For 5 minutes/ For 10 minutes / For 60 minutes . IMPORTANT: Some Internet connections may appear inactive, but they may still be sending and receiving data in the background. These conne ctions may delay the start of the inactivity period specified he re, and therefore postpone the closing of the connection. Ask before connecting : The options are Yes / No . If you choose Yes , a connection dialog appears every time yo u connect to the Internet, asking you to either confirm, change, or cancel the connection, or change the Internet access point. If you choose No , the communicator will choose the default Internet access point. To create a new connection or edit an existing connection 1 In the Internet connections dialog, press New to create a new connecti on or Edit to edit an existing connecti on.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 134 Internet Figure 52 2 If you already have connections defined, you can use an existing connection as a basis for the new connection. After you have pressed New, press Use existi ng . Choose the connection you want from the list which appears, and press OK . 3 A dialog on connection details opens. See Figure 53. Note: The exact values for the settings are provided by your ISP. Figure 53 4 Define the following: Tip: All your connections should have different names. Connection name : Give a descriptive name for the connection. Phone number : The modem telephone number of the IAP.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 135 Internet Tip: Often the minimum requirement for an Internet connection is: Phone number , Username , and P assword . Password prompt : If you must type in a new password every time you log on to a server, or if you do not want to save your password, choose Yes . The options are Yes / No . Username : Type in a user name if required by the Internet Service Provider (ISP). The user name may be nee ded to connect to the Internet, and is usually provided by the ISP. The user name is often case-sensitive. Password : Type in a password if required by the ISP. The password may be needed to connect to the Internet, and is usually provided by the ISP. The password is often case-sensitive. Confirm password : Confirm your password by retyping it in this field. Press Advanced settings to define the Advanced setti ngs of the connection. A dialog with four pages opens. See Figure 54. Figure 54 Proxies page You may want to use a proxy to quicken access to the Internet. Note also that some ISPs require the use of Web proxies. Contact your ISP to determine proxy details.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 136 Internet When you have made an Internet connection for your company â s intranet, and you are unable to retrieve Web pages from the general WWW, you may need to setup a proxy server to retrieve Web pages outside your company â s intranet. Tip: If you set Use proxy server to No , Port number , Proxy server , and No prox y for are dimmed. Settings for : Choose the appropriate protocol from the list. The options are HTT P / HTTPS . HTTP is for regular connections and HTTPS is for secure connections (SSL). Use proxy server : To use the proxy se rver, select Yes . The options are Yes / No . Use of a proxy server is dependent on the protocol. Port number : The number of the proxy port. The port number is related to the protocol. Common values are 8000 and 8080, but vary with proxy server. Example : Example domain names are: company.com and organisation.org. In a list, separate domain names with semicolons. Proxy server : The IP address of the proxy server, or the domain name. No proxy for : Define here the domains for which the HTTP proxy is not needed. Data call page Figure 55
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 137 Internet Tip: To divert and bar data calls, go to the Internet application main view, then press Tools > Control panel > Data call barring . Connection type : The options are Normal / High speed . Note: To b e a b l e t o u se High speed , the network service provider has to support this feature, and if necessary, to activate it for your SIM card. Remote modem type : The options are Analog / V.110 IS DN / V.120 ISDN . This setting can depend on both your GSM network operator and ISP, because some GSM networks do not support certain types of ISDN connections. For details, contact your Internet service provider. If ISDN connections are available, they establish connections more quickly than analog methods. Tip: A very basic GSM data connection is: Connection type : Normal , Remote modem type : Analog , and Max. connection speed : Automatic . Max. connec tion speed : The options are Automatic / 9600 /1440 0 /19200 /2880 0 /38400 / 43200 , depending on what you have chosen in Connecti on type and Remote modem type . This option allows you to limit the maximum connection speed when High speed is used. Higher data rates may cost more, depending on the network service provider. Note: The speeds above are the maximum speed at which you r connection will operate. During the connection, the operatin g speed may be less, depending on network conditions. Modem initialisati on : Controls your communicator using modem AT commands. If required, enter characters specified by your GSM network service provider or ISP. Callback page Use callback : This option allows a server to call you back once you have made the initial call, so you have a connection without paying for the call. Contact your Internet service provider to subscribe to this service. The options are Yes / No .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 138 Internet Note: Charges may apply for certain types of received calls, such as roaming and high speed data calls. Contact your GSM network operator for more information. Note: If you are not using HSCSD, the communicator ex pects the callback call to use the same data call settings that were used in the callback- requesting call. The network must support that type of call in both directions, to and from the communicator. Callback type : The options a re Use server number / Use server number (IETF)/ Use number below . Ask your Internet service provider for the correct setting to use. The setting depends on the service provider â s configurati on. Callback number : Type in your communicator â s data phone number which the dial back server uses. Usually, this number is the data call phone number of your communicator. Other page Figure 56 Allow plain t ext login : If you select Yes , the password at connection may be sent in clear. The op tions are Yes / No . For optimum security, use option No . Some Internet service provi ders require t hat this sett ing is Yes .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 139 Internet Use PPP compression : If you select Yes , this option speeds up the data transfer, if it is supported by the remote PPP server. The options are Yes / No . If you have problems with establishing a conne ction, try setting this to No . Con tact your Internet service provider for guidance. Script options If you need to define script options for your Internet connection, press Script options on the Other page. A script can automate the connection between the communicator and the server. See Figure 57. Tip: Your Internet service provider may be able to provide you with a script. Note: Scripts are not usually required when you establish a connection. To find out whether you need a script, contact your Internet service provider. Figure 57 Tip: Advanced users will find scripting an advantage, where use of scripting is allowed. You can obtain instructions from Forum Nokia at URL www.forum.nokia.com Press Edit script to edit the script. In the Edit script dialog you can press Import script to import a script. On importing, it replaces the current contents of the script file. Define the following: Use login script : The options ar e Yes / No .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 140 Internet Display terminal window : The options are Yes / No . If you choose Yes , once a connection is establishe d you see the execution of the script . Use this window when resolving connection problems related to scripting, with your Internet service provider. Address o ptions Tip: There is a glossary containing Internet terms and abbreviations at the back of this user â s guide. Press Addr ess options on the Other page, to define the IP and D NS addresses. See Figure 58. Define the following: Figure 58 Auto retrieve IP address : If you select Yes , the IP address is obtained automatically from the server. The options are Yes / No . This set ting is also called â dynamic IP address â . IP address : The IP address of the communicator. If the IP address is obtained automatically, then you are not required to ent er details here. Auto retrieve DNS address : If you select Yes , the DNS (Domain Name Server) address is obtained automatically from the server. The options are Yes / No . Primary DNS address : The IP address of the primary DNS server. Secondary DNS address : The IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 141 Internet Note: If you need to enter the IP address , Primary DNS addre ss , or Secondary DNS address , contact your Int ernet service provider to obtain these addresses. Tip: When you are browsing the WWW, some Web pages may prompt you to save (download) a file to your local disk (your communicator). See the IMPORTANT note in thi s section warning about viruses. To connect to the World Wide Web To connect to the World Wide Web, ⢠the GSM data service must be activated for your SIM card, and ⢠you must configure an Int ernet access point. Se e page 132. Note: Only install software from sources that offer adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. For information on softwa re installation and security certificates, see â Certificate manager â on page 224. Tip: To change the internet access point press the Menu key in the In ternet application group view and select Tools > Internet access ⦠or go to the Control panel in the Extras application group and open Internet access. For more information, see page 133. Figure 59 To open the WWW browser, 1 Press the Internet application button on the communicator keyboard. 2 Select the WWW application and press Open . . ⢠Unless you have already redefined the default homepage, a Nokia 9210i link page opens. This page is located in the memory of your communicator and does not require an Internet connection.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 142 Internet ⢠If you have redefined a homepage, a dialog with the Connection name and Phone number of the Inte rnet access point you are using is displayed. See Figure 60. You can also ch oose not to see the connection di alog when the connection is made; see â Internet connections â on page 132. To change the Internet access point, press Change connection . Press OK to establish a connection. Figure 60 Note: In order to free up additional memory for large Web pages, all other applications are closed automatical ly when the WWW browser is opened. 3 For information on opening Web pages and navigating in the Web, see â To open a Web page â on page 143. For information on adding a page to your bookmark list, see â Bookmarksâ on page 150 4 To close an application, press Close . Tip: An alternative way to disconnect from the Internet is to c lose the cover and press the key. 5 To disconnect from the Internet, in any of the Internet applications, press the Internet button on the keyboard, then press Disconnect . Disconnection is immediate. Note: Depending on the network configuration and load, establishing an Internet connection may take a minute or more.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 143 Internet To open a Web page There are several ways to open a page in the World Wide Web. Example: An example o f a URL address is www.nokia.com 1 If you know the address of the Web page that you want to visit, press Open URL , type the address into the address field, and press OK . Alternatively, select a link on your default home page and press Go to Tip: In the dialog that opens, press History list to view the list of pages you have visited during the current session. Figure 61 Tip: If you have a bookmark of the page you want to visit, press the Menu key and select Tools > Bookmarks . Select a bookmark in the Bookmarks list and press Go to . 2 A dialog with the Connection name and Phone n umber of the Internet access point you are using is displayed. See Figure 60. You can also choose not to see the connection dialog when the connection is made; see â Internet connecti ons â on page 132. To change the Internet access point, press Change connection . Press OK to establish a connection. Note: If the page and its components are encrypted by a security protocol, the security icon appears on the title bar. Note: Some servers have access restrictions that require a valid user name and password. In this case, you will be prompted for your user name and password before the Web page can be retrieved.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 144 Internet Tip: To save page elements in your communicator, press the Menu key, select File > Save , and select the appropriate submenu command. To browse the WWW After the Web page has been retrieved, t he following commands become available, depending on what is selected on the page: Open URL - Press to open a dialog where you can define a web page to open. Go to - When a link is selected, press Go to to view the target of the link. Back - Allows you to retrieve the previous page that you have just browsed. Bookmarks - Opens the Bookmarks view. Close - Close s the WWW browser application. Note: Stored passwords to individual Web sites are removed when the communicator is restarted or the cookie list is emptied. To clear the cookie list press the Me nu key, and select Tools > Delete cookies .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 145 Internet Tip: To go to your home page, press the Menu key and select Navigation > Go to home page . To browse with the keyboard The best way to browse a page and the WWW is to use both the keyboard shortcuts and the pointer. You can use the Tab key and some other keys to select element s on a page or the pointer as a mouse to select elements directly. The following table lists useful keyboard shortcuts of the WW W application. You ca n find more shortcuts in the application next to menu commands. Key Function Enter Tab Shift Tab A Q S W D E Ctrl T ab Clicks with the pointer Selects the next box, button or othe r form element. Selects the previous form element on a page Selects the next link on a page Selects the previous link on a page Selects the next heading on a page Selects the previous heading on a page Selects the next element on a page Selects the previous element on a page Selects the next frame, if a vailable. Chr up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Ctrl left/right arrow (on Arrows key) Ctrl up/down arrow (on Arrows key) Scrolls the page screen by screen Scrolls to the start or to the end of the page Scrolls the page line by line X Z Moves to the next page, if already visited Moves to the previous page, if already visited
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 146 Internet To browse with the pointer You can see the pointer on the screen when you open a web page. The functionality of the pointer is similar to a mouse, but you move it with the Arrows key and click it by pressing the Enter key. To select an area, keep Enter pressed down and move the pointer over the area with the Arrows key. To scroll a page, you have several options: ⢠Move the pointer onto the scroll bar, press Enter and keep it pressed down as long as necessary. Tip: Press Ctrl T ab to change the active frame. ⢠Move the pointer onto the scroll bar and press the space key to turn on continuous scrolling. The page scrolls and the scroll box moves to the direction of the pointer whenev er the pointer is in the scrolling are a. Press the space key again to turn off contin uous scrolling. ⢠Move the pointer over the edge of t he window to the direction where you want to scroll the page to scroll the page auto matically. Tip: Useful sh ortcuts are: Ctrl R for Reload , and Ctrl Z for Stop loading . Loading options Depending on the number and size of images and other elements some web pages may be slow to load. To control loading you have the following options: Shift Enter G Displays Save as command.Toggles the loading of images on or off. Key Function
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 147 Internet ⢠Reload the page or stop loading altogether; press the Menu key and select Navigation > Reload > Reload or Stop . ⢠Turn off the auto-loading of images. The images are then replaced by placeholders. Press the Menu key and select Tools > Settin gs ⦠, go to the General page and in the Show imag es field select No . ⢠Toggle the loading of images on and off by pressing the G key. To change frame sizes Tip: To change the active frame when a Web page contains frames, press Ctrl Tab. Where a Web page contains frames, you can change the frame sizes of the page, to get a better view of the content s of the selected frame. 1 Move the pointer cursor over a frame border. 2 Press and hold down the Enter key. Arrows are displayed around the selected frame border 3 Use the Arrows key to resize the frame. 4 To cancel the previous move, press Esc. To open a frame as a new page To open the currently active frame as a new page and discard the other frames, press the Menu key and select File > Open > Frame as new page To view pages in high contrast Some Web pages use colours which make reading difficult. To make the page easier to read, press the Menu key and select View > High contrast
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 148 Internet To view pages offline To view local downloaded pages on your communicator without accessing the WWW, press the Menu key and select File > Browse Offl ine WWW settings To change the WWW settings, press the Menu key and select Tools > Settings ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. See Figure 62. Figure 62 General page Show images : The opti ons are Yes / No / Only cached . If you select Yes the WWW browser loads all the pictures on a Web page when it displays the Web page. If you select Only c ached only the pictures stored in cache memory are loaded. Frames options : Th e options are Show all frames / Show frames one b y one / Do not use frames . Some Web pages are split into several frames, which makes reading difficult, so choose an option which suits you.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 149 Internet Advanced page Use cookies : Some Web pages store data on your communicator in files called â cookiesâ . Use this setting to determin e whether to accept cookies, and if you accept them, whether you wish to be prompted each t ime a cookie is stored. The options are Always / Never / Ask . Tip: To delete the cookies, press the Menu key and select Tools > Delete cookies . Note: As cookies accumulate with time, they may eventually take up a large amount of memory space. You can free memory space by deleting the cookies stored in the memory. Tip: To empty the cache immediately, press the Menu key and select Tools > Clear cache . Empty cache on exit : If you select Yes , the cache memory is emptied when you exit the WWW browser. The options are Yes / No . Note The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache of your phone. A cache is a buffer memory, which is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords (for example, your bank account), empty the cache of your phone after each use. Empty history list on exit : I f you select Yes , the history list is emptie d when you exit the WWW browser. The options are Yes / No . Cache, History, and Plugins view These views display a list of information on cache memory, browser history and installed plugins. To view information about the cache memory used for temporary storage of the pages you visit, press the Menu key and select Information > Cache .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 150 Internet To view information about the sites you have visited, press the Menu key and select Information > History list . To view what add-on software for the WWW browser has been installed, pre ss the Menu key and select Information > Plug-ins . Plug-ins can display documents that the WWW browser itself cannot show, such as multimedia clips. You can download plug-ins from the WWW. Bookmarks The Bookmarks view can be accessed by pressing Bookmarks in the main view of the WWW application. See Figure 61. The Bookmarks view lists links to WWW pages in related folders. You can organise, edit, and view these bookmarks. You can also search for them and then connect to the URL addresses directly. See Figure 63. Figure 63
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 151 Internet Tip: To create and rename folders, press the Menu key and select Bookmarks > Insert new folder or Rename folder . To retrieve the currently highlighted Web page, pres s Go to . To open and close folders, press Open folder and Close folder . To edit the name or address of a bookmark, press Edit . To add a new bookmark, press New bookmark . To return to the main view, press Close vi ew . To add a new bookmark while browsing the WWW You can add a Web page, or a frame or link on a Web page, as a bookmark to your Bookmarks list. 1 On an open Web page, press the Menu key and select Tools > Add bookmark . 2 Edit the name and address of the bookmark, if necessary. 3 Press OK . To export the Bookmarks list In the Bookmarks view, press the Menu key and select Bookmarks > Export as HTM L. to export the current Bookmarks list as a HTML document. Note: When you export bookmarks as HTML, the folder structure is lost. WAP The WAP application can be used to access Internet services which are based on the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP). These services can contain news, weather reports, flight times, dictionaries, and so on.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 152 Internet Note: The content of each service depends on the content provider of that service. To use such a service, follow the instructions provided by the content provider. To obtain access to WAP services ⢠you must be within the coverage of a network which supports data calls, ⢠a data service must be activated for your SIM card, ⢠you must have obtained a WAP access point from a WAP service provider, and ⢠you must have entered the proper WAP settings. Differences between the WWW and WAP services applications The WAP application is simila r to the WWW application, but there are two differences: ⢠To access WAP services you need to define WAP access points in your communicator. WAP access points are additional to the Internet settings. You can receive WAP access points directly via a short message from your WAP service provider, or define them manu ally. This chapter contains in structions for manual setup. ⢠Certain bookmarks can be accessed through a specific access point, for example, banking services may have to be accessed through the bank â s own access point. The easiest way to use these kinds of services is to define an altogether new bookmark which uses the correct WAP and Internet access point.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 153 Internet To set up WAP connections Note: Before you can use the WAP services, you need to configure your WAP settings. Your WAP service provider will provide you with the exact values for the WAP settings. Follow the instructions carefully. You can use this information to define and edit the settings manually. Furthermore, your service provider may be able to send some, or all, of the required settings to you via a special short message, an Over The Air (OTA) message. After you have received the settings, you can start using the WAP application or edit the settings as described below. To define an d edit WAP conn ections 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > WAP access . A dialog opens. 2 Press New to create a new connection, and Edit to edit an existing conn ection. A dialog opens. See Figure 64. Figure 64 3 Press Close when you are ready. Tip: The shortcut to define and edit WAP access points is Ctrl Shift X. Name : Name of the connection. All your connections should have different names. You can define each name freely.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 154 Internet Secure connecti on : Whether the security protocol TLS is used for the connection. The options are Yes / No . Follow the instructions given to you by your WAP service provider. See also Glossary term â Transport Layer Securit y â on page 276. Note: Some secure connections use authentication procedures. If authentication fails, you may need to download some certification keys. Contact your WAP service provider for details. Internet access : Choose from a selection list the IAP you wish to use for this connection. If you have no IAPs, you create a new one by pressing New Internet access . See page 133. Gateway IP addres s : The IP address that the required WAP gateway uses. To change WAP access points 1 To change WAP access points, press the Menu key and select Tools > WAP access . A dialog opens. 2 Press Change to change the connection. A list opens. 3 Choose the connection from the list and press OK . Bookmarks The Bookmarks view is the main view of the WAP application. You can organise, edit, and view these bookmarks in the same way as WWW bookmarks, see page 150. Tip: The shortcut to add a bookmark is Ctrl B. To add a bookmark, press the Menu key, then select Bookmarks > Add bookma rk . A dialog opens. See Figure 65.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 155 Internet Figure 65 Note: A bookmark always uses the same connection defined in the WAP access field. To set up a WAP access point, see page 153. To open a WAP page defined in a bookmark, select the bookmark, then press Go to . To edit bookmark settings, select the bookmark, then press Edit . To import or export bookmarks, press the Menu key, then select Bookmarks > Imp ort bookmarks or Export bookm arks , respectively. To navigate WAP services There are three ways to open a WAP page, either: ⢠Choose a WAP bookmark from the list of bookmarks and press Go to . The page is retrieved; or Tip: The shor tcut to go to the home page is Ctrl H. ⢠Go to the WAP application home page. Press the Menu key, t hen select Go to > Home page . For more information on defining the WAP home page, see â WAP settings â on page 156; or Tip: The shortcut to open a URL is Ctrl O. ⢠Open a URL; press the Menu key, then select File > Open page . A dialog opens. Enter the address of the URL, for example: mobile.club.nokia.com .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 156 Internet Once the WAP page is opened, use the â§ an d ⨠arrows on the Arrows key to scroll the view and to choose hyperlinks and hotspots. Note: Some servers have access restrictions that require a valid user name and password. In this case, you will be asked to type in the user name and password before a connection to the service can be established. WAP settings To define WAP service settings, press the Menu key and select Tools > Settings . A dialog with two pages opens. Figure 66 Here you can change settings such as your WAP home page. NOTE: You can use a file on the communicator as your home page. Java The Java in the Nokia 9210i Communicator is a Personal Java applica tion environment designed especially for the communicator. Java enables you to use Java applications downloaded from the Internet.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 157 Internet Java Software Development Kit (SDK) is available in Forum Nokia.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 159 Messaging 9. Messaging Messaging contains the following applications: Fax, Mail and SMS (Short Message Service). To start Messaging, press the Messaging application button on the communica tor keyboard. The overall requirements for using fax, mail and SMS, applications are as follows: ⢠The phone must be turned on. ⢠The network you are using must support fax calls, data calls, and the Short Message Service. ⢠The fax, data and Short Message Service must be activated for your SIM card. Tip: To set Internet settings, see page 132. To set Mail settings, see page 172. ⢠You must have obtained an Internet Access Point (IAP) from an Internet service provider. ⢠You must have entered the proper Internet and Mail settings ⢠The short message centre number must be stored in the settings of the SMS application. Contact your home service provider for details. When you connect your communicator to a PC, you can synchronise your e-mails with Microsoft Windows programs. You can also reply to and rea d remotely Microsoft Windows and Lotus e-mail. For information on synchronisation, see â Mail synchronisation wit h your PCâ on page 184 and the PC Suite Guide.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 160 Messaging Messaging centre Figure 67 Tip: You can move between the two frames with the Arrows or Tab key. The main view of Messaging has two frames: on the left is a list of the folders in the Messaging centre, and on the right are the messages connected to the currently selected folder. Folders in the Messaging main view are: Inbox - Received faxes and short messages. Received mail appears in the Remote mailbox folder. Outbox - Messages which are waiting to be sent from the communicator. Drafts - Saved message drafts. Sent - Messages which have been sent from the communicator. Any remote mailboxes that you set up appear at the bottom of the folder list. To open folders and messages To open a folder, select the left frame in the main view of Messaging, go to the folder and press Open folder .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 161 Messaging Tip: You can also press Enter to open messages and folders. To open a message, in the message list of the main view, go to the message and press Open . The message opens in the appropriate viewer, for example, a mail message opens in the mail viewer. To manage folders You can create your own folders in Drafts , in your own folders and in the root of the folder list. You cann ot create new folders in Inbox , O utbox or Sent . Tip: You can create folders to IMAP4 remote mailboxes when online. 1 Select the left frame in the main view of the Messaging. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Folder > Create n ew folder ⦠. 3 Type a name for the new folder. 4 Select where you want to create the folder. 5 Press Create . The new folder appears on the folder list. To move faxes, mail and short messages from one folder to another, select the file, press the Menu key and select Edit > Move . To search faxes, mail and short messages for names, dates, time, or any other pieces of text press the Menu key and select Tool s > Find ⦠. For further details, see â To search for textâ on page 30. To sort messages and faxes You can also sort faxes, mail and short messages by various criteria, such as date and size, which affects the way they appear in the different views of Messaging.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 162 Messaging Tip: To choose the sorting order, press the Menu key and select View > Sorting order . Choose between Ascendi ng and Descend ing . 1 Open the folder where you want to sort the messages and faxes. 2 Press the Menu key and select View > Sort by . 3 Choose from the following options: Message type / S ender/Reci pient/ Subject/ Date/ Size / Priority . Inbox Figure 68 Tip: To reply to a message in the Inbox, press the Menu key and select Write > Re ply . Unread messages appear in bold. The icons in front of messages indicate message type, priority and possible attachments. Here are some of the icons that you may see: new mail in remote mailbox new fax new short message (SMS) new voice mail message new message from your network service provider new business card new calendar i nvitation
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 163 Messaging new ringing tone new remote configuration data unread mail unread mail received from PC by synchronisation priority high priority low message contains an attachment Outbox Tip: You can send faxes, mail and short messages immediately, at a predefined time or upon request, depending on a delivery setting. See Sending options in the corresponding editors. Figure 69 Statuses Faxes, mail and short messages waiting to be sent from the communicator can have the following statuses in Outbox: Sending - The fax or short message is currently being sent. Upon request - The mail, fax, or short message will be sent only if you specifically press Send now in the Outbox view.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 164 Messaging Waiting - The fax or short message is queuing to be sent and will be sent as soon as possible, for example, when the phone is switched on, signal strength becomes adequate, or the previous phone call ends. In the case of mail messages, Waiting shows that the message will be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox. Calling ⦠- Outbox is calling the recipient of the fax message. Preparing... - Outbox is rendering a T.4 format fax image; this means that colour is converted to black and white. Failed - One or more pages of a fax or short message fa iled to be sent. Tip: If the status of a fax, mail or short message is Suspended , Resend or Scheduled , you can open and delete it, or resu me sending. Suspended -You have suspended the sending of the message or fax. You can resume the sending of a message by pressing Send now in the Outbox view. Resend - The fax or short message failed to be sent but the communicator will retry to send it. Scheduled - The fax or short message is scheduled to be sent at a specific time. To cancel the sending of a fax, mail or short message, select it and press Cancel sending . When a message or fax has been successfully sent, it is automatically moved to the Sent folder. To write and send faxes, mail and short messages There are two ways you can start creating faxes, mail and short messages in the Messaging application:
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 165 Messaging Tip: If you a re already writing a message or fax and want to start on a new message, press the Menu key and select File > New short message or New fax . ⢠Press any of the following commands in the main view of Messaging: Write fax , Write mail or Write shor t message . ⢠Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Write > New message ⦠. Then select the appropriate message type. You can also send send faxes, mail and short messages in all the applications where you can find the option File > Se nd after pressing the Menu key. Tip: When you st art writing a new fax, mail or short message, a temporary copy of it is automatically stored in the Drafts folder. It is removed from Drafts and placed in Outbox once you press Send . If you want to save, but not send a fax, mail or short message you have just writte n in the corresponding editor, press Close . The message is saved in the Drafts folder. The saved message replaces the previously saved version of the same message. To revert back to the previously saved version of the mail or fax, press the Menu key and select File > Discard changes . Note that this is not possible with short messages. To select recipients There are two ways to select recipients to your fax, mail and short messages: Note: A fax can have only one recipient. 1 Press Recipient in the corresponding message editor. A dialog listing your contacts opens, see figure 70. Figure 70
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 166 Messaging Tip: You can select more than one cont act at a ti me, see â To select several items at once â on page 26. 2 Search for a contact or contacts in the left frame and press Select . The right frame shows the contacts you have already selected; to remove a contact, select it and press Remove . 3 Press Done . You can also just type in the first letters or the whole name of the recipient into the header of the fax, mail or short message and check if the letters or name match an entry in your contacts database: 1 Type in the name of the recipient into the header of the message. 2 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Check names . Tip: In the case of mail, you need to select the contacts to the appropriate fields in the dialog by pressing To , Cc or Bcc . 3 If the name you have entered matches to more than one name, or if the person has more than one GSM phone number, fax number or mail address, a selection list appears. Select the correct name, phone number, or address from the list and press Select . Checked recipients are moved to separate lines in the header of the message. Note that a fax can have only one recipient. 4 To add another recipient to a mail or short message, press Enter after a checked recipient or insert the semicolon â ;â as a separator. To delete a checked recipient, move the cursor to the end of the entry and press backspace. To avoid low memory You should regularly delete messages from Inbox and Sent folders and delete retrieved mail from the communicator memory to free up memory space.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 167 Messaging WARNING! If you do not use this method to delete mail messages from your communicator, the messages you delete from your communicator may also be permanently deleted from your remote mailbox the next time wh en you go on line. Tip: Use a PC mail client to move mail messages from your remote inbox to other folders for archiving. If you keep th e number of messages in the remote inbox to a minimum, your communicator has more available memory and the mail connection is faster. To delete dowloaded mail messages from the communicator: 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Tools > Message storage ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 2 On the Communicator page you can choose to delete all mail messages or messages older than a given time period. To delete selected messages, press Delete now . Messages are deleted from your communicator â s memory, but they are not deleted from your remote mailbox. On the Memory page, you can delete or move messages from the current store. To change the store in use, press Change . To move the message storage from communicator â s memory to a memory card or vice versa, press Move . To delete all the messages in the selected messa ge storage, press De lete . Tip: See â Mail attachments â on page 182 to delete attachments from received mail messages. WARNING: Deleting the message storage deletes per manently all messages and mailbox folders and restores all messaging settings to factory defaults. Note: If you create a new message store to a memory card and remove the card a new storage must then be created in the internal memory when new messages are received. This leads to a situa tion where you cannot move messages from one memory storage to another, since only one me ssage store at a time can be in use.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 168 Messaging Fax Tip: For more advanced word processing, use Word Processor instead of the fax editor. You can w rite and send faxes in the fax editor. You can write documents in the Word Processor or Sheet applications and then send them as faxes. It is also possible to send faxes with embedded images. For details on images, see â Imagingâ on page 233. To write and send a new fax 1 Press Write fax in the main view of Messaging. The fax editor opens, see figure 71. Tip: You can zoom in th e fax editor. Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom > Zoom in or Zoom out Figure 71 Tip: To select a recipient, see details on page 165. 2 Write the fax. To format the text, press the Menu key and select Format . 3 Press Recipien t to select the recipient. A fax can have only one recipient. Tip: To define a specific date and time when th e fax will be sent, select Scheduled in the Send fax option. 4 If you wish to adjust the sending options of the fax, press Se nding options . For details, see Fax settings on page 171. 5 Press Send . Note: Voice calls are not possible when a fax is being sent or received.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 169 Messaging Fax cover page Tip: To define the default format of the header in your faxes, and if you want a cover template to be attached to the faxes, see â Fax settingsâ on page 171. You can attach a cover page to the fax you are currently creating or editing. 1 Press Sending options and then select Fax cover page . 2 Choose one of the following options: None : The header of the fax will have only the To: and Fax n umber: fields. Header : The header of the fax will have information about the sender and recipient of the fax, and the date of the fax. Template 1 : The header field of the fax will have information about the sender and recipient of the fax and a separate Remarks: field. Full template : The header field of the fax will have more information about the sender and recipient of the fax, the date of the fax and a separate Re marks: field. You can save and use customised cover templates in the Templates folder using File manager; for more information see page 206. Whatever cover template you use, the availa ble recipient in formation is filled in automatically. To receive and read faxes Tip: To forward a received fax, press the Menu key and select File > Forward . Faxes are received automatically, provided th at this service is available and that the phone is turned on and within network coverage. When a new fax is received, you hear a tone - unless the system is set to a silent profile - and an information note is shown on the display. Tip: You can zoom and rotate in the fax viewer. Each press of Rotate rotates the fax 90 degrees clockwise. Press Open to view the fax. To open a fax received earlier, go to the Inbox, select the fax and press Open . Note: If a fax is not received completely due to some failure, it is named Incomplete fax .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 170 Messaging To select and save all or part of a received fax You can select all or part of a fax and save it in another format for further editing. To select an area of a fax page 1 Press the Menu key in the fax viewer and select Tools > Selectio n frame . A selection frame appears in the fax viewer. 2 Use the arrows key to move the selection frame to the upper-left corner of the area you want to select. 3 To change the size of the selection frame, press and hold the Ctrl key and press the arrows key. To cancel the selection, press the Menu key and select Tools > Selection frame again, or just press Esc key. To save fax in another format 1 Press the Menu key i n the fax viewer and sel ect File > Export ⦠. Select the range to be exported. The options are Whole document / Current page / Se lected / User defined . Press OK . A dialog opens. 2 Specify the name and location of the new document. To change the format of the new document, press Change format. 3 Press OK to save the exported fax file. Fax polling You can retrieve faxes from a remote fax box by using Fax polling, if available in the network. It allows you to make a fax call to a fax machine and then receive information by fax.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 171 Messaging To retri eve faxes from a remote fax box 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Receive > Fax > Dial fax poll . 2 Type in the fax number for the remote fax box, or choose the number by pressing Recipient . 3 Press Call to call the number . Fax settings Any changes you make to fax settings affect the way in which your faxes are sent and received. 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Tools > Account settings ⦠. 2 Select Fax and press Edi t . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following: Settings page Fax cover page : Defines whether or not a cover page will be used. The options are None / Header / Templ ate 1 / Full template - In addition to the options above, the option list may contain other cover templates saved in the Templates folder. Send fax : Defines when the fax will be sent. The options are Immediately / Upon request . Advanced page Resolution : The resolution of the sent an d received f axes. The opt ions are High / Standard .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 172 Messaging ECM : Defines whether or not the Error Correction Mode is used when faxes are sent. If set to On , any pages containing errors are automatically returned to sender, until the defects are corrected. The options are On /Of f . Resend : Defines which pages will be sent again if the fax sending ha s failed. The options are All pages / Missed pages. Mail The Nokia 9210i Communicator mail system is compliant with Internet standards SMTP, IMAP4 (rev 1) and POP3. To be able to receive and send ma il, you need to have set up a re mote mailbox service. This service may be offered by an Internet service provider, a network service provider, or your company. Tip: If you press Write mail in the main view of Messaging and you have not set up your mail account, you will be prompted to do so. Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and forward mail on your communicator, you must do the following: ⢠You must configure an Internet access point (IAP) correctly. See â To set up your Internet access point â on page 132 ⢠You must define your Mail settings correctly. See â Mail settingsâ on page 172. Note: Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and Internet service providers. Mail settings Any changes you make to mail settings affect the way your mail is sent and received.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 173 Messaging To connect to your remote mailbox, you need to define a mail account on your communicator: 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of the Messaging centre and select Tools > Account settin gs ⦠. 2 Press Create new . A selection list of possible account types opens. 3 Select Mail and press OK . A dialog with four pages opens. See figure 72 Figure 72 4 Define the following: General pa ge Mail account name : The name of the remote mailbox. You can type here any name to describe the mailbox. My name : Type in your name. Username : Type in your user name. Password : Type in your password. If you le ave this field blank, you will be prompted for a password when you try to read mail in your remote mailbox. My mail address : Type in the mail address given to you by your service provider.The address must contain the â @â character. Replies to your messages are sent to this address.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 174 Messaging Internet access : The IAP connection used for the mailbox. Choose an IAP from the list. To create an IAP, see â To set up your Internet access poi nt â on page 132. Default account : Choose a mail account from the list. When you set up an account for the first time, it will be the defaul t until more accounts are crea ted. Servers pa ge Tip: Outgoing mail servers are typica lly called SMTP servers or hosts and incoming mailservers are called POP3 or IMAP4 servers. Mail account type : Defines the mail protocol your remote mailbox se rvice provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . Outgoing ma il server : The IP address or host name of the computer that sends your Internet mail. Incoming mail server : The IP address or host n ame of the computer that receives your Internet mail. Retrieve Tip: If you prefer reading your mail messages and replying to them while connected to y our remote mailbox, select Mail headers (stay online) . If you prefer to retrieve the messages and disconnect, select Mess ages . Retrieve : Specifies what will be retrieved from the remote mailbox when the connection is established. The options are Mail headers (st ay online) / Messages / Messag es and attachments . The Message s option is available only if the mailbox type is IMAP4 . Max. size of mail : The maximum size of a message which is retrieved. The minimum is 1 KB and maximum 1000 KB. Sync. mails in Inbox : Specifies the number of message headers to be retrieved from Inbox of the remote mailbox. The options are All / None or you can define the appropriate number of messages to be retrieved.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 175 Messaging Sync. mails in folders : Specifies the number of message headers to be retrieved from the folders of the remote mailbox excluding Inbox. The options are All / None or you can define the appropriate number of messages to be retrieved. Advanced page Default mail type : The type of mail that you can write and send from your communicator. The options are Plain text (no MIME) / Plain text/ Formatted text (HTML) . Send mail : How mail is sent from your communicator. The options are Immediat ely / During next con nection / Upon request . Include signature : Specifies whether your signature is attached to sent mail. The options are No / Use my contact card / Custom . If you choose Custom , you can press Edit signature to modify the signature file. Request read report : The options are Yes / No . If you choose Yes , you will receive a notification when the recipient has opened your mail. You can only receive a notification if the recipient â s e-mail application supports this feature. Allow report request s : The options are Yes / No . If you choose No the sender of a message you receive will not get a notification, when you open the message. Copy to my mail address : The options ar e Yes / No . Secure login (APOP) : Used with POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to a remote mail server. The options are Yes / No . Secure connection (TLS) : Used with POP3, IMAP4 and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to a remote mailbox. The options are Yes / No .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 176 Messaging IMAP4 folder path : Define the location of the IMAP mail folder here, if not defined automatically. This option is available only if the mailbox type is IMAP4. To edit an account 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Tools > Account settings ⦠. A list of accounts opens. 2 Select the account you want to edit and press Edit . 3 Define the settings on the General , Servers , Retriev e and Advanced pages explained above. 4 Press the Esc key to discard any changes. Press Done to accept the changes you have made. Note: You cannot edit mailbox settings when online. To write and send new mail Tip: If you cannot send mail from your communicator, check first that your mail address is correct in Mail set tings. See page 173. 1 Press Write mail in the main view of Messaging. The mail editor opens, see figure 73. Figure 73 Tip: To see how to select recipients, see page 165. 2 Write the mail message.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 177 Messaging 3 Press Recipient to select the recipient or recipients of the message, or type in the name or mail address into the To: , Cc: and Bcc: fie lds. You can move from one insertion field to another by pressing the Tab key. 4 If you wish to adjust the sending options of the mail message, press Sendi ng options . A dialog with two pages opens, see page 178. 5 Press Send . Tip: You can zoom in the mail editor. Note: You cannot enter accented characters, such as é or ä , into mail addresses. Recipients There are three hierarchy levels of recipients in a mail message: Tip: To hide or show Cc: and Bcc: fields i n the mail editor, press the Menu key and select View > Show Cc field or Show Bcc field . To: - Message is sent directly to the recipient. Cc: - A copy of the message is sent to the recipient, and the recipient â s name is visible to other recipients of the message. Bcc: - A copy of the message is sent to the recipient, but the recipient â s nam e is not visible to other recipients of the message. Note: The addresses you have entered are checked against your contacts database once you press Send . Names whi ch do not match wi th the contacts database, or addresses which do not have â @â , should be removed from the address fields. If a name you have entered in one of the address fields matches a group na me, the name is replaced with the mail addresses of the group members. Style of sen t mail You can format only HTML messages. Press the Menu key and select Format > Formatting . This opens the following options for formatting: Bold , Italic , Underline and Bullets .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 178 Messaging Tip: To format the font for a select ed text area , press the Menu key and select Format > Font ⦠. To set a preferred font for plain text and HTML mail, press the Menu key and select Tools > Preferences ⦠. To align a mail message, press the Menu key and select Format > Alignment . This opens the following options: Left , Centre and Right . Sending options Tip: In the case of PC mail message (see page 184), Priority and Mail account in use are the only options you can change. The options in the Sending options dialog contain values set in mail settings, as explained on page 172. Press Sending options to open the dialog. Any changes you make in this dialog affect only the current mail message you are about to send. Note: Changing the options in the Sending options dialog affects the format of the message when it is opened by t he recipient. For example, the format may affect the legibility of the characters. Message page Priority : The priority of a message. The options are High / No rmal / Low . Message type : The type of the message. The options are Plain text (no MIME) / Plain text / Format ted text (HTML) . Request read report : Specifies whet her to add to the outgoing mail, a request for you to receive notification, if the recipient has opened your mail. Delivery page Mail account in use : The remote mail service which is used for sending this message. Note: Changing the mail account does not change the default options in other fields of this page.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 179 Messaging Send mail : When the message will be sent. The options are Immediately / Upon request / During next con nection . To retrieve mail Tip: Delete mail regularly from your communicator to free up memory space. For more information, see â To avoid low memory â on page 166. Mail addressed to you is not autom atically received by your communicator, but by your remote mailbox. To read your mail, you must first connect to the remote mailbox and then select the messages you wish to retrieve into your communicator. Connection to a remote mailbox is established via a data call. WARNING! Messages that you mark as deleted when offline will also be deleted from the remote mailbox server, when onli ne. To delete local mail messages without deleting remote mailbox files, see â To avoid low memory â on page 166. To connect to a remote mailbox 1 Select the remote mailbox in the left frame of the main view of Messaging. Tip: If you do not specif y a password when initia lly conne cting to the r emote mailbox, a dialog opens. Type in the password and press OK . 2 Press Retrieve mail . 3 When the connection to the remote mailbox has been established, press the Menu key and select Retriev e > New or Select ed or All mail. 4 When all the mail you have requested is retrieved, press Go offline . Note: Pressing Go offline does not necessarily disconne ct the phone, if there are other applications open that use the connection. Press the Menu key and sele ct File > Disconnect to hang up.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 180 Messaging To subscribe and unsubscribe to remote mailbox folders If your remote mailbox is of IMAP4 st andard, you can edit and synchronise remote inbox folders in your communicator. To do this, you need to subscribe to the folders and make them visible in your communicator. Tip: To create new folders in your remote mailbox, go online, press the Menu key and select File > Folder . You can now choose whether to Create new folder ⦠or Rename folder ⦠. 1 Go online. 2 Press the Menu key and select Receive > Folder subscriptions ⦠. A list of folders in the remote mailbox opens. 3 Select the folder. 4 Press Subscribe . If you have already subscribed to the folder, press Un subscribe to cancel the subscription. 5 Press Go offline and Go online to include the new subscribed folders in the list. To read mail You can read, reply to and forward mail in the ma il viewer. To read received messages, select the message in the Inbox and press Open . The mail viewer shows the message in a read-only state, which means that you cannot edit it or the a ttachments linked to it. If there is a Web link in the message, you can open it by going to that link and pressing Use . Tip: You can create new contacts from the other recipients of a received mail; press the Menu key and select Tools > Add to contacts . If there is a fax, mail or short message link in the message, you can write a fa x, mail or short message by selecting the link and pressing the corresponding command button. This opens the appropriate editor where the recipient field is completed using the fax, mail address or GSM number in the link. To delete the message, press Delete .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 181 Messaging WARNING! Messages marked as deleted when offline will also be deleted from the remote mailbox server, when online. To delete local mail messages without deleting remote mailbox files, see â To avoid low memory â on page 166. To reply to mail 1 Select the mail message in Inbox and press Open . The mail viewer opens. Tip: To forward mail, press the Menu key and select File > Forward . 2 Press Reply . The mail editor opens. If you wish to reply to all the recipients, not just the sen der of the mail message, press the Menu key and select File > Reply to > All recipients . Tip: To search and replace text in a ma il, press the Menu key and select Edit > Find ⦠. 3 Edit the message in the mail editor and press Send . Note: When replying to a mail message, HTML messages are included as attachments. Style of re plied to, and f orwarded mail You can edit the style of replied to, and forwarded mail. 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Preferences ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Define the following: Include message in reply : If you choose Yes , the origina l message is included in the reply to the message. The options are Yes / No . HTML normal f ont : Defines t he default font size and family used in HTML messages. Note that HTML messages may contain tags that change what you set in this option. HTML font si ze : Defines the size of the font used in HTML messages. Plain text font : Defines the font used in plain text messages. Plain text font size : Defines the size of the font used in plain text messages.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 182 Messaging Mail attachments You can send most documents and message s you write in t he other applications of your communicator as mail attachments. WARNING! Mail attachments may contain viruses or they can otherwise be harmful to your communicator or PC. Do not open any attachment, if you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender. For more information, see â Certificate manager â on page 224 To add mail attachments Tip: To edit ma il attachments, press the Menu key and select Attachm ents > Edit . You cannot edit att achments in received mail messages. 1 Press the Menu key in the mail editor and select Attachments > Insert file ⦠. 2 Search and select the file you wish to attach to the mail. To view and save mail attachments Attachments always appear at the bottom of an open mail message. You can view the attachments using the appropriate viewers, if available. Tip: To open an attachment for viewing, select it with the Arrows key and then press Enter. 1 Open the mail message containing attachments and press Attachments . A dialog opens. 2 Press Open to open the attachment for viewing. Press Save to save the attachment. Press Delete locally to delete the attachment from your communicator; the attachment is not deleted from your remote mailbox.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 183 Messaging Working online and offline Working online means working with your communicator connected to a remote mailbox via Internet connection. When you work offline which means that your communicator is not connected to a remote mailbox, you can delete only messages, not folders. When online, you can delete, rename or create new folders in your remote mailbox. Note: Any changes you make in the remote mailbox folders while offline take effect in your remote mailbox the next time you go online and synchronise. For example, if you delete a mail message from your communicator when offline, the message will be deleted from the remote mailbox the next time you connect to the mailbox. If you want to delete a message from your communicator to save memory, see â To avoid low memory â on page 166. Managing your mail offline enables you to save in connection costs and work in conditions that do not allow data connection, such as on aircraft. For information about using your communicator on an aircraft, see â Flight profile â on page 91. Remember also relevant warnings, see â IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION â on page 261. PC Mail Whereas you can send and receive Internet mail over a data call, you cannot send PC mail from the communicator. PC mail is mail you can read, write and edit on your communicator, but which you can send and receive only through a PC, the next time you synchronise your communicator with the PC.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 184 Messaging Mail synchronisation with your PC Synchronisation is the process of making the contents of your mail messages and mail folders identical on both your communicator and your PC. This is done by copying and combining information between the two machines. For more information, see PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM. Mail synchronisation copies the messages between your communicator and your PC E-mail program to allow you use either machine for reading and replying to messages. You can convert Internet mail to PC mail so that it is synchronised with a PC, or convert PC mail to Internet mail so that it can be sent directly from the communicator. All synchronisation settings are defined on the PC. The only setting you can do on your communicator is to delete the account you are using. To create new PC mail Note: You need to have set a mail account on your remote PC to be able to create new PC mail. 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Write > New message ⦠. A selection list appears. 2 Select PC mail and press OK . If you have more than one PC account, a dialog opens indicating which PC account will be used when sending the PC mail. Select the PC account a nd press OK . 3 Write th e PC mai l in the ma il edito r.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 185 Messaging To convert to PC or Internet mail Tip: You can view and edit PC mail just li ke Internet mail on your communicator. Note: HTML messages cannot be converted since PC mail does not support the sending of HTML messages. You must change the message type to plain text or non-MIME type in the Sending options dialog, before you can convert the message to PC mail. See page 178 for more information. PC and Internet mail appear together in the folders. 1 Select the mail message or messages you wish to convert. Tip: PC mail is distinguished from Internet mail by a different icon. 2 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Convert to in ternet mai l or Convert to PC mail , depending on the type of mail you wish to convert. 3 If there are multiple PC mail or SMTP services defined, a selection list of available services defined in the messaging server will be shown. Select the service and press Convert . Note: You can convert several mails at the same time, but make sure that the mails are of the same type, either Intern et or PC mail. Short Message Service Tip: Your service provider may send you smart messages in the form of short messages; these messages may include, for example, configuratio n settings. For details, contact your service provider. The Short Message Service (SMS) e nables you to send and receive short messages over the digital wireless network. Short messages can be sent or received even during voice, data, and fax calls. Messages can be read in any mobile phone that has the capability. If the receiving phone is switched off at the time of sending, the short message centre continues to attempt to send the message until th e validity period allowed by the net work expires.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 186 Messaging Note: If you want to send text you hav e written or edited in another appl ication as a short message, all embedded objects or any rich formatting will be lost. You cannot send attachments as short messages, either. To write and send a new short message Note: You cannot change the font, style or format of short messages. Tip: When sending a short message that contains special or accent ed characters to an older mobile phone, the older phone may not be able to view the message. In this case, send the message without specia l or accented characters. 1 Press Write short message in the main view of Messaging. The SMS editor opens, see figure 74. Figure 74 Tip: You can zoom in th e SMS editor. Press the Menu key and select View > Zoom > Zoom in or Zoom out 2 Press Recipien t to select the reci pient, or type the number directly into the header of the message. 3 Press the Arrows key to move down to the message field an d write the short message. To view the length of the current me ssage, press the Menu key and select View > Message length .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 187 Messaging Tip: To define a specific date and time when the short message will be sent, select Scheduled in the Send short message option. 4 If you wish to adjust the sending options of the short message, press Sending options . A dialog with two pages, Sending op tions and Advanced opens. For details, see SMS settings on page 188. 5 Press Send . To receive and read short messages Tip: Your Inbox shows the date of received short messages and the time of the short messages received on the current day. To view when it was sent, open the message in the SMS viewer. Short messages are received automati cally, provided that this service is availabl e and that the phone is on and within network coverage. When a new short message arrives, a tone will sound - unless the device is set to a silent profile - and an information note is shown on the display. The SMS viewer shows the message in a read-only state, which means that you cannot edit it. Tip: To create a contact card of the sender of a short message, press the Menu key and select Tools > Add to Contacts ⦠. Received short messages can also contain some special text s trings such as URLs. If a URL is highlighted when you move the cursor over it, you can open the corresponding link by pressing Use . To reply to short messages Tip: When replying to a message, you can choose whether you want the text of the received message to be in the reply. Select No in Include original in reply in SMS settings to minimise the length of the reply. Open the message, press Reply and write another short message. If the received message has a reply path, the note Reply via same centre is shown in the header of the message. Short messages on the SIM card To move and copy messages from the SIM card to the Inbox, press the Menu key and select Receive > Short me ssage > SIM message s . To move, copy or delete messages, press the corresponding command button.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 188 Messaging SMS settings Any changes you make to SMS settings affect the way in which your short messages are sent and received. 1 Press the Menu key in the main view of Messaging and select Tools > Account settings ⦠. 2 Select Short message and press Edi t . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following: General pa ge Press Service centres , which opens a dialog w here you can define new message centres, as well as edit and delete existing ones. All message centres are listed by name and number. Service centre in use : Defines the service centre that is used for delivering the short messages. Tip: To open the system log, press the Menu key and select Tools > Log . Delivery report : If you choose Yes , you can view the status of the sent message ( Pending , failed, Delivered ) in the system log. If you choose No , only the status sent is shown in the system log. Send short message : You can select when you want the message to be sent. The options are Immediately / Upon req uest / Scheduled . When Scheduled is selected, you must define a Date . Validity period : If the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the specified validity period, the message is removed from the short message service centre. If Maximum is chosen, the validity period is set to the maximum value allowed by the message centre. Note that the network must support this featur e. The option s are 1 hour / 6 hours / 1 day/ 1 week/ Maximum.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 189 Messaging Advanced page Reply via same centre : This network service allo ws the recipient of your short message to reply using your message centre. If you choose Yes and the recipient replies to your message, the return message is sent using the same service centre number. This requires that the recipient has subscribed to the Short Message Service, is able to a reply to a message, and uses a device which supports this feature. Note also that the network must support this feature. Include original in reply : Specifies whether text in the received short message is quoted when you make a reply. If you choose Yes , the contents of the message body are copied to a new short message. Concatenation : If set to No , messages longer than 160 characters are sent as several short messages. If set to Yes , messages that are lo nger than 160 characters are sent as several messages, but if the recipient has a Nokia communicator, the messages are received as one long message.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 191 Office 10. Office Office contains the Word Processor, Sheet, and Presentation viewer applications, which are all compatible wi th Microsoft Windows. Office als o contains a File manager application for file and folder management tasks like moving, copying, and renaming files and folders. Figure 75 Word Processor You can use Word Processor to write new and edit existing text documents. You can insert and view images and other files in the documents. You can also send and receive documents as fax, SMS, mail, PC mail, or via infrared. You can open, edit and save documents created with Microsoft Word for Windows versions 95, 97 and 20 00. Note that not all fea tures and formatti ng of the original documents will be supported. Documents made with other versions of Microsoft Word can only be viewed. For information on other file format conversions, see the PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 192 Office To create a new document Tip: You can use the clipboard command shortcuts Ctrl x, Ctrl c, and Ctrl v to cut, copy, and paste text. When you open the Word Processor application, a new document is opened. You can start writing immediately. You can modify the style of a document on a font and a paragraph level. You can use different fonts, font sizes, and styles. You can apply different predefined or user-defined styles by either modifying particular pieces of text separately or by using a template on which the style of the text is based (see page 194). To change fonts 1 Press Font in the document you are creating or editing. A dialog opens, see Figure 76. Figure 76 2 Press Change to change the value of a list item. To see the effect of the changes you have made, press Preview . 3 Press Done to save the changes you have made. To change text style 1 Select the text whose style you wan t to change. 2 Press Style . A list of choices in alphabetical order opens.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 193 Office 3 Select a style option from the list and press Set : These are the default values of the style options in the list: To create a new or modify an existing style option 1 Press Style . 2 To crea te a new sty le optio n, press New . Or, to modify a style option, select the style and press Edit . A dialog opens. 3 Give the style option a new name by typing over the old name. Note that you canno t edit the nam es of th e defaul t styl es. Press Format to view a list of style values you can change. 4 Press Change to change the values of the following: Font , Alignment , Indents , Tabs , Line spacing , Borders , Bullets , and Outline le vel . 5 Press Done to confirm the changes. Style option Font Po i n t size Bold Italics Under lined Justifi cati on Normal URW Sans 12 pt Off Off Off Left Header URW Sans 1 0 pt Off Off Off Left Footer URW Sans 1 0 pt Off Off Off Left Heading 1 URW Sans 16 pt On Off Off Left Heading 2 URW Sans 14 pt On Off Off Left Heading 3 URW Sans 12 pt On Off Off Left Title URW Sans 18 pt On Off Off Centred
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 194 Office Templates Example : You may have a company template which shows the company name and defines a particular layout. You can use templates and save documents as templates when creating and editing documents. To select a template, press the Menu key and select File > Templates > Select template ⦠. A list of available templates opens. Select a template and press OK . To save a document as a template, press t he Menu key and select File > Templates > Save as template ⦠. To delete a template, go to File manager. See page 206. To insert an object Tip: To resize an image after insertion, press the Menu key and select Edit > Object > Object d etails ⦠. 1 Press Insert object in the document you are creating or editing. A dialog opens. See Figure 77. Figure 77 2 Select from the list the type of object you want to insert. 3 Press Insert new to open the corresponding editor. Press Insert existing to open a list of files. Only files which you can insert are listed.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 195 Office Note: Objects in a document are not links but embedded attachments, which may increase the file size of the document dramatically. To hide or make visible text markers To hide or make visible markers that are used in editing within the document, proceed as follows. 1 Press the Menu key and first select Tools > Preferences ⦠. A dialog with two pages opens. 2 Set the following options on or off: Basic options page : Show tabs , Show spaces , and Show p aragraph marks , Advanced options page : Show forced lin e breaks , Show non-breaking spaces , and Show hard hyphens . To view the outline of a document Tip: To open a specific page in the document, press the Menu key and select Tools > Go to ⦠. 1 Press the Menu key and select View > Outline ⦠. A tree structure of the document opens. 2 To show more details, press Expa nd . To show less details, press Collapse . To open a selected point in the document, press Go to . 3 Press Close to return to the doc ument v iew. To paginate After creating a new document, you can divide it into pages. Press the Menu key and select Tools > More > Paginat e . This command will also update the page numbering.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 196 Office Sheet In Sheet you can work and store your data in a file that is called a workbook. Each workbook contains at least one worksheet. A workbook can also contain chartsheets; a chartsheet is a spreadsheet file containi ng a chart that is based on data from a worksheet. You can open, edit and save documents created with M icrosoft Excel for Windows versions 95, 97 and 20 00. Note that not all fea tures and formatting of the origi nal files will be supported. Files made with other versions of Microsoft Excel may only be viewed. For information on other file format conversions, see the PC Suite guide on the CD-ROM. Workbooks Tip: To add a workbook to the Desk application, press the Menu key and sele ct File > Add to Desk . To create a new workbook, press the Menu key and select File > New workbook . To open an existing workbook, press the Menu key and select File > Open . To save a workbook, press the Menu key in the worksheet view and select File > Save . To send a workbook as mail or via infrared, press the Menu key in the worksheet view and select File > Send . Worksheets To create a new worksheet in a workbook, press the Menu key and select Insert > New worksheet .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 197 Office To enter data To enter data, select a cell with the Arrows key and start typing the data i n the selected cell. To confirm what you have entered into a cell, press Enter, OK , or go to another cell with the Arrows key. To dismiss the action, press Esc or Cancel . You can also enter a formula to perform operations on worksheet data. Sheet application provides some predefined, or built-in, formulas, which are known as functions. To insert a function, press Insert function . A dialog opens. See Figure 78. The function categories you can choose from are as follows: All , Financial , Date and time , Mathematical , Stati stical , Lookup , Te xt , Logical , and Information . Each category has a set of functions, which you ca n see from the list next to Function na me . Select the function you want and press Close . Figure 78
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 198 Office Example: You might want to sum up figures in cells C2 to C4 in cell C5; select cell C5, press Point reference and select the cell range from C2 to C4. Press Enter or OK to confirm the action. The SUM will now appear in C5. In a formula, you can enter constant values or cell references. A cell reference tells Sheet where to look for the values or data you want to use in the formula. To enter a reference to a cell or cells in a formula: 1 Go to the cell you want to edit, and press Edit. 2 Move the cursor to the place where you want to insert a reference, and press Point reference . 3 Select the cells that cont ain the values you want to use. See â To select cellsâ on page 135. The focus remains in the cell you are editing. Press Enter or OK to confirm the action. Figure 79 To select cells There are two ways to select a cell or a range of cells in a worksheet: Example: To select column A, enter A:A. To select row 1, enter 1:1. To select columns B and C as well as rows 2 and 3, enter B2:C3 ⢠Press the Menu key and select Edit > Select . Then enter the selection range or choose a range from the list. ⢠Press and hold the Shift key, and increase the selection frame with the Arrows key. To select entire rows or columns, press and hold the Shift key, and select the desired row or column headings with the Arrows key.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 199 Office To select the entire workshee t, use the shortcut Ctrl A. The selection is cleared when you press the Arrows key or Tab key. To insert cells 1 Select a number of cell(s) that you want to insert into the worksheet. 2 Press the Menu key and select Insert > Cells . A dialog opens. 3 Define whether you want the inserted cell or cells to a ppear above ( Shift cells down ) or left ( Shift cells right ) of the selected range. To insert an entire row(s) or column(s), select either E ntire row or Entire column . 4 Press OK to accept the inserti on and Cancel to dismiss it . To sort cells You can rearrange the order of cells from top to bottom and left to right. 1 Select the range. 2 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Sort . 3 Select either Top to bottom or Left to right . A dialog opens. 4 Define the sorting criteria. 5 Press Close to do the sorting. To search for data 1 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Find . A dialog opens. 2 In the Find: field, enter the string you want to search for.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 200 Office Tip: Pressing Options opens up the following options: Search in values , Search in formulae , Match case , Find entire cells onl y , Direction , and Search by . 3 Press Find to search for the string. Press Options to search the worksheet according to certain criteria. Press Replace to replace the string with something else. To clear cells 1 Choose the cell or cells you want to clear. 2 Press Clear . A lists of choices appears. 3 To clear both the contents and formats of the cell or cells, select All . To clear only the contents of the cell or cells, select Contents . To clear only the formats of the cell or cells, se lect Formats . To adjust column width or row height 1 Select the column(s), or row(s). 2 Press the Menu key and select Format > Column width ⦠or Row height⦠. 3 To increase column width, press > on the Arrows key as many times as necessary. To diminish column width, press <. To increase row height, press ⨠on the Arrows key as many times as is necessary. To diminish row height, press â§ . To adjust the width or height by exact figures, press Define width . Figure 80
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 201 Office To align cell contents 1 Select the cell or ce lls. 2 Press the Menu key and select Format > Alignment . A dialog opens. 3 Define the following options: Horizonta l , Vertical , and Wrap text to cell . To change the ap pearance of cell borders 1 Select the cell or ce lls. 2 Press the Menu key and select Format > Cell appea rance > Borders . A dialog opens. 3 Define the following options: Outline , Top , Bott om , Left , Right , and Line colour . To change nu mber format 1 Select the cell or ce lls. 2 Press the Menu key and select Format > Numbers . A dialog ope ns. 3 Choose the required format from the list. Depending on the format you choose, you may define the place of the decimal. To change fonts 1 Select the cell or ce lls. 2 Press the Menu key and select Format > Font . A dialog opens. 3 Press Change to change the value of a list item. 4 To see the effect of the changes you have made, press Preview . 5 Press Done to save the changes you have made. To change bac kground co lour 1 Select the cell or ce lls.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 202 Office 2 Press the Menu key and select Forma t > Cell appearance > Background colour . A dialog opens. 3 Choose the colour. To insert page break s 1 Press the Menu key and select Insert > Page break . A dialog opens. 2 Define the following options: Break at column and Break a t row . Note: Since the break is placed above and on the le ft side of the selected cell, you cannot insert a page break when the cell A1 is selected. To name cells Tip: To change viewer preferences, press the Menu key and select Tools > Settings . Set the following options on or off: Show gridlines , Show row headers , Show column headers , Automatic recalc ulation , Show zero values , and Show pagination lines . 1 Select the cell or cells. 2 Press the Menu key and select Insert > Name > Add . If the cell or cells already have a name, you can edit the name by selecting Edit . A dialog opens. 3 Enter the name. To name worksheets 1 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Rename worksheet . A dialog opens. 2 Choose the worksheet from the list and name it. To delete cells, columns, rows, page break s, and worksh eets 1 Select a cell with in the area you wa nt to delete. 2 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Delete . A dialog opens. 3 Choose from the list what you want to delete.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 203 Office To go to any sheet or chart within the sa me workbook Tip: T o v i e w s h e e t s i n t h e Chartsheet view, press Sheets/ Charts . 1 Press the Menu key and select View > Worksheets or Sheets/Charts . A list opens. 2 Choose a sheet or chart and press OK to open the sheet and Cancel to dismiss it. Note: You cannot change the order of the sheets. Chartsheets To create chartsheets There can be seven different kinds of charts: Line , Column , Stacked column , Bar , Stacked bar , X/Y scatter , and Pie . 1 Select a range of cells on a works heet. These will provide the data for your new chartsheet. 2 Press the Menu key and select Insert > New chart . A dialog opens. 3 Define the following: Chart na me , Char t type , 3-D , Background co lour , and Axis colour . 4 Press Close to create a new chartsheet and Esc to dismiss it. To edit chartsheets Tip: You can also press the Tab key and Enter to select objects. Press Esc to cancel the selection. 1 Press Select object . A dialog opens. 2 Choose an object from the following list for editing and press OK : Chart , Chart title , X-axis ,Y-axis , X-axis title , Y-axis title , Legend , Major X-axis gridlines , Minor X- axis gridli nes , Major Y-axis gridlines , Minor Y-axi s gridlines , and Series . The setting dialog for the selected object opens. See Figure 81 for an example of X-axis settings being edited. 3 To edit the object, press Change or press Enter. A dialog opens.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 204 Office To delete the object, press Delete . 4 Define the new values. Figure 81 5 Press Close to confirm the change s or Esc to dismiss them. Note: You can select only one object at a time. To replace char tsheet data Tip: To define the general appearance of a chart, press Chart settings . Define the page style and name in the two pages of the dialog which opens. You can replace the data on which your chartsheet is based. 1 Press Sheets/ Charts and select the worksheet your chart is based on. 2 Select a new data area for the chart from the worksheet, press the Menu key, and select View > Sheets/Charts to return to the chartsheet. 3 Press the Menu key, select Tools > Replace data , and press OK to confirm the changes or Cancel to di smiss them. Presentation viewer You can use Presentation viewer to vi ew presentations. You can also send and receive these presentations as mail or via infrared.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 205 Office You can view documents created with Microsoft PowerPoint for W indows versions 95,97 and 2000. Note th at not all features a nd formatting of the original documents will be supported. To view a presentat ion Press Open in the Presentation main view to select and view a document. To close the application, press Close . Tip: You can zoom in and out to get a better view of the presentation. When a document is opened, the top of the first slide is shown. To view the next slide, press Next or Enter. To view the previous slide, press Previous . To scroll the current slide, use the Arrows key. The outline view To get an overview of the whole presentation, press Outline view . This opens up a view where the text content of th e presentation is in a list format. See Figure 82. Figure 82 To view only title text s, press Titles only . To return to the standard sl ide show, press Slide view .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 206 Office To search for and view a slide 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Go to slide ⦠. A list of th e slides in t he presentation opens. 2 Go to the slide you want by using the Arrows key. 3 Press Go to open the slide. To view the presenter â s notes To view the presenter â s notes along with the slides, press the Menu key and select View > Notes view . File manager Tip: Use File manager together with a memory card to remove files and folders from the communicator memory and thus free memory. See â To back up and restore data to and from a memory card â on page 211. You can use File manager to manage the contents and properties of various folders. The main view has two frames: a folder t ree on th e left and a file list on the right. Figure 83 You can toggle between the frames with the Tab key.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 207 Office The folder view The folder tree can contain folders from two roots, the communicator and a memory card. Tip: Avoid saving files to the root of the communicator; use folders instead. Under the communicator root there is C:\Docume nts\ folder that contains four default folders: \Documents\Downloaded\ , \Documents\Photo gallery\ , \Documents\Templates\ , an d \Documents\Tones\ . To show or hide subfolders in the folder list frame, press < and > on the Arrows key. The - and signs in front of the folder icons indicate whether the subfolders are shown or hidden. Folders without either sign have no subfolders, and you can use the Arrows key to switch between the folder view and files view. Note: Multi-selecti on is not possible in the folder l ist frame. The files view Tip: To change the sorting order or the value by which the files are sorted (name, date and time, type, and size), press t he Menu key and select View > Sort by or Sorting order . The file list on th e right shows all the files in the source or folder currently se lected in the left frame. The title of the file list frame shows the path of the currently selected file. The file list frame also shows the application-related icon, name, and the last modification date of the file. The files are sorted in alphabetical order by default. Note: Hidden files are shown only if you press the Menu key and select View > Show all files . To view the contents of a folder 1 Choose a folder in the left folder tree frame and press Op en .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 208 Office A view of all the subfolders and files of the parent folder opens. See Figure 84. Figure 84 2 To view any possible subfolder, select it and press Open . 3 To view parent folders, press Esc. 4 Press Close folde r to return to the main view. The title of the folde r content view shows the path n ame and the number of files and subfolders in the folder, together with the total size of all the files in the folder. This view shows the name, last modification date and time, and the size of a particular file. The icon in front of the name indicates the type of file or subfolder. To open a file 1 Select a file and press Open . The file will then be opened in the corresponding application. 2 To return to the main view, press Close folder . Note: You can open only one file at a time.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 209 Office To move files and folders Tip: For multi-selection, see â To select several items at once â on page 26. 1 Select folders or files that you want to move and press Mo ve in the main view of File manager. A list of folders opens, as shown in Figure 85. Figure 85 2 Search for a target folder with the Arrows key. To hide or show the subfolders of a folder, press Collapse and Expand respectively. You can also navigate in the folder list with the Arrows key and / - keys. To create a new target folder, press New folder . 3 Press OK to confirm the move and Cancel to dismiss it. To create new folders 1 In the main view of File manager select the folder in which you want create a new folder 2 Select File > New folder . 3 Name the new folder. 4 To confirm the changes, press OK . To dismiss the changes, press Cancel .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 210 Office To rename files and folders 1 Select the file or folder in the main view of File manager. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Rename . The cursor now appears at the beginning of the selected file or folder name. 3 Rename the file or folder. 4 To confirm the changes, press OK . To dismiss the cha nges, press Cancel . To view the properties of files, folders, and drives Tip: In the Properties dialog, you can also change a file into hidden or read- only state or a folder in to read-only state. 1 Select the file, folder, or drive in the main view of Fil e manager. 2 Press the Menu key and select File > Properties ⦠. A dialog opens, as shown in Figure 86. Figure 86 To search for files and folders 1 Choose the folder or memory storage where you want the search to take place. 2 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Find ⦠. A dialog opens. 3 Enter in the field the string for which you want to search. 4 Press Options to define the search in more detail. See Figure 87.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 211 Office Tip: You can search according to time period, start and end time, and th e file type. Figure 87 Press Change to change the value of a list item. When ready, press Close . 5 Press Find to start the search. To interrupt the search, press Stop . 6 When the search is over, press Open to open the folder or file found. To start a new search, press New find . 7 To return to the main view, press Close . To back up and restore data to and from a memory card It is advisable to take backups of your communicator data regularly. IMPORTANT! Do NOT use this method to restore data you have backed up with Nokia 9210 Communicat or to Nokia 9210i C ommunicator. Use PC Su ite instead. Note: The Backup and Restore commands will copy all data. You cannot back up or restore an individual folder. The Backup and Restore commands are recursive; that is, they copy folders and all the contents with in the
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 212 Office folders. For information about selective backups, selective restoring, and using a PC to back up and restore, see the PC Suite guide on the sales package CD-ROM. To be able to back up to and restore from a memory card, the card should be inserted in the communicator. For details, see â To insert a memory card â on page 25. 1 Press the Menu key and sele ct Memory card > Backup t o memory card ⦠or Re store from memory card ⦠, depending on what you want to do. A dialog opens. 2 If you are making a backup, look for a backup folder on the memory card by pressing Change or type in the name of a new folder in the Backup folder field. If you are restoring data to your communicator, select the folder in the communicator into which you want to restore your data. Normally you should select the root folder. 3 Press Backup to back up all the communicator data to the memory card. Press Restore to restore all the backed-up memory card data to the communicator. 4 Restart the communicator by removing the battery and replacing it again. To lock a memory card You can protect a memory card with a passw ord to prevent unauthorised access. Note: Not all memory cards support password protection. 1 Press the Menu key and select Memory card > Security > Change password ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Type your password in the New password field and type it again in the Confirm password field. 3 Press OK . The new password is set.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 213 Office To remove password protection, press the Menu key and select Memory card > Security > Remove p assword ⦠. Type your password and press Remove . Note: Use a password that is easy for you to remember but difficult for others to guess. If you forget your password, the only way to use your me mory card again is to format the card. Formatting deletes all data from the card! To format a memory card press the Menu key, select Memory card > Format memory card ⦠, and press Format .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 215 Extras 11. Extras Extras contains the follow ing applications: Calcul ator, Clock, Control panel, Recorder, Imaging, Cell broadcast, Video player, and Fax modem. Most of the new applications that you install will be added to the Extras application group. For more information on applications availa ble on the sales package CD-ROM, see Software on CD-ROM Guide in the Using Nokia 9210i Communicator section of the CD-ROM. Figure 88 Tip: To install applications, see sect ion â Install/Removeâ on page 226. Clock The Clock shows the time and date in your home city and country or region, as well as in several other cities and countries in the world. The Clock also includes an alarm clock. To set the current date and time for your communicator, press the Menu key and select Tools > Date and time ⦠.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 216 Extras Tip: To choose the clock type, press the Menu key and select View > Clock type > Digital or Analogue . To set an alarm 1 Press Alarm clock in the main view. An alarm clock view opens. 2 The currently active alarms are listed next to the clock. 3 To create a new al arm, press New alarm or to edit an alarm, press Edit alarm . 4 Define the Time of the alarm and the frequency in Occurrence and Day fields. Define also the Description displayed when the alarm goes off. Tip: To turn off a sounding alarm, press Stop or any key on the keypad of the phone cover. Press Snooze to silence the alarm for five minutes. 5 Press Done to accept the set alarm. To change your home city If your home city and time settings on your communicator are not set correctly, you must first set your home city and then set the time , since your home location defines the time zone used. 1 Go to the World clock main view. Tip: The world map shows the currently selected city in cross hairs. 2 Press Change city . A cities view opens. See figure 89. Figure 89 3 Type the city in the search field or scroll the list and press Select when ready. 4 Press OK to accept the change of time zone or Cancel to dismiss it.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 217 Extras Note: For more detailed information about Clock, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help. Calculator There are two modes in Calculator: desk calculator for simple arithmetic operations and scientific calculator for more complicated mathematical calculations. There are two ways to perform calculation s, either by typing the characters in t he input field or selectin g symbols from the function map. A calculati on is executed by pressing Enter or =. The calculation and its result can be seen on the output sheet on the left. You cannot write in the output sheet, but selection is possible. Figure 90 To move between the input field, output sheet, and function map, press the Tab key. The input field is never empty in the desktop calculator: it contains either t he result of the previous calculation or a zero (0) if you have pressed backspace.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 218 Extras Note: For more detailed information about Ca lculator, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help. Control panel In the Control panel you can view or modify the following: Securit y , Data call barring , Data call barring , Profiles, Data call barring , Certificate manager , Date and time , Install/Remove software , Interne t access, Back up/Restore , About product , Memory, Regional settings , and Default folder Modifying these features affects the operation of your communicator across all the applications . Figure 91 To open a program for editing, select it with the Arrows key and press Select . Security Here you can define the phone security level of your communicator.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 219 Extras IMPORTANT: The default lock code is 12345 . For security reasons, it is imperative that you change the lock code. Keep the code secret and in a safe place, separate from the communicator. Note that no passcode system can guarantee absolute prevention of unauthorised access. The codes are shown as asterisks. If you are changing a code, you will be prompted for the current code and then the new code twice. PIN code request : If you set the PIN code request On , the communicator requests that you enter the code e very time you turn on the phone. If you enter th e PIN code incorrectly three times in succ ession, you will need a PUK code to unblock the SIM card. When the SIM card is blocked, you cannot send or receive any documents or calls except calls to preprogrammed emergency numbers. Otherwise, the communicator can be used normally. You need the PIN code to change this setting. Note: This setting cannot be changed, if the phone is switched off or if there is no valid SIM card inserted. Note: Some SIM cards do not allow you to turn the PIN code request off. Autolock period : Determines the security time-out period, after which the communicator will lock. The options are None / 2 mi nutes / 5 minutes / 10 minutes . The last optio n allows you to define the number of minutes yourself. When the communicator is locked, you can ma ke emergency calls to predefined nu mbers using the cover phone. You can also answe r incoming calls and make emergency calls using the Telephone application. All other actions are blocked. The t imer is reset by any input, data transfer, printing, and so on. You need the lock code to change this setting.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 220 Extras Lock if SIM card is cha nged : If set On , every time the phone is switched on this security option checks whether the SIM card in the communicator has been changed. If the SIM card has been changed and the new SIM card has not been used with your communicator previously, the communicator locks itself until the lock code is correctly entered. The communicator recognises five different SIM cards as the owner â s cards. You need the lock code to change this setting. Tip: Changing the PIN code requires that PIN code request is selected, the phone is on, and that there is a valid SIM card inserted. PIN code : This setting allows you to change the PIN code. The new PIN code must be from 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 code : This setting allows you to change the PIN2 code. The PIN2 code is required to access some functions, such as the call cost settings, which must be supported by your SIM card. If you enter an incorrect PIN2 code three times in succession, you will need a PUK2 code to unblock the PIN2 code. The new PIN2 code must be from 4 to 8 digits long. Lock code : This setting allows you to change the lock code. The default lock code is 12345 . The new lock code must be from 5 to 10 digits long. If you enter an incorrect lock code five times in succession, the phone will be locked for five minutes after which you can try a gain. If you try again within less than five minutes, you have to wait five minutes more before a code ca n be accepted. Tip: Changing the barring password requires that the phone is on and the Call barring service is activated for your SIM card. Barring password : This setting allows you to change the barring password. If you enter an incorrect password three times in succession, the password is blocked and you must ask the network service provider for a new password. Note: Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 221 Extras Note: When the communicator is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programmed into your phone (e.g. 112 or other official emergency number). Data call barring Tip: Use data call barring to limit the use of the phone, if you lend it to someone temporarily. Here you can prevent or allow the following data call types: Note: You need a barring password to modify these settings. Outgoing ca lls : When activated, prohibits making data calls. Incoming calls : When activated, prohibits receiving data calls. Internat ional c alls : When activated, prohibits making international calls. Tip: To check the current status of a barring option, select the option and press Check status . Incoming calls when abroa d : When activated, prohibits receiving calls when abroad. International except to home country : When activated, prohibits making international call s to all countries except to th e country that has been defined as the home country. Note: Calls described here as international may in some cases be made between regions of the same nation. Accessories Here you can define some of t he settings when you use t he Nokia 9210i Communicator with Advanced HF Car Kit CARK109 or Headset HDC-8L. For further information on accessories for the Nokia 9210i Communicator, see the accessories section of the Getting started guide. Define the accessories options as follows: 1 Double-click the Accessories icon in the Control Panel. A dialog opens
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 222 Extras 2 Select the accessory options that you want to modify. The options are Headset / Car kit . Press Edit . 3 Define the following: Car kit settings Automa tic answ er : Allows you to define whether the automatic answering is on or off when your communicator is attached to the car kit. Default profile : Allows you to choose the profile that will be automatically select ed, when you attach your communicator to the car kit. Headset settings Cover display lig hts : Allows you to define whether the cover display light s are always on or not when the headset is attached to your communicator. Automa tic answ er : Allows you to define whether the automatic answering is on or off when the headset is attached to your communicator. Default profile : Allows you to choose the profile that will be automatically select ed, when the headset is attached to your communicator. Profiles Here you can edit profiles. Profiles define the tones and sound level of your communicator in different operating environments. For details on profiles, see â Profile settings â on page 78. Display Here you define the appearance of the display.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 223 Extras Contrast an d brightne ss page Figure 92 Press and - to adjust the bar you are editing. Contrast level : Pressing increases and - decreases the contrast of the display. Brightness : The brightness level of the display. There are five levels to choose from. Brightness period : A time period after which, if there has not been any key presses within that time, t he brightness will go down to its lowe st level. The level will rise to the level defined in Brightne ss as soon as any key is pressed again. The options are 15 sec / 30 sec/ 45 sec/ 1 min/ 2 min. Tip: Selecting a low brightness level and a short time period for the last two options saves the battery and increases the operation time of the communicator. Screen saver : A time period after which the display will blank out if the device remains inactive. T he options are 2 min / 4 min/ 6 min / 8 min/ 10 min. Colour page Colour palette : The display colour scheme. Th e options are Blue / Red / Green /Grey . Background patter n : The background image of the command button area. The options are Plain / Wheels / Sand /Water / Leaves .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 224 Extras Certificate manager With Certificate manager you can ma nage digital certifica tes which you use when connecting to WWW sites, WAP services, mail servers, and when installing software. You need these certificates when you: ⢠want to connect to an online bank or some other site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confiden tial information , ⢠want to minimise the risk of viruses or other malicous software and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing it. Note however, that even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considera bly smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; Certificat e manager must contain correct, authentic, and trusted certificates for increased security to be available. To open the main view of Certificate manager, press the Extras application button, select Control panel , and select Certificate manager . The main view lists the currently available certificates and their validity information. Note: Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If a certificate is marked Expired even if it should be Valid , check that the date and time in your communicator are correct. To define the usage of the certificate 1 Select the certificate and press View details . A dialog with certificate details opens.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 225 Extras 2 Press Trust settings . A dialog opens. 3 If you want this certificate to be able to certify WWW sites and mail servers, select Web browser and Mail , press Change , and select Yes 4 If you want this certificate to be able to certify the origin of a new software, select Software inst allation , press Change , and select Yes . Note: Before changing these settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificat e and that the certi ficate really belo ngs to the listed owner. To check that a certificate is a uthentic Certificates are used to verify the origin of WWW pages and installed software. However, they can only be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic. If you are adding a new certificate, or want to check the authenticity of an existing certificate, proceed as foll ows: 1 Select the certificate a nd press View details . A view of certificate details opens. 2 The Subject : field identifies the owner of this certificate. Make sure that this is the name of the party to whom you think that this certificate belongs. 3 Scroll the dialog until you see the Fingerprint: field. 4 The Fingerprint: field uniquely iden tifies the certifi cate. Contact the help desk or customer service of th e owner of the certifi cate (see step 2 above) and ask for the MD5 fingerprint of the certificate. Compare the fingerprint wi th the one shown in the dialog. If they match, th e certificate is auth entic. Note: Use this authentic ation procedure each time you add a new ce rtificate. To add or delete certificates To add a new certificate, press Add . A dialog opens in which you can search a nd select the new certificate.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 226 Extras To delete a certifi cate, select it and press Delete . Date and time Here you define the current time and date for your communicator. Time : The current time. Date : The current date. Daylight-saving : Determines how the time of your communicator is affected by changes in daylight saving time. The options are On / Off / Define summer . If Define summer is selected, you have to ent er the dates Summer starts and Summer ends . Install/Remove With Install/Remove you can install new software or remove installed applications from your communicator. When you open the Install/ Remove a pplication, th e Installed software page lists all of the software packages that have been installed, with their name, version number, type, and size. Press Certificate In fo to display the certi ficate details of an installed software package that has a digital signature and a certificate. To install software The types of applications which you can install are those that are specifically intended for the Nokia 9210/9210i Commun icator or suitable for t he Symbian operating system on Crystal style devices, and Java applications.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 227 Extras Note: If you install software that is not intended specifically for the Nokia 9210/9210i Communicator, i ts usage can differ significan tly from the usual Nokia 9210/ 9210i Communicator appli cations. You can download or transfer a software package containing the files of the application into the communicator. Then you can install the application. Software can also be installed from a memory card. A software package is usually one large compressed file containing many component files. Tip: You can also start the installation by browsing for the installation package in communicator memory or memory card with File manager, selecting it, a nd pressing the Enter key. IMPORTANT: When downloading or transferring software packages into the communicator, use only packages whose file names end â .sisâ . An example of a suitabl e file name is â MediaPla yer.sis â . To start the installation, press Install new on the Installed software page. Browse for the software package you want to install, and press OK . The installation process begins. Note: Only install software from sources that offer adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. To help you, the software installation system on the Nokia 9210i Communicator uses digital signatures and certificates on software packages. See page 224. If you are installing software without a digital signature or a certificate, the communicator warns you of the risks of installing software, as shown in figure 93.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 228 Extras Tip: If you have installed PC Suite for Nokia 9210i Communicator on your PC and the communicator is connected to y our PC, you can also install software by double-clicking a file ending with .sis stored on your PC. Figure 93 If you see this warnin g message, only continue in stallation if you are absolutely sure of the origin and contents of the software package. The installation procedure also checks the integrity of the package to be installed. Once these checks are complete, the application is installed on your communicator. During the installation process, you are shown information about the checks being carried out on the package. You are also given options whether to continue with or cancel th e installation. To remove software 1 To remove an installed software package from your communicator, select the software package you want to remove from the Installed software page and press Remove . 2 A dialog appears asking for your confirmation. Press OK to remov e the software. Note: Some software packages update existing software and cannot be removed. IMPORTANT: If you remove software, you can only re-install it by having the original software package file, or by restoring a full back-up that contains the removed software package. If you remove a software
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 229 Extras package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that software. If an another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Installation log To view the list of software installations and removals that have taken place, press the Menu key and go to the Install log page. This list shows what software has been installed and removed, and when that happened. If you encounter problems with the device after installing a software package, you can use this list to find out which software package may be the cause of the problem. The information on this list may also help to pinpoint problems that are caused by software packages that are incompatible with each other. Installation settings On the Preferences page, you can select options related to software installation. You can de fine the followi ng: Delete installation file after use - If set to Yes , the software package installation file (that ends in .sis ) will be deleted from the device after installation. If you download software packages using the WWW browser, this may be helpful in reducing the amount of required storage space. Note: If you want to store the software package file for possible re-installation later on, either set th is to No or make sure that you have a copy of the software package file stored on your PC or on a CD-ROM.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 230 Extras Default instal lation language - You can set the default installati on language to the language that your Nokia 9210i Communicator has. If the software package contains several different language versions of the software, the language version specified here will be in stalled. Sort installed software by - To sort the list of installed software packages, select one of the options Name , Type , or Size . Internet access Here you are able to edit, create new, and delete existing Inte rnet access points. For details on how this is done, see the Internet section of the Settings checklist delivered in your sales package. For details on IAPs, see â To set up your Interne t access point â on page 132. About this product Here you can scroll to see copyright information on the Nokia 9210i Communicator. Memory Here you can view the amount of free memory for storing data and installing new software. You can scroll and view the memory consumption of the following details: Doc uments , Spreadsheets , Sound s , Faxe s , Mails , Short messages , Calendar data , Contacts , Imag es , Installed applications , and Other file types .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 231 Extras If a memory card is inserted in the communicator, press Memory car d to view the amount of available memory on the card. Press Device to return to view the communicator memory. If the memory is getting low, you should remove some documents. Before removing, you can print, fax, or mail them, or transfer them to a PC or a memory card. Regional settings On these four pages you can define the local time, date, numbering, and currency expressions. Note: For more detailed information about Regional settings, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help. Default folder With the Default folder , you can define the fol der which acts as a default savin g folder whenever you wish t o save a document in your communicator memory. For details on how to manage your files and folders, see â File manager â on page 206. Recorder Tip: When you have recorded sounds and speech, you can set them as ringing tones. See page 99. The Recorder allows you to record telephone conversations and voice memos. You can also listen to your recordings and other sound files. The maximum length of a recording depends on the available memory.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 232 Extras You can open files that have been stored in the following file formats: .WAV, .AU, and compressed GSM encoded file format. Compression is done implicitly during the recording process. Recorder contains all the controls like Play , Stop , Pause , and Record that are typically found in recording equipment. Press Resume to continue after recording or playback has been paused. Figure 94 You can change the volume level of the Recorder application by pressing the â§ and ⨠keys on the Arrows key. You can also edit sound files by using the commands in the Edit menu. Note: Obey all local laws governing recording of calls. Do not use this feature illegall y. Note: For more detailed information about Voice recorder, see the Nokia 9210i Communicator help.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 233 Extras Imaging The Imaging application acts as a file manager for images. Application folders created for storing images are called albums. Images appear as thumbnail images in albums. A thu mbnail image is a small image representing the original full size image. Imaging supports a wide range of image formats, among them JPEG, GIF, BMP, MBM, and WBMP. Note: This application does not support all image file formats or all variations of an image file format. Tip: Additional file viewers for different file formats are available on the sales package CD-ROM. For more information, see â File viewer â on page 12 of the Software on CD-ROM guide. You can open many commonly used image files directly for viewing. Press Zoom in to enlarge the image, Z oom out to reduce the image on the display, and Rotate to rotate the image. To view image properties, press the Menu key and select File > Properties ⦠You can use the Imaging application to view images and manage image albums. You can delete, rename, copy, and move images from one album to another and create your own favourite albums. Tip: If you have images or albums in the \Documents\ Photo gallery\ directory on an inserted memory card, they also will appear in this view. Figure 95
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 234 Extras Note: Albums can contain only images, not other albums. You can also receive images via IR. For details, see â To receive images via infrared â on page 236. To create a new album 1 Press the Menu key and select File > New album ⦠. A dialog opens. 2 Define the following: Name : Name of the album. 3 To save the album in the communicator, press Create locally . To save the album in a memory card, press Create in mem. card . To view album contents Tip: To open an image located outside the image albums, select File > Open from ⦠. 1 Select the album in the Imaging main view a nd press Open . A thu mbnail view of the album contents opens. 2 You can scroll the contents of the album with the Arrows key. To open an image for viewing, press Open . 3 To view the next frame in the image, if available, press t he Menu key and selec t View > Next frame . To return to the previ ous image, select Previous frame . 4 Press Close to return to the thum bnail vi ew. To move images to and from albums 1 Select the image or images in the thumbn ail view with the Arrows key.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 235 Extras Tip: You can select several images with the Space key. You can also use the Edit menu commands and the corresponding shortcuts (Ctrl c, Ctrl x, Ctrl v) to move or copy images. 2 Press the Menu key and first select Edit > Copy or Cut . 3 Open the target album. 4 Press the Menu key and select Edit > Paste . 5 If the target album already has an image or images with the same na me, a confirmation note appea rs asking you i f you wish to replace the existin g image. Choose from the following options: Replace - Th e existing image is replaced with the image you are pasting. Replace all - All existing images are replaced with the same n ame. Skip - Skips the image and continues the operation. Cancel - Cancels the whole paste operation. Tip: To rename albums or images, sele ct File > Rename ⦠., define a name, and press OK. The file extension cannot be changed. To create new images from originals You can choose parts of an opened image, save them as separate images, and reuse them. 1 Open an image. Press the Menu key and select Edit > Select image rang e . The selection frame is now visible on the image. 2 To move the selection frame, use the Arrows key. To change the size of the selection frame, press down the Ctrl key and use the Arrows key. 3 To save the frame as an image, press the Menu key and select File > Save as ⦠. Select Selected r ange . 4 Select the folder you wish to save in, give a name for the new image file, and press OK . To resize images 1 Press the Menu key and select Tools > Resize ⦠. A dialog opens.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 236 Extras 2 Scroll with the Arrows key to select the new size and press Select or press Best fit to fit the imag e horizon tally to the sc reen. To receive images via infrared Tip: Large i mages transferred from a digital camera may take too much internal memory to be viewed. To scale the siz e of the transferred images down to 640x480 pixels, press the Menu key and select Tools > Use VGA , if the option is not already selected. Note that all cameras may not support this function. 1 Open the album where you want to save the received file. 2 Press Images via infrared . A dialog opens. 3 Select one of the following: Receive in albu m : To receive the image and save it. Receive and mail : To receive the image and send it as an e-mail message. Receive and fax : To receive the image and send it as a fax. 4 Press OK . RealOne Player RealOne Player lets you play audio and video files of the RealAudio and RealVideo formats on your Nokia 9210i Communicator. You can download these files to your Communicator from a compatible PC for playback, or you can play files over the wireless network by streaming them to your Communicator. Note: Streaming is a network dependent feature that requires a HSCSD (High Circuit Switch Data) ne twork. The main view of RealOne Player is shown in figure 96.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 237 Extras Figure 96 For more information and instructions on how to use RealOne Player, refer to the user â s guide of RealOne Player on the CD ROM in the sales package. Cell broadcast Tip: Check with your network service provider to see whether CBS is available. Cell Broadcast is an application which you use with the Cell Broadcast Service (CBS) to view the messages and to subscribe to topics of interest. In areas where CBS is provided, you can receive short messages on various topics such as taxis, weather, service provider services, and directory enquiries. Figure 97 To start or stop receiving CBS messages, in the main view of Cell broadcast, press Reception on or Reception off .
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 238 Extras Tip: You can search for different topics. Enter a name of a topic in the search field. Press Read to read messages and pres s Next or use th e commands in the View menu to browse for more messages. To subscribe, scroll to a topic and press Subscribe . A check mark is displayed in the box on the left-hand end of the topic. To unsubscribe, press Unsubscribe . To add, edit, or remove topics when the reception is off, press the Menu key and select > Topic > Add topic / Edit topic / Delete topic(s) . Tip: You can quickly mark a topic as a hot topic by first selecting the topic and then pressing Ctrl M. If you want to be notified with a dialog displaying a message on a particular topic when a new topic message is received, press the Menu ke y and select Topic > Mark as hot topic . The hot topic is marke d with an exclamation mark â !â . To create or rename topic lists To create a new list, press the Menu key and select List > New blank list ⦠or New list with selected topics ⦠Tip: You can sort the topics by pressing the Menu key and selecting a sorting command in the View menu. To change the name of the list that is open, press the Menu key and select List > Rename list ⦠Note that the reception must be turned off. To open topic lists To open a different list, press the Menu key and select List > Select topic list . In different topic lists, you can still subscribe and unsubscribe topics and set them as hot topics.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 239 Extras To detect new topics To add new topics automatically, press the Menu key and select Tool s > Settings ⦠. Define the following: Tip: Create a new empty topic list and select the Yes and All options in t he settings to receive a complete list of topics available in that area. Add new topics to list - The options are Yes / No . If you select Yes , all new topics are added automatically to your current list of topics. If you select No , you will receive only the messages concerning subscribed or hot topics that you already ha ve in your topic list. Languag e - Select the language of the topics you want to receive. Select All to receive topic messages in a ll languages. Note: You will receive on ly the messages that are in the language you h ave chosen. To make sure you receive all messages, select All . Fax modem You can use the communicator as a fax modem with a compatible PC. Your communicator can be connected to a PC via serial cable or by using an infrared connection. Before your PC can recognise the communicator as a fax modem, you need to install a new modem configuration for your PC. Please refer to your operating system manual for more information. During the installation you may be asked to enter the path to the modem information file. The path on the sales package CD- ROM is: \ Software for PC \ Printer and Modem drivers. Advanced users ca n also find a list of supported AT commands from this path. Normally there is no need to use these commands.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 240 Extras Note: Using the communicator as a fax modem requires that data calls are supported by the network operator and that this service is active in your SIM card. To install fax modem driver using cable connection 1 Start Windows. 2 Insert the Nokia 9210i CD-ROM into th e CD-ROM drive of the computer and locate the modem information file (mdmn9210i.INF). Alternatively, you can find the file on the www.forum.nokia.com Web site. 3 Double-click the Modems icon in the Windows Control Panel. A dialog opens. If no modem drivers have been installed on the computer before, continue from step 6. 4 Click the Add button. 5 In the field What type of modem do you want to inst all? select Other . Click Next 6 Select the option Don â t detect my modem; I will sele ct it from a lis t 7 Click Have disk... 8 Click Browse and locate the CD-ROM drive wit h the Nokia 9210i CD-RO M. 9 On the CD-ROM, locate a folder Software for PC/Modem driver s 10 In the Modem drivers folder, select Mdmn9210i.inf file and click Open or OK . Tip: To use High Speed connection, your GSM operator must activate High Speed Data Services on your SIM card. 11 In the Install from disk dialog, Click OK . 12 In the Install New Modem dialog, select Nokia 9210 Communicator (Cable) . If you are using High Speed connection (HSCSD), select a speed higher than 9600 bps and cable connection. Click Next . 13 Select the COM port where the serial cable is connected. Click Next . 14 Click Finish .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 241 Extras 15 Remove the CD-ROM from the drive. 16 In your communicator, press the Extras application button, select Fax modem , and press Open . 17 In the Fax modem application, press Settings 18 On the Connection page of the Fax modem settings, define the following: Connection type : Cable Transfer rate : 19200 or higher. Make sure that this setting is the same both in your communicator and your PC. Data bits : 8 Stop bits : 1 Flow control : Sof tware Press Done . Note: Transfer rate is the speed with wh ich the data is transferre d between your communicator and PC. The best transfer rate for normal GSM calls is 19200 or higher. For high speed calls, you should select 115200. Select the same rat e in your PC application as well. 19 Your communicator is now ready to be used as a fax modem. Press Activate to activate the Fax modem. Fax modem settings To open Fax modem, press the Extr as application button, sele ct Fax modem , and press Open Note that an active PC connection using the fax modem is disconnected after 20 minutes if no data is sent or received. However, an active call is not automatically disconnected.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 242 Extras Note: You cannot change fax modem settings if the fax modem is activated. To change these settings, make sure that fax modem is not active. Open Fax modem and press Settings . A dialog with two pages opens. Define the following: Connection page Connection type : Press Change to change this option. The options are Infrared and Cable . If you select Infrared , the rest of the options are automatically set. If you select Cable , define also the following: Transfer rate : The speed with which the data is transferred between your communicator and PC. The best transfer rate for normal GSM calls is 19200. For high speed calls, you should select 115200. Select the same rate in your PC applicat ion as well. Data bits : Defines how many bits are used to form a byte. The default option, 8 , can typically be used. Parity : A parity error-checking procedure. The default option, None , can typically be used. Stop bits : Defines number of stop bits used. The default option, 1 , can typically be used. Flow control : It is recommended to select Software . This setti ng needs to be the same in you PC as well.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 243 Extras Operating system page Windows 2000 : If you are not using Wi ndows 2000, select No and press Done . The rest of the options on the page are dimmed. If you are using Windows 2000, select Yes . Define also the following information about the connection. The information nee ded is provided by the host that you are about to call. If you do not have this information try to use the defaul t options. Connection type : The options are Normal / High speed . Normal is the default. Remote modem type : The options are Analog / ISDN V.110 / ISDN V.120 . Analog is the default. Max. connec tion speed : The default in an analog connection is Automatic . Note: This configurat ion needs to be redefined if you use a diffe rent kind of modem. If the connection settings are incorrect, the call is not created. To activate or disable the f ax modem In the Fax modem main view, press Activate or Disable .
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 245 Troubleshooting 12. Troubleshooting If you have problems with your communicator, Club Nokia Careline answers questions and offers instructions over the phone. For more information on the Club Nokia Careline see the Accessories section of th e Getting Started Guide and Nokia Careline Web page. You can also visit Forum Nokia at www.forum.nokia.com for informa tion and support material related to the communicator. 1. Phone or communi cator interface does not start; both displays remain blank Make sure that the battery is properly installed and charged. Make sure that the contacts on the battery and the desktop stand are clean. The battery charge may be too low for operation. Check the display and listen for the low battery warning tones. Charge the battery as described on page 21. If the NOT CHARGING message is displayed, the charging is suspended. Temperature extremes will affect the ability of your battery to charge: allow it to cool down or warm up first. Wait for a while, disconnect the charger, connect it again and retry. If charging still fails, contact your local Nokia dealer. 2. Communicator inter face does not start; cover phone display is flashing The communicator memory is corrupted. Contact your local Nokia dealer. 3. The battery is attached, but the phone doe s not work Try to switch on the phone by pressing the key for several seconds.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 246 Troubleshooting Check that the flight mode is not active. For more information see â Flight profile â on page 91. Restart the communicator by removing the battery, wait ing thirty seconds, and replacing it again. Try charging the communicator. If you see the battery level indicator on the phone but the phone does not work, contact your local Nokia dealer. Check the signal strength indicator: you might be ou tside the network service area. Make sure that the telephone service is activated for your SIM card. Check if there is an error message on the display after switching on. If so, contact your local dealer. Check that the SIM card is correctly installed, see the Getting Started Guide. 4. Communicator interface is not activated or applications stop responding Close the cover and open it again. If this does not he lp, close the cover and remove the battery. Replace the bat tery and open the cover again. Wait while t he communicator performs a self-test and starts. Try charging the communicator. If the device does not respond even after several restarts (disconnect the charger, take battery out, wait for 30 seconds, and replace the battery), remove all temporary files as follows: 1 Disconnect the charger and remove the battery to restart the communicator. 2 Insert the battery and open the cover. 3 When you see the Nokia 9210i Communicator Welcome screen, immediately press and hold down the Ctrl Shift I keys. The I key should be pressed last.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 247 Troubleshooting 4 Temporary files are deleted. This empties the cache , removes cookies, resets plugin registrations and resets the settings you have made in some of the applications including all Internet and profile settings, Desk shortcuts and display settings. All other applications and files stay intact. If the procedures described above do not help, as a last resort before contacting your local dealer you can try formatting the interna l memory of the communicator. Note that formatting the memory removes all items except the standard applications that have been factory pre-installed in ROM memory! If you have made a full backup of the contents of your communicator with PC Suite, you can use PC Suite to format the memory before restoring the backed-up files to your communicator. For more information, see PC Suite Guide on the sales package CD-ROM. If you have made a backup to a memory card, see â To back up and restore data to and from a memory card â on page 211. When you format the internal memory, all the settings, documen ts and other data in the internal memory that you have created or modified will be permanently destroyed. To format the internal memory, proceed as follows: Tip: If you have to give away your Communicator, it is a good idea to format the device and restore the factory-installed software from the CD-ROM. This way the next user will be able to start with a fresh device. 1 Disconnect the charger and remove the battery to restart the communicator. 2 Insert the battery and open the cover. 3 When you see the Nokia 9210i Communicator Welcome screen, immediately press and hold down the Ctrl Shift F keys. The F key should be pressed last. 4 Formatting starts. It takes at least two minutes to comple te. 5 With Windows Explorer, locate the All_Nokia_9210_data.si s installation package in the Preinstalled i n device folder of the sales package CD-ROM and install it.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 248 Troubleshooting 5. Cannot make or receive calls Check to see if you have â Flightâ profile turned on. When this profile is active you cannot make or receive calls. Make sure that the phone is not off. Close the cover and switch on the phone. If you get the message INVALID SIM CARD, your SIM card cannot be used in the communicator. Contact you dealer or network service provider. Check the status of your call barrings and diverts, see âÂÂNetwork services settings â on page 82. The phone may be busy: data or fax is being sent or received, or the communicator is being used as a fax modem. Wait for the data/fax transmission to end, or drop the call by pressing the key on the phone keypad. 6. Call quality is poor Your location may not allow better call quality. This problem may occur especially in a moving car or train. Move to a location where the radio signal reception is better. See â GSM data transmission â on page 8. Reception is usually better above ground level, outdoors and while stationary. Sometimes even moving the communica tor slightly will improve recepti on. You can also try using the communicator in the handsfree mode, see page 70. Remember to turn the antenna to an upright posi tion. 7. Cannot divert or bar voice, fax or data calls You may have not subscribed to the service in question, or it is not supported by the network, or the message cen tre number and the number to wh ich you want to divert your calls may be missing or incorrect.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 249 Troubleshooting Fax diverts and barrings are defined in Tools > Account settings ⦠in the Messaging application. Data barring is set in the Data call barring in Control pan el. Data calls cannot be diverted. 8. Cannot select a contact If you cannot select a contact in the Telephone, Fax, SMS or Mail directory, the contact card does not have a telephone number, fax number, wireless phone number or an e-mail address. Add the missing information to the contact ca rd in the Contacts application. 9. Cannot send or receive faxes, short messages or mail Make sure that you have subscribed to these network services. The phone may be off, or the communicator is low on memory. The number format you use may be invalid, or the called number has not answe red within 10 tries, or you are calling to a wrong phone number. The phone may be busy: data or fax is being sent or rece ived, the communicator is being used as a fax modem. Wait for the data/fax transmission to end, or drop the call by pressing the key on the phone keypad. Fax/data barrings or fax diverts may be active. You can define the Fax barrings/ diverts in Tools > Account settings ⦠in Messaging . Fax reception: Your SIM card may not have a fax number. Mail reception: You have not subscribed to a remote mailbox service, or the mail service you are using uses another mail protocol than what you have selected. (Check with your Internet Service Provider whether you should be using POP3 or IMAP4.) If you are using secure connections, your r emote mailbox service also has to support secure connections. There may also be a transient problem with the
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 250 Troubleshooting remote mailbox service, or the Inte rnet servers between the communicator and the remote mailbox. Try again after a couple of minutes, and then contact your Internet Service Provider. Mail sending: You have not subscribed to a remote mailbox service, or the mail server delivering your mail does not comply with the SMTP protocol. If you are using secure connections, your remote mailbox service also has to support secure connections. There may also be a transient problem with the remote mailbox service, or the Internet servers between the communicator and the remote mailbox. Try again after a couple of minutes, and then contact your Internet Service Provider. If you are using the Upon request sending option, mail must be sent in the Document outbox, see â Outboxâ on page 163. If you receive service provider error messages when connecting to your remote mailbox, contact your remote mailbox service prov ider. Your remote mailbox may contain corrupted mail messages or the mail server settings may be incorrect. If you have problems sending mail with attachments, select Cancel sending and try again. If this does not help, try the key combination Shift-Tab-right arrow. Some mail attachments can take up a significant amount of memory and therefore freeing some memory by deleting something from your communicator memory might also help. Short message sending: You have not subscribed to the Short Message Service or the message centre number is missing or incorrect. Contact your service provider. The reason for failure may also depend on the network: the network does not support SMS, fax, or data/mail; the network is out of order or busy; the signal strength is not adequate for sending.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 251 Troubleshooting 10. Phone display shows â Message too long â when I try to open a received short message. The received message is over 1377 characters long. Use the Messaging application to read it. 11. Cannot establish an Internet connection If you are trying to connect to the Internet (i n order to use WWW or to receive or send mail), but the operation does not succeed, you can use the following checklist to find out where the problem might be located: 1 Is the data call active when you are trying to connect? Look at the data call indicator on the phone side. If the data call is dropped after a few seconds after starting to connect, check the phone number in the Internet Access settings. See page 132 for details. If the phone number is correct, the reason may be in poor network conditions, or a congested GSM network. Also check the Data call settings in the Interne t Access settings (connection type, data call type, and maximum connection speed). See page 136 for details. Contact your network service provider if you have problems with data call establishment, and your Internet Service Provider to find out the correct remote modem type. If you are roaming outside your home network, you might want to try the basic GSM data call settings described in a tip on page 137. 2 If the data call is active, but you cannot receive or send mail, try to use the WWW browser to connect to your Internet Service Provider â s WWW pages. If that works, the problem is most likely in the mai l settings or the remote mai lbox service. For more information, see Mail sending troubleshooting on page 249 and Mail settings on page 172.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 252 Troubleshooting 3 If the data call is active, but you cannot download WWW pages with the WWW browser, make note of the most recent status indication displayed to you in the title bar of the WWW browser. ⢠If the status indication reads Waiting for reply from host or Looking up host address , it is likely that the WWW address (URL) has been mistyped, or there is a problem with proxy server settings in the Internet Access Point or the proxy server itself, or there is a transient problem with the WWW server or Internet connections between the WWW server and your Internet Servi ce Provider. Check the proxy server sett ings explained on page 135. Disconnect the call, wait for a couple of minutes, and retry the connection. If the connection still does not succeed, contact your Internet Service Provider. ⢠If the status indication reads Logging into ne twork or Connected , the problem is most likely in your Internet Access Point settings (See page 132 for details) or your Internet Service Provider â s dial-up system, or you might need a script in order to connect to your Internet Service Provider. Disconnect the data call, wait for a couple of minutes, and retry the connect ion. If the connection still does not succeed, contact your Internet Service Provider. 4 If your data call is unexpectedly dropped, this may be a case of poor network conditions, congestion in the phone network, or a too low inactivity period setting. If you ar e unable t o connect to the In ternet af ter repe ated atte mpts, and h ave successfully used your Internet connection previously, or get error messages w hen starting the WWW browser, remove and replace the battery and try again. 12. Infrared problems The communicator may be connected to a PC, laptop, printer, digital camera, wireless phone or another communicator via the infrared connection.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 253 Troubleshooting If you are using the PC Suite for Nokia 9210i Communicator program on your PC, or if you want to receive data from another communicator or a digital camera, you must activate the Infrared connection on your communicator before the connection is made. See PC Suite Guide in the sales package CD-ROM and â To activate the infrared connection â on page 35 of this guide. The PC to which you want to establish the connection must have an IrDA compatible infrared port; installed and activated IrDA drivers; and Microsoft Windows 95/98/98SE/Me. For more information on IrDA drivers and their use in Windows, contact Microsoft. If you have an IBM Thinkpad laptop with Windows 98 SE installed, you ma y encounter problems with infrared connections. If problems occur, proceed as follows: 1 Click the Windows Start button and select Settings > C ontrol Panel . 2 In the Windows 98 Control Panel , open System . 3 In the System properties dialog, select the Device Manager tab. 4 Under Network Adapter s , select IBM Thinkpad Fast Infrared Port and click the Properties button. IBM Thinkpad Fast Infr ared Port Properties dialog opens. 5 Click the Driver tab and then click the Update Driver... button. Update Device Driver Wizard starts. 6 Click Next . 7 Select the Install one of the other drivers option and click the View List... button. 8 Infrared PnP Serial Port has been found. Click OK . 9 Click Next . 10 Infrared PnP Serial Port is ready to be installed. Click Next . 11 The new driver has been inst alled. Click Finish . 12 The computer must be restarted before the new driver c an be taken to use. Click Yes to restart the computer.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 254 Troubleshooting 13. Printing problems If you are using the infrared connection, the infrared port of the printer must be compatible to the IrDA standard. See â To print â on page 32. If you fail to establish an infrare d connection, transfer the fi le to a PC and use the PC to print the document. Alt ernatively, you can fax th e document to the neares t fax machine. See â To write and send a new fax â on page 168. 14. PC connectivity proble ms Make sure that PC Suite for Nokia 9210i Communicator is installed and running on your PC. See the PC Suite Guide for more information. If you use a cable connection, check that the cable is properly attached at both ends. If you use an infrared connection, check that the IR ports are facing each other and the route between the ports is un obstructed. Check that you are using the correct serial port (COM) on your PC. For all other PC Suite problems, see the PC Suite Guide and the PC Suite online help â Troubleshootingâ section. 15. Fax modem problems When you use the communicator as a fax modem, make sure that the communicator and the PC use the same baud rate. If you use the infrared connection, the baud rate is set automatically. If you use the cable connection, set the baud rate in the Fax modem settings. For the PC, the baud rate is set in the connectivity software of the PC.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 255 Troubleshooting If you use the cable connection, fully compatible operation with all PC fax and terminal software cannot be guaranteed. Consult your dealer. If you have problems with your PC fax software, use the infrared connection. If you have problems establishing a data connection with the remote modem, try fixing the data transmission r ate by using an AT command. Common AT commands based on the ETSI 07.07 standard and supported by the Nokia 9210i Communicator are listed in a file on the CD-ROM supplied with the communicator. You can find this file by clicking â AT commands â in âÂÂPC software section â on the CD-ROM. For information on how to use the AT commands and fax modem drivers, consult the documentation of the telecommunication or fax application that you use on your PC. 16. Access code pr oblems The default lock code for Nokia 9210i Communicator is 12345 . I f you forget or lose the lock code contact your communicator dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about Internet passwords, contact your Internet service provider. 17. Low on memory Your communicator can run out of memory just like a PC. There may be several reasons for that: ⢠You have too many applications running. Press the Menu key and check the left most menu for tasklist of open applications. Choose the application that does not have to be open and close it.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 256 Troubleshooting ⢠You have received a lot of mail or you have saved large images or other items that use a lot of memory. To free up communicator memory, remove unnecessary data, move large items to a memory card or transfer them to your PC, if possible. See â To avoid low memory â on page 166 and PC Suite Guide for details. ⢠You have tried to download a large WWW page. See item 19 on this troubleshooting list. You can check the memory usage in the Memory application of Control panel. See â Memory â on page 230. 18. Cannot connect to the Internet when roaming You are able to connect to the Internet when in your home country or region. You are now roaming and your Internet connection does not work. Try using the settings of a basic GSM data connection. Also check that the phone number of your Internet Access Point is in international format. See â Data call page â on page 136. 19. â Memory â error note seen when downloading very large WWW pages Some WWW pages are extremely l arge because they contain many l arge images or tables. These types of pages consume memory in the communicator very quickly. If, when downloading WWW pages, you see an error note about memory, the first action is to close any other applications that you may have opened a fter starting the WWW browser. To do that, press the Menu key and check the leftmost menu for tasklist of open applications. Select and close each item. If you still experience problems, turn off the setting whic h allows loading images automatically. One last action is to exit the WWW browser appl ication, start it again, and try to download the page once more without images.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 257 Troubleshooting Note: Removing data files or installing applications does not have effect on the memory available to the WWW browser.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 259 CARE AND MAINTENANCE 13. CARE AND MAINTENANCE Your Nokia 9210i Communicator is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you to fulfil any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for many years. ⢠Keep the communicator and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. ⢠Keep the communicator dry. Precipitation, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. ⢠Do not use or store the communicator in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the communicator in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the communicator in cold areas. When it warms up (to its normal temperature), moisture can form inside, which may damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the communicator. Non-expert handling may damage it. ⢠Do not drop, knock or shake the communicator. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. Dropping the product may break the colour display, which is fragile.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 260 CARE AND MAINTENANCE ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cle aning solvents, or strong detergents to cl ean the communicator. ⢠Do not paint the communicator. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorised antennas, modifications or attachments could damage t he communicator and may violate regulations governing radio devices. All of the above suggestions apply equally to your communicator, battery, charger or any accessory. If any of them is not working properly, take it to your nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there will assist you and, if necessary, arrange for service.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 261 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION 14. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Traffic Safety Do not use a communicator while dr iving a vehicle. Always secure the phone in its holder; do not place the phone on the passenger seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. Remember road safety always comes first! Operating en vironment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area a nd always switch off the phone of your communicator whenever it is forbidden to use it , or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the phone only in its normal operating positions. To maintain compliance with radio frequency exposure guidelines, always use Nokia approved accessories. Place the communicator in an approved carrying case or belt clip when carrying the communicator while the phone is on.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 262 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Parts of the phone are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the phone, and persons with a hearing aid should not hold the phone to the ear with the hearing aid. Always secure the phone in its holder, because metallic materials may be attracted by the earpiece. Do not place credit cards or other ma gnetic storage media near the phone, because information stored on them may be erased. Electronic devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic e quipment may not be shie lded against the RF signals from your communicator. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 20 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a hand-held wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemaker s: ⢠Should always keep the phone more than 20 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker when the phone is switched on; ⢠Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket; ⢠Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for interference. ⢠If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your communicator immediately. Hearing aids Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your service provider.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 263 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Other medical devi ces Operation of any radio t ransmitting equipment, including communicators, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately sh ielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off the phone of your communicator in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles (e.g. electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti-skid (an ti-lock) braking systems, electron ic speed control systems, air bag systems). Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You shou ld also consult t he manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Posted facilities Switch off the phone of your communicator in any facility where posted notices so require. Potentially explosive atmos pheres Switch off the phone of your communicator when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advised to switch off the phone when at a refuel ling point (service station). Users are reminde d of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 264 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using liquified petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such a s grain, dust or metal powders; and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Vehicles Only qualified personnel should service the communicator, or install the communicator in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty which may apply to the unit. Check regularly that all wireless phone equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the communicator, its parts or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including both installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in- vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could re sult. Using the phone of your communicator while in the air is prohibited. Switch off the phone of your communicator before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network and may be illegal.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 265 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION FCC regulations prohibit using your phone while in the air. Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone ne twork and may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to the offender, or legal action or both. Emergency calls Important: The Nokia 9210i Communicator, like any wireless phone, operates using radio signals, wireless and landline ne tworks as well as user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions can not be guaranteed. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any wireless phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies). Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless phone networks or when certain network services and/or phone features are in use. Check with local service providers. To make an emergency call: 1 If the device cover is open, close it. 2 If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the communicator. 3 Press as many times as needed (e.g. to exit a call, to e xit a menu, etc.) to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. 4 Key in the emerge ncy number for your present locat ion (e.g. 911, 112 or other official emergency number). Emergency numbers vary by location. 5 Press the key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide and your local cellular service provider.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 266 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION When making an emergency call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Remember that your communicator may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident - do not cut off the call until given permission to do so. Important power supply i nformation WARNING: This apparatus is intended for use when supplied with power from a Lithium-ion battery and chargers AC P-12, ACP-9E, ACP-9X and ACP-9A. Other usage will invalidate any approval given to this apparatus and may be dangerous . Use only batteries, charger s and accessories approved by the communicator manufacturer for use with this particular communicator model. T he use of any ot her types will invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the communicator , and may be dangerous. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer.When you disconnect the power cord of any accessor y, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Certification information (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE EU REQUIREMENTS FOR EX PO SURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your communicator, like any mobile phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exc eed the limits for e xposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy recommended by The Council of the European Union.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 267 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organisations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The limits include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit recommended by The Council of the European Union is 2.0 W/kg.* Tests for SAR have been conducted using standard operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at mult iple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station antenna, th e lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale t o the public, compliance with the European R&TTE directive must be shown. This directive includes as one essential requirement the protection of t he health and the safety for the user and any other person. The highest SAR value for the phone of Nokia 9210i Communicator when tested for compliance against the standard was 0.34 W/kg. While there may be differences between the SAR leve ls of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the EU requirements for RF exposure. * The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of tissue. The limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 268 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www.nokia.com.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 269 Glossary AT Commands Operations of a fax mode m can be controlled by AT commands. The se commands give the advanced user an opportunity to control all the features of the modem. A list of common AT commands based on the ETSI 07.07 standard and supported by the Nokia 9210i Communicator is available on the CD-ROM included in the sales package of your communicator. Barring passw ord The barring password is a 4-digit code needed to change fax and voice call barrings, see â To restrict voice calls â on page 84. The pass word is not located in your communicator or SIM card, but in the network. You obtain the password from your network service provider when you subscribe to the call barring service. Cookies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the server to you, to store information about your visits to a Web site. When you accept cookies, the server is able to evaluate your use of the Web site; what you are interested in, what you want to read, and so on. DNS Domain Name Service. An Internet service that translates domain names like www.nokia.com into IP addresses like 192.100.124.195. Domain names are easier to remember but this translati on is needed because the Interne t is based on IP addresses.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 270 Domain name and Host name The terms â domain name â and â host name â are sometimes, slightly inaccurately, used as synonyms. In a full domain name, e.g. www.forum.nokia.com, the first part of the name is the name of the host, and the following parts are names of domains to which the host belongs. Each host name corresponds to a certain IP address. H ost names are used because they are easier to remember than IP addresses. DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) Tones The system used by touch-tone telephones. DTMF assigns a specific frequency, or tone, to each key so that it can easily be identified by a microprocessor. DTMF tones allow you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised telephony systems, etc. Gateway IP address The address of a WAP gateway. (see: WAP gateway). Hotspot A World Wide Web (WWW) page may contain hotspots, such as selection lists, text entry fields, and reset/submi t buttons, which enable you to input information in to the WWW. HSCSD High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data is circuit-switched wireless data transmission for mobile users at data rates up to 43.2 Kbps which is four times faster than the standard data rates of the Global System for Mobile (GSM) communication standard in 1999. HSCSD is comparable to the speed of many computer modems that communicate with today's fixed telephone networks.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 271 HTML (Hypertext Mark-up Language) A language used to define the appearance and content of WWW documents. HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Pr otocol) A document transfer protocol used in the WWW. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. See Secure Socket Layer (SSL) Hyperlink A link on a WWW page that leads to another World Wide Web page or site, or another place on the same page. Hyperlinks are usually underlined or shown in a different colour from the surrounding text. Hyperlinks can also be pictures. IAP (Internet Access Point) The point where your communicator connects to the Internet by way of a data call. An Internet access point can be provided, for example, by a commercial Internet service provider (ISP) or by your own company. Images, inline, external Images within a retrieved WWW page are inline images. Larger images are often placed as external images and have to be viewed separatel y. IMAP4 (Internet Mail Access Protocol, ver sion 4) A protocol used for accessing your Remote mailbox.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 272 IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) IETF are responsible for most of the Internet standardisation. Nokia 9210i Communicator is using many IETF specifications. In the callback settings, one of the settings is specified by IETF whereas the other methods are specified by Microsoft. ISDN connections ISDN connections are a way to establish a data call between the Communicator and your Internet Access Point. ISDN connections are digital from end to end and as such offer quicker set-up times and faster data rates than Analog connections. In order to use ISDN, both your Internet service provider and network provider have to support them. Java An object-oriented, general purpose programming language developed by Sun Microsystems and originally designed for handheld devices. Java is language similar to C , but simplified to eliminate language features that cause common programming errors. Compiled Java code can run on most computers because Java interpreters and runtime environments exist for most operating systems Lock code The lock code is a five-digit code needed to lock and unlock the communicator. The default lock code for Nokia 9210i Communicator is 12345 . The lock code is also required when you change certain settings. Keep it secret and in a safe place, separate from the communicator.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 273 MCN (Micro-Cellula r Network) technology Microcells are used for increasing the capacity of wireless networks in urban areas. MIME (Multipurpose Interne t Mail Extensions) A standard Internet format which permits, for instance, multiple mail objects in a single message. The mail objects can be, for example, formatted multifont text messages and non-textu al elements, such as images and audio fragments. PIN (Personal Identity Number) The PIN code protects your phone from unauthorised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN code request is selected, the code is required each time the phone is switched on. The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 Code The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain functions supported by the SIM card. The length of the PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digits. Plug-in A plug-in is add-on software that can be downloaded from the WWW. The communicator uses plug-ins to display a document that the WWW application itself cannot show POP3 (Post Office Protocol, version 3) A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing the Remote mailbox.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 274 Point-to-point pro tocol (PPP) A common networking software protocol which enables a ny computer with a modem and a phone line to connect directly to the Internet. Protocol A formal set of rules that govern how data is transferred between two devices. Proxy In some networks, the connection betwee n the WWW and the site you want to connect to is block ed by a firewall. The firewall protects the network from unauthorised external access. A proxy is an intermediary program that enables access through the firewall. A proxy can a lso serve as a network cache to speed up the retrieving process. PUK (PIN Unblocking Key) code The PUK is an 8-digit code supplied with the SIM card. The code is required when you want to change a disabled PIN code. If you enter an incorrect PUK code ten times in succession, the SIM card is rejected and you cannot make or receive any calls, except emergency calls. When the SIM is rejected, you will need a new SIM card. You cannot change the PUK code. If you lose the code, contact your network service provider. PUK2 Code The PUK2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The code is required when you want to change a disabled PIN2 code. If you enter an incorrect PUK2 code ten times in succession, you will not be able to access the functions
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 275 which require the PIN2 code. To u se these functi ons again, you will ne ed to obtain a new SIM card from your network service provider.You cannot change the PUK2 code. Roaming agreement An agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) A security protocol that prevents eavesdropping, tampering, or message forgery over the Internet. Documents using SSL are identified with the prefix HTTPS. SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card The SIM card contains al l the information the cellular network needs to identify the network user. The SIM card also contains security-related information. Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) An Internet protocol governing the transfer of electronic mail. TCP port Identifies the data port of the destination computer. TCP/IP (Transmission C ontrol Protocol/Inter net Protocol) A protocol that governs data communication in the Internet and in the TCP / IP networks.
Copyright é 2000-2002 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 276 Template In word processing a template or a style sheet is a file or form that defines the layout of a document. A template may determine parameters like the page size, margins, and fonts. You can use the same style sheet for many documents. For example, you can define one style sheet for personal letters, another for official letters, and a third for reports. Transport Layer Secur ity A security protocol similar to SSL offering end-to-end encrypted and authenticated connections. The server to whi ch the connection is established is authenticated by the u se of certificates. Data transfers are secured with encryption algorithms. The Nokia 9210i Communicator supports TLS version 1. See also Secure Socket Layer (SSL) URL (Uniform Resource Locator) Link information required by the WWW to connect to a given WWW host computer. The URL usually starts with http://. For example, the Nokia Wireless Data Forum home page can be found at http:// www.forum.nokia.com. URLs are often referred to with phrases like â Home page location, â â Site location, â â can be found at... â Voice Mailbox A voice mailbox is a network service or a personal answering machine where people can leave you voice messages. WAP Wireless Application Protocol. The transport protocol for WAP services, used by the WAP browser.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 277 WAP access point An extension to an Internet access point (see: IAP), which provides additional information that the WAP browser needs in order to be able to connect to a WAP service.
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 279 Index A About Guides 3 Access codes, See Security of phone Accessories 221 Car kit 222 Headset 222 Applications Creating shortcuts to 17 Disappearing 245 Installing 226 Removing 226 Arrows key 19 AT commands 269 Attachments to Calendar entries 118 Mails 182 B Background image 66 Backups To memory card 211 Barring password Changing 220 Barring status 221 Battery Charging 21 Precautions 22 Business card Own 95 Receiving 106 Sending 105 Buttons Application 16 C Calculator General operation 217 Calendar Anniversaries view 124 Attachments 118 Changing entry types 116 Creating new entries 112 Creating task lists 126 Day view 121 Defining entry information 112 Deleting entries 117 Deleting task lists 127
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 280 Editing entries 116 Editing task lists 126 Entries 111 General commands 119 General settings 128 Month view 119 Searching entries 127 Sending entries 112 Settings 128 Symbols 125 Task lists 126 Task lists view 122 View settings 129 Views 118 Week view 120 Weekly time schedule view 123 Year schedule view 124 Callback 137 Calls Advanced settings 87 Answering 45 , 72 Barring 60 , 84 Charging 87 Conference 74 Diverting 62 , 83 Lock code 60 , 61 Making 42 , 70 Managing conference calls 75 Multiple 73 Options during calls 45 PIN code 61 PIN2 code 61 Poor call quality 248 Private 75 Recent calls 71 Recording 73 Register 53 Settings 56 , 77 , 86 Switching between calls 74 Transferring 76 Troubleshooting 248 Using phone book 70 Waiting 76 CBS Creating topic lists 238 Detecting new topics 239 Opening topic lists 238 Overview 237 CD-ROM Installing software from communicator â s CD- ROM 34 Cell Broadcast Service, See CB S viewer Cell broadcast viewer 237 Cell Broadcast viewer, See CBS vi ewer Certificate management 224 Character key 19
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 281 Characters Special 26 Chartsheets Creating 203 Editing 203 Replacing data 204 Cities 216 Clock 215 Alarms 216 Changing your home city 216 Codes Autolock period 219 Overview PIN code 59 PUK code 274 Security options 218 Troubleshooting 255 Communicator Facts 5 , 230 Interface 11 Overview 1 Restarting 246 Connectors 20 Contact card Adding fields 97 Attaching pictures 99 Attaching ringin g tones 99 Changing fields 97 Changing group memberships 103 Creating 94 Creating SIM contact card 104 Field information 98 Opening 96 Receiving 106 Renaming fields 97 Searching 96 Sending 105 Sending via SMS 108 Settings 107 SIM directory options 105 Storing DTMF tones 101 Templates 100 Troubleshooting 249 VIP Group settings 109 Contact database 109 Contact group 102 Contact information Overview 8 Contacts Cannot select a card 249 Moving from other devices 36 Search details 97 Contacts main view 93 Control key 18 Control Panel 218 Currency 231
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 282 D Data Transferring 36 Data call barring 221 Date format 231 Desk Adding links 66 Changing background image 66 Main view 65 Writing n otes 66 Desk, application 65 Dialogs 13 Digital certificat es 224 Disappeared applications 245 Display Elements 11 Indicators 13 , 41 Settings 222 Troubleshooting 245 Documents Creating 192 Inserting objects 194 Outline 195 Pagination 195 Sending 30 Templates 194 Text markers 195 Text style 192 DTMF tones Sending 44 , 77 Storing in a contact card 101 E Emergency calls 91 Enter key 20 Escape key 18 F Fax Access requirements 159 Polling 170 Receiving and reading 162 , 169, 170 Sending 163 , 164 , 168 Settings 171 Troubleshooting 249 Writing 164 , 168 Fax modem 239 Activating 243 Disabling 243 Settings 241 Troubleshooting 254 Fetching Faxes 170 Mail 179 File manager
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 283 Creating folders 209 Files view 207 Folder view 207 Moving files and folders 209 Overview 206 Renaming files and folders 210 Searching files and folders 210 Viewing folders 207 Viewing properties 210 Files .sis files 227 Saving 29 Fixed dialling 89 Flight profile 91 Folders Default saving folder 231 Frames changing size 147 opening as a new page 147 G General features 26 Glossary 269 H Help Key 19 Troubleshooting 245 Viewing 3 , 48 Home city 216 I Image albums Creating 234 Viewing 234 Images Albums 233 Creating new 235 Moving 234 Receiving via infrared 236 Resizing 235 Imaging 233 Inbox 162 Indicators on display 13 Infrared Activating 62 Settings 35 Troubleshooting 252 International call s 43 Internet Access requirements 131 Callback settings 137 Connection scripts 139 Creating or modifying connections 133 Data call settings 136 Establishing a connection 141
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 284 Internet access point 132 PPP compression 138 Proxy settings 135 Setting up connections 132 Settings 134 Troubleshooting 251 , 256 Invalid SIM card 248 J Java 156 K Keyboard Keys 16 Keyboard shortcuts 17 Keypad Keys 40 Locking 46 Unlocking 47 Keys On phone keypad 40 L Lock code 7 , 42 , 61 , 219 , 255 , 272 Changing 220 lock code 220 Log 33 M Mail Access requirements 159 , 172 Adding attachments 182 Advanced settings 175 Attachments 182 Deleting 179 , 181 Editing accounts 176 General settings 173 Reading 162 , 180 Receiving (fetching) 179 Replying to 181 Sending 163 , 164 , 176 , 178 Server settings 174 Settings 172 Signature 175 Synchronisation 184 Troubleshooting 249 Viewing and saving attachments 182 Writing 164 , 176 Measurement unit 231 Memory Card 24 Details 230 Troubleshooting 255 , 256 Memory card Backups 211
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 285 Formatting 213 Inserting 25 Locking 212 Password protection 212 Removing password 213 Restoring from 211 Menu key 19 Menus In phone 48 , 49 Scrolling 48 Shortcuts 49 Message box cleanup 166 Messages Opening 160 Messaging Application 159 Centre 160 Deleting messages 166 freeing up memory 166 Inbox 160 , 162 Opening folders and messages 160 Outbox 160 , 163 Selecting recipients 165 Sorting 161 Messaging centre 160 Multisel ection 26 N Network services Settings 82 Notes 66 Number format 231 O Office, application 191 Offline 183 Offline viewin g 148 Online 183 Outbox 163 P Pages 13 PC Connectivity Troubleshooting 254 PC mail Converting to 185 Creating 184 Phone Answering 72 Book 70 Call divert menu 62 Call register menu 53 Infrared menu 62 Messages menu 50 Recent calls 71
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 286 Scrolling menus 48 Settings 58 , 77 Settings menu 56 SIM services menu 63 Phone numbers Searching for 43 , 70 Phone security 218 Phone, See also Calls Picture Attaching to a contact card 99 PIN code Changing 220 PIN2 code Changing 220 Pointer 146 Preferred application 17 Presentation viewer 204 Presentations Outline 205 Searching slides 206 Viewing 205 Viewing slides 206 Printing 32 Prints Troubleshooting 254 Profiles 47 , 78 Creating new 79 Properties of Files, folders and drives 210 R Recorder 231 Regional settings 231 Remote Faxbox 171 Mailbox 160 , 172, 183 Remote mailbox 179 Subscribing to 180 Restoring From memory card 211 Ringing tone Attaching to a contact card 99 Playing 99 S Screen Settings 222 Security .sis files 227 Security certificates 224 Security of phone 7 , 218 Service numbers 44 Settings Fax 171 Fax modem 241 Mail 172
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 287 SMS 188 Shift key 18 Short messages, See SMS Shortcuts In communicator interface 27 In Phone menus 49 Shortcuts to applications 17 SMS Access requirements 159 Receiving and reading 162 , 187 Settings 188 Troubleshooting 249 Writing and sendi ng 163 , 164 , 186 Software Installing 226 Removing 226 Speed dials 44 , 81 Spell checking 31 Spreadsheet Aligning 201 Background colour 201 Borders 201 Clearing cells 200 Column width 200 Deleting 202 Entering data 197 Fonts 201 Inserting cell s 199 Naming cells 202 Naming worksheets 202 Number format 201 Page breaks 202 Row height 200 Selecting cells 198 Viewing 203 Spreadsheet application Chartsheets 203 Overview 196 Workbooks 196 Worksheets 196 Stickers 7 T Tabulator (Tab) key 18 Telephone Application 69 Settings 77 Telephone, See also Calls Text Searching for text 30 Time format 231 Transfer from other devices 36 Troubleshooting 245 Blank display 245 Cannot divert or bar 248
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ t s reserved. 288 Cannot make calls 248 Cannot select a contact 249 Cannot send or receive 249 Deleting temporary files 246 Downloading large pages 256 Fax modem 254 flashing display 245 Formatting memory 247 Infrared 252 Internet connec tions 251 Internet when roaming 256 Invalid SIM card 248 Lock codes 255 Low memory 255 , 256 Message too long 251 No response 246 Not charging 245 PC connectivity 254 Phone does not work 245 Poor call quality 248 Printing 254 Restarting 246 V Video Playing 236 Video player 236 Viewing Images 233 Voice mailbox Calling 72 Creating 72 Settings 85 W WAP Access requirements 131 , 152 Bookmarks 154 Differences from WWW 152 Navigating 155 Setting up connections 153 Settings 156 Web pages changing frame sizes 147 Viewing in black and white 147 Viewing in offl ine 148 Wireless data transmission Limitations 8 Word Processor, application 191 World Wide Web Bookmarks 150 Browser application 141 Cache view 149 changing frame sizes 147 Cookies 149 Differences from WAP 152
Copyright é 2000-2003 Nokia. All righ ts reserved. 289 Emptying cache 149 Emptying history 149 Frame options 148 History view 149 Loading images 148 Navigating 143 Plugins view 149 Pointer 146 Settings 148